JP7176173B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Here, among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine provided with ball entry switching means for switching between a state in which the ball can be guided to the ball entrance and a state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance (Patent Document 1). ).

JP 2015-181572 A

However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in switching the state of the incoming ball switching means .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the state switching of the incoming ball switching means .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a game area through which balls flow down, a ball entrance through which the balls flowing down the game area pass, and balls flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance. a ball switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the ball entrance and a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance cannot be guided to the ball entrance; a detection means for detecting a ball that has entered the game machine, the space configuration means for configuring a predetermined space in which up to a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball entrance can exist at the same time; a discharging means capable of discharging the ball existing in the predetermined space from the predetermined space in a state in which the means is switched to the second state; The switching means is configured to be switchable to the first state, and regardless of the number of balls entering the predetermined space in the first state, all the balls entering the space are discharged by the discharging means. The game machine is configured to give a predetermined value to the player based on the detection of the ball by the detecting means, and the incoming ball switching means is configured to A rolling part capable of rolling and a blocking part capable of blocking the ball from flowing down toward the ball entrance side are provided, and the rolling part and the blocking part are configured to be integrally operable.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to improve the switching of the state of the incoming ball switching means .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a partial front perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line IX-IX of FIG. 8; It is a front view of the first variable winning device. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XI-XI of FIG. 10; FIG. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XII-XII of FIG. 10; (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device taken along line XII-XII in FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XVI-XVI of FIG. 15; FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XIX-XIX in FIG. 18; (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20 (a), and (c) is the first It is a rear view of the variable winning device. (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXIb-XXIb of FIG. FIG. 21D is a rear view of the variable winning device, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXId-XXId of FIG. 21(c). (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. (a) is a diagram showing changes in clocking of the first specific winning hole in the first operating pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing changes in clocking of the first specific winning hole in the second operating pattern. There is, and (c) is a diagram showing a change in timing of the first specific prize winning opening in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXVI-XXVI of FIG. 25; (a) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. FIG. 27(c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device taken along line XXVIII-XXVIII of FIG. 27(c). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding relationship with the jackpot classification in a 1st hit classification counter and a special design. (a) is a diagram showing changes in timing of the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole in the fourth operation pattern; It is the figure which showed the time-measurement change of 2 specific prize-winning mouths. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. 31; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate; (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device taken along line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. (a) and (b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device, and (c) is a partial sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b). (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing how a ball that has reached the first variable prize winning device flows down. It is a partial front view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of the game board in the fourth embodiment. It is a partial front view of the game board. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding relationship with the jackpot classification in a 1st hit classification counter and a special design. (a) is a diagram showing timing changes of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the sixth operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing timing of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the seventh operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. (a) is a diagram showing timing changes of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the eighth operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing timing of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the ninth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. It is the figure which showed the time-measurement change of the 1st specific prize-winning hole and the specific area in the 10th operation pattern. It is a partial front view of the game board in the fifth embodiment. It is a partial rear view of the game board. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device taken along line XLVI-XLVI in FIG. (a) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. (a) and (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the corresponding relationship with the jackpot classification in a 1st hit classification counter and a special design. (a) is a diagram showing changes in timing of the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole in the eleventh operating pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning hole and the second specific winning hole in the twelfth operating pattern. It is the figure which showed the time-measurement change of 2 specific prize-winning mouths. It is a partial front view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LII-LII in FIG. 51; (a) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning device. (a) is a diagram showing timing changes of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the 13th operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing timing of the first specific winning opening and the specific area in the 14th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. FIG. 21 is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate in the seventh embodiment; It is a top view of a 1st variable winning device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable prize winning device along the line corresponding to line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b). 35(a) and 35(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device along the line corresponding to the XXXVc-XXXVc line in FIG. 35(b). It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in 8th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63(a), and (c) is the first FIG. 63D is a rear view of the variable winning device, and (d) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device along line LXIIId-LXIIId of FIG. 63(c). (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a), and (c) is the first FIG. 64D is a rear view of the variable winning device, and (d) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXIVd-LXIVd of FIG. 64(c). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excited) state of a solenoid of the drive device, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip member, opening/closing plate, auxiliary opening/closing member, and regulating member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70 (a), and (c) is the first 70(d) is a rear view of the variable winning device, and (d) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXXd-LXXd of FIG. 70(c). (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along line LXXIb-LXXIb of FIG. 71 (a), and (c) is the first FIG. 71D is a rear view of the variable winning device, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXXId-LXXId of FIG. 71(c). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excited) state of a solenoid of the drive device, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip member, opening/closing plate, auxiliary opening/closing member, and regulating member. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excited) state of a solenoid of the drive device, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip member, opening/closing plate, auxiliary opening/closing member, and regulating member. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excited) state of a solenoid of the drive device, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip member, opening/closing plate, auxiliary opening/closing member, and regulating member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in 10th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of a change in the state of the first specific winning hole and a change in the state of the movable member over time in the round game R. FIG. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXXX-LXXX in FIG. 79; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate; (a) to (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (a) to (c) are schematic front views of the projecting rib, the opening/closing means, and the second additional winning opening, schematically showing the arrangement of the projecting rib, the opening/closing means, and the second additional winning opening. (a) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during the advance notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and (b) is a timing effect (operation effect); It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of inside. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content during timing production|presentation (operation production|presentation). (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) in the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round, and (b) is during the timing effect (operation effect). 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents of . (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents during a timing effect (operation effect). (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents for notifying that the sixth round game is being executed by the third symbol display device. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a ROM in the MPU of the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a first winning type selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of an opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of an opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table. is. (a) is a diagram showing changes in timing of the first specific winning opening, the interference member, and the specific region in the fifteenth operation pattern; (b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning opening, interference It is the figure which showed the chronological change of a member and a specific area. (a) is a diagram showing time-measurement changes of the first specific winning opening, the interference member and the specific region in the seventeenth operation pattern, and (b) is the first specific winning opening and interference in the eighteenth operation pattern It is the figure which showed the chronological change of a member and a specific area. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing chronological changes of the first specific winning opening, the interference member, and the specific area in the nineteenth operation pattern; (a) is a diagram showing changes over time of the first specific winning opening, the interference member, and the specific region in the 20th operation pattern; (b) is a diagram showing the first specific winning opening, interference It is the figure which showed the chronological change of a member and a specific area. FIG. 3 is a model diagram for explaining counters and the like provided in a RAM of a main control device; It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of a main controller. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of ROM of the MPU of the sound lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of RAM. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process. 10 is a flowchart showing state command setting processing; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. 6 is a flowchart showing prefetch processing; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing. 4 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing startup processing; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing; It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing. It is the flowchart which showed the content of a jackpot operation|movement setting process. 4 is a flowchart showing the contents of opening/closing processing; 4 is a flow chart showing the content of ending processing. It is the flowchart which showed the content of alerting|reporting processing. It is the flowchart which showed the content of a prize-winning process. 4 is a flowchart showing details of abnormality processing; It is a flow chart which shows storage control processing. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of upper limit value setting processing 1 of an operation counter; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the contents of upper limit value setting processing 2 of an operation counter; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the content of the storage valve operation|movement process. It is a flow chart which shows V winning a prize processing. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing; It is a flow chart which shows hit related processing. It is a flowchart which shows production|presentation processing during a big hit. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of display effect round command setting processing; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process; It is the flowchart which showed the storage state monitoring process. 4 is a flowchart showing lamp output processing; It is a flowchart which shows the content of button input monitoring / production|presentation processing. It is a flowchart which shows a ball number confirmation process. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit classification selection table 202b in a 2nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing time-measured changes in the opening/closing plate and the auxiliary opening/closing member in the 22nd operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing time-measurement changes in the opening/closing plate and the auxiliary opening/closing member in the 23rd operation pattern. FIG. 12C is a diagram showing changes over time of the opening/closing plate and the auxiliary opening/closing member in the twenty-fourth operation pattern; (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents for notifying that the sixth round game is being executed by the third symbol display device. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM in the MPU of the main control unit in the third control example; (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of a first winning random number table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit classification selection table. (a) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection table. It is a diagram showing the timing change of the opening and closing plate, the solenoid and the distribution device in the small hit A and the timing change of the opening and closing plate, the solenoid and the distribution device in the small hit B.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 23. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by causing balls (hereinafter also referred to as game balls or pachinko balls) to flow down in front of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first opening. A ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a first variable prize winning device 1000, a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. 1) is attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64, the second ball opening 640, the first variable winning device 1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin arc member 70 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, and the ball enters the normal ball entrance 67. When it passes, a lottery for a normal pattern (second pattern) is performed. In the lottery for the special symbols performed for the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbols are in a low probability state, for example, a special symbol jackpot is determined with a probability of 1/320. For example, with a probability of 1/60, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. For convenience of explanation, the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as "special symbol 1 lottery", and the lottery for the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 will be referred to as "special symbol 1 lottery". The lottery for the special symbol that is drawn is called "lottery for special symbol 2".

When the special pattern jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific prize winning port 1000a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until 10 balls win). (Until you do) the action to be released is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the first specific prize-winning hole 1000a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

Six types of special symbol jackpots are provided: "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot a", "jackpot b", and "jackpot c" (Fig. 22). reference). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and is configured to change the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 1000.

When the special symbol (first symbol) lottery is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, the lottery result is displayed. A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each game is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1), or the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 (special If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and a variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. When both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), a determination is made as to whether or not the normal symbol wins. When the normal pattern is won, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. become easy. That is, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. It is displayed and also shown in the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal ball entrance 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. be started.

In this embodiment, as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the special game state ends, and the special symbol lottery is performed. After completing 100 times, it is configured to be set to a normal state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the variable probability state of the special symbol is provided after the end of the special game state, the variable probability state of the special symbol is configured to end according to the number of special symbol lotteries. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot a, which will be described later), the pachinko machine 10 is operated during the period from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot. may shift to a special symbol high probability state (during the probability variation of the special symbol). In this case, after a big win game of other big win types (for example, big win C, big win b, big win c, which will be described later), it is configured to be in a time-saving state of normal symbols until the lottery of special symbols is completed 100 times.

In addition, the number of lotteries for the special symbols to which the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols described above is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

In addition, the number of lotteries for the special symbols that are in the time-saving state of the normal symbols described above is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, during so-called probability fluctuation (during probability change), in other words, to a special game state. It is a game state that is easy to transition to. The high-probability state of the special symbols in the present embodiment (during the probability change of the special symbols) includes the state of the game in which the winning probability of the normal symbols (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640. . On the other hand, the ``low probability state of special symbols'' refers to the time when the special symbols are not changing, and the probability of the big win is normal, that is, the state of the probability of big wins being lower than during the changing of the special symbols.

In addition, the time saving state of normal symbols (during time saving) means a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 . In addition, the normal state means the state of the game in which neither the probability variation of the special symbols nor the time reduction of the normal symbols is performed (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the normal symbols (second symbol) is increased).

During the probability change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, not only the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, and the normal state is achieved. A long time is set compared to When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol. That is, the lottery for the special symbols is facilitated.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, or in addition to changing the opening time , The number of times of opening the electric accessary 640a in the case of winning a normal symbol may be increased more than in the normal state. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened, and At least one of the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be changed. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the normal symbol ( The winning probability of only the second symbol) may be increased compared to the normal state.

A first pattern display provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. A plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting state whether or not a special symbol lottery is being executed accompanying a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). or display a special pattern (first pattern) according to the lottery result of the special pattern as a stop pattern after the fluctuation is completed, or a ball entered into the first ball entrance 64. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in this first symbol display device 37, The number of balls is reserved up to four times for each type of ball entrance. In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four. The number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but also indicates the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot C, A special pattern (first pattern) corresponding to the jackpot a, jackpot b, jackpot c) is displayed.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol is displayed. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 triggers the variable display of the second pattern. A second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

In this embodiment, the third symbols are composed of 10 kinds of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery of the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) to be described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. It is configured such that a jackpot is generated after the end of the variable display. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery results of the special symbols are "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot b", and "jackpot c", even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. A variable display in which the main symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, if it is "jackpot A" or "jackpot a", any number among all numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including odd numbers A variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned.

Next, a description will be given of the display (right-hand navigation) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to prompt the player to hit the ball aiming at the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a can be easily opened when the special symbols are in the variable probability state or the normal symbol is in the time-saving state. By hitting (right hitting), it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 . In addition, although the details will be described later, when a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 results in a big win, the first ball entrance 64 Compared to the case where a special pattern lottery (lottery of special pattern 1) is made based on the ball hitting the head, the jackpot (jackpot a) that can obtain the maximum profit is likely to be achieved. Therefore, in the variable probability state of the special symbols given after the end of the big hit, or in the time-saving state of the normal symbols, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right stroke. In other words, even if the variable probability state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the ball cannot be entered into the second ball entrance 640 unless the player hits right. The player cannot fully receive the benefit of the probability variation state of the pattern and the time-saving state of the normal pattern.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the variable state of special symbols and the time-saving state of normal symbols, a specific image (right-handed navigation) is displayed, so that the player can enjoy the variable state of special symbols and the time-saving state of normal symbols. It is structured so that the benefits of becoming a company can be obtained without fail.

In the right-handed navigator, the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "Aim right!" By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 . Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely acquire the benefits of the variable probability state of the special symbols and the time-saving state of the normal symbols.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In this warning image, it is determined that the player is hitting the ball to the right even though it is not a period during which the player should hit the ball to the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 (to hit the ball to the right). This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player hits. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting to the right in the normal state (neither the probability changing state of the special symbols nor the time saving state of the normal symbols).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to be difficult to open in the normal state (even if the ball is hit rightward, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second hole 640). Therefore, if the player hits the ball right-handed in the normal state, the chances of winning the lottery for the special symbol are reduced compared to hitting the ball aiming at the first ball entrance 64 in the left-handed state. That is, if the player hits right in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big win, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, the player is prevented (suppressed) from losing money by displaying a right-handed warning image to encourage left-handed hitting.

When it is determined that the player is playing right-handed in the normal state, the message "warning" and "play left-handed!" characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be reminded that he/she should not hit with the right hand (should hit with the left hand). Further, by confirming whether or not there is a right-handed hitting warning screen, the hall clerk can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of hitting right-handed in the normal state.

As a method of determining whether or not a right-handed hit is being made, for example, the ball enters the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) into which the ball can enter when the right-handed hit is made. Judging by whether the ball is hit or not.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state, a right-handed warning image is displayed. It is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), when it is detected that the ball has entered the first specific winning port 1000a (entered the ball), it is determined that an illegal game is being played, It may be configured to display a hitting warning image. As a result, the hall clerk can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud by simply confirming the presence or absence of the right-hand hitting warning image. In addition, in a state other than the special game state (jackpot state), when it is detected that the ball has entered the first specific winning hole 1000a, a signal indicating that fraud is being performed is sent to the hall computer. It may be configured to output As a result, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility that fraud has been committed, and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where fraud has occurred.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that the first variable prize winning device 1000 is abnormal will be described. Here, the abnormality of the first variable prize winning device 1000 is exemplified by detecting a ball entering the first specific prize winning port 1000a even though it is not in the special game state (jackpot state).

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable prize winning device 1000 , a large character “warning” is displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 . At the bottom of the screen, the characters "Please call the gate error attendant" are displayed. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, so that the player can quickly request repairs or the like from the pachinko hall clerk or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. are alternately turned on for a predetermined period of time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "x" after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (symbol of "○" in this embodiment), the electric role object 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (fluctuation time) is set so as to be shorter during the probability variation of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol than during the normal state of the game state. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern is performed in a short time during the probability change of the special pattern and during the time saving of the normal pattern, so that the lottery of the normal pattern (second pattern) can be performed more often than during the normal state. can. Therefore, since the chances of winning the normal symbols increase, the player can be given many chances to open the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the probability variation of the special symbol and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the winning probability is increased, or the opening time or number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a is increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one normal symbol hit may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, the balls flow down the right side of the game board. is configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and at the second symbol reservation lamp 84. is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern A part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can Also, the number of normal ball entrances (through gates) 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit and displayed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. FIG.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 in front view, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. FIG.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, if the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of the first entrance The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball opening 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, The object 640a is in an open state (expanded state), and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the probability variation of the special design and during the time saving of the normal design, the probability of winning the normal design is higher than during the normal state, and the time taken to display the fluctuation of the normal design is short, so the fluctuation of the normal design In the display, the pattern of "○" becomes easy to be displayed. Therefore, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessary 640a is opened during the probability change of the special symbols and during the time saving of the normal symbols is longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than in the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second ball entrance 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win a prize.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. be. However, the probability of winning the jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot a) with which the maximum profit (ball output) is obtained for the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. is set higher than when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 .

During normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second ball entrance 640. Aiming at the ball, the ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first ball entrance 64, there are many chances of winning a jackpot lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim to be.

On the other hand, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, by passing the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state. , since it is in a state where it is easy to win the second ball entrance 640, the ball is shot toward the second ball entrance 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"). ), it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and winning the second ball entrance 640. becomes.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A first variable prize winning device 1000 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (the lower left side of the second ball entrance 640), and a first specific prize winning device 1000 is opened in the left-right direction substantially at the center thereof. A winning opening (large open opening) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses when a special symbol lottery resulting from winning a prize in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 results in a big win, The first symbol display device 37 is lit so as to be a jackpot stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the first specific winning port 1000a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The first specific winning opening 1000a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the first specific winning opening 1000a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of game value (game value) than usual (in this embodiment, , 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of one ball.

Specifically, the first variable prize winning device 1000 includes an opening/closing plate 1300 that rotates upward to form an open state that guides the ball to the first specific prize winning port 1000a, and a solenoid 1510 that operates the opening/closing plate 1300. I have. The first specific prize winning port 1000a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. When the jackpot is won, the solenoid 1510 is driven to rotate the opening/closing plate 1300 upward to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific prize winning port 1000a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. operates to repeat alternately.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first ball entry port 64 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the ball entrances 63, 64, 1000a, 640 are guided through the first out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, such as setting of the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device. do.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the first specific winning port 1000a. A solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input/output Various commands and control signals are transmitted to them through the port 205 .

Further, the input/output port 205 is provided with various switches 208 (including the detection sensor 1240, the second detection sensor 2255, etc.) consisting of a group of switches (not shown), a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the like. A RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253. do.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 23. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. FIG. The first variable winning device 1000 has an inclined surface 1237 provided on its upper surface, and when the player hits to the right, one of the balls flowing down the right side of the variable timing device unit 80 enters the second ball entrance 640. Almost all of the spheres that do not form spheres and flow downstream are guided to the flow path forming portion.

6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. FIG. The first variable prize winning device 1000 includes a main body member 1100 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, a covering front plate 1200 fastened and fixed to the main body member 1100 from the front side, and the main body member 1100 and the covering front plate. a power transmission member 1400 that is rotatably supported on the rear side of the main body member 1100 and applies a load to the opening and closing plate 1300 by rotation; and the power transmission member. a driving device 1500 for driving the motor 1400, a regulating member 1600 for regulating ball discharge in conjunction with the opening/closing plate 1300, and the power transmission member 1400, the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 covering the main body member 1100 from the rear side. and a rear cover 1700 fastened and fixed as follows.

The body member 1100 includes a thin plate member 1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, and a shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 recessed from the front side to the back side of the thin plate member 1110. A receiving portion 1120 formed to partially penetrate the receiving portion 1120 , a holding hole 1130 which is a through hole in which the detection sensor 1240 is inserted and inserted on the right side of the receiving portion 1120 in a front view, and the ball flows down on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 . A projecting part 1140 projecting along the path, a discharge port 1150 for discharging the ball from the front side to the back side of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotation supporting the power transmission member 1400 projecting from the back side of the thin plate member 1110. It mainly includes a support portion 1160 and a support claw portion 1170 protruding like a claw so as to be able to support the shaft portion 1610 of the regulation member 1600 above the discharge port 1150 .

The accommodation portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is accommodated, a rectangular recess 1122 provided in a rectangular shape below the straight line connecting the support recesses 1121 , and a rectangular recess 1122 . A rectangular through hole perpendicular to the straight line connecting the pair of support recesses 1121 for moving the load receiving portion 1330 of the opening/closing plate 1300 moving along the right end of the recess 1122 back and forth with respect to the thin plate member 1110 . 1123 and .

The support recess 1121 is formed to have a width slightly larger than the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and in the assembled state, the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening is closed on the back surface of the covering front plate 1200. be. That is, the opening/closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the rear surface of the covering front plate 1200 .

The rectangular concave portion 1122 has a surface area larger than that of the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and the depth of the concave portion is slightly deeper than that of the plate portion 1310. As shown in FIG. Thus, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is tilted (closed state), the plate portion 1310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular concave portion 1122 , and the opening/closing plate 1300 can be prevented from protruding toward the front side of the thin plate member 1110 .

The protruding portion 1140 protrudes to a position where it abuts on the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200 . The falling ball is decelerated by coming into contact with the projecting portion 1140 . A similar projecting portion 1235 is also arranged in the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200 at a position that does not overlap the projecting portion 1140 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

The rotation support portion 1160 includes a shaft portion 1161 that rotatably supports the power transmission member 1400, and a circular or arc shape that is coaxial with the shaft portion 1161 and has a uniform protrusion height toward the back side of the thin plate member 1110. and a circular rib 1162 formed in the shape of a rib.

Circular rib 1162 maintains the distance between rotating distal end portion 1421 of power transmission member 1400 and the rear surface of thin plate member 1110 at a predetermined distance or more. That is, the circular rib 1162 is formed over the entire angular range of contact with the rotating tip portion 1421 during operation of the power transmission member 1400 .

The covering front plate 1200 includes a thin plate member 1210 arranged at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 on the front side, and a side wall portion extending from the left end of the thin plate member 1210 in the front view to the rear side. 1220, a housing portion 1230 extending in a box shape opening toward the rear side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side of the side wall portion 1220 in the left-right direction, and an upper end portion of the housing portion 1230. and a detection sensor 1240 .

The thin plate member 1210, the right side wall portion of the side wall portion 1220 when viewed from the front, the left side wall portion of the housing portion 1230 when viewed from the front, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 form a flow path, which is a hole through which the ball flows vertically. department is constructed.

The accommodating part 1230 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and has a storage channel 1231 formed therein with a width that allows the ball to flow down. It mainly includes a projecting portion 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side in front view.

The storage channel 1231 is configured in such a manner that a side wall portion with a U-shaped cross section that opens on the back side extends while bending into a U-shaped front surface, and the opening is closed by the main body member 1100 so that the ball can pass through. form a flow path. In addition, in this embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the region where the storage channel 1231 is formed is formed of a light-transmissive material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231 .

The storage channel 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12), which is an inclined surface that guides the ball toward the back side at the lowest end, and a rolling surface that rolls the ball guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front-rear direction. and a surface 1231b.

The inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal surface of the near side (right side in FIG. 12) portion of the storage passage 1231 reaching the rolling surface 1231b.

The projecting portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the projecting portion 1140 of the body member 1100 . That is, the protruding part 1235 protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231, and decelerates the ball by coming into contact with the ball.

The inclined surface 1237 is inclined downward toward the left in front view. As a result, the ball that has landed on the inclined surface 1237 can be rolled leftward and guided to the flow path forming portion.

The detection sensor 1240 has a through hole as the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the ball passes through the first specific winning hole 1000a, the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage and counts the winning number.

The open/close plate 1300 is a member that switches between rolling the ball toward the detection sensor 1240 and dropping the ball downward without coming into contact with the ball, depending on the difference in attitude. and a pair of shaft portions 1320 projecting along the longitudinal direction from the lateral ends of the plate portion 1310, and a pair of shaft portions 1320 extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion 1320 at the base of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side in front view. and a load receiving portion 1330 provided.

The plate portion 1310 has a rolling surface 1311 on which a ball rolls in the raised posture (open state), and the length in the short side direction is covered in the raised posture (open state) in which the short side direction extends in the front-rear direction. The distance from the front plate 1200 is set to a length that is equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction is set to be close to the detection sensor 1240 .

Further, the plate portion 1310 includes a chamfered portion 1312 chamfered into an arcuate cross-section at the upper corner of the opposite end portion of the shaft portion 1320 in the raised posture (open state).

The plate portion 1310 is elongated in the left-right direction and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

The load receiving portion 1330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry preventing portion 1331 extending to the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an intervening transmission portion 1332 extending to the back side of the rolling surface 1311, and an intervening transmission portion thereof. An engaging portion 1333 projecting from 1332 to the right side in rear view (the side on which the power transmission member 1400 is arranged) is mainly provided.

The engaging portion 1333 extends to a position where it interferes with the motion locus of the power transmission member 1400, and has a chamfered portion 1333a chamfered in an arc shape on its upper surface. When the power transmission member 1400 abuts against the power transmission member 1400, the chamfered portion 1333a abuts against the power transmission member 1400 instead of the corner portion. .

The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disk-shaped body portion 1410 and an extension portion 1420 extending from the body portion 1410 in the axial radial direction.

The body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 through which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a projecting pin 1412 projecting from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the drilling direction of the support hole 1411 .

The protruding pin 1412 is a portion that engages with the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500. As the tip member 1520 moves linearly by switching the excitation of the driving device 1500, the protruding pin 1412 is displaced to transmit power. Member 1400 rotates.

The extension part 1420 has a rotation tip part 1421 formed in an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411 at the extension tip part, a pushing part 1422 projecting from the rotation tip part 1421 toward the front side, Prepare.

The driving device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 that linearly operates a movable member by switching excitation, and a tip member 1520 that is H-shaped in front view (a shape that has concave portions at the top and bottom) disposed at the tip of the movable member of the solenoid 1510. , is mainly provided.

The tip member 1520 is configured such that the upper concave portion thereof has a shape capable of accommodating the protruding pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400 . Specifically, a recess is formed in a shape that keeps the protruding pin 1412 accommodated inside during the rotation of the power transmission member 1400 (see FIG. 20).

The regulating member 1600 includes a rod-shaped shaft portion 1610 pivotally supported by the support claw portion 1170, an extension portion 1620 extending in the radial direction of the shaft portion 1610 with a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the shaft portion 1610, and a main body. The surface on the side of the member 1100 mainly includes a ball receiving portion 1630 that is formed at the same level as the extending portion 1620 and has a greater thickness than the extending portion 1620 .

The extension part 1620 is arranged on the locus of movement of the intervening transmission part 1332 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and receives a pressing load from the intervening transmission part 1332 when the opening/closing plate is in a raised posture (open state).

The ball receiving portion 1630 overlaps the discharge port 1150 in a tilted posture (posture in which the end on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1610 is placed in a lower position, a stored state) (a ball is discharged through the opening of the discharge port 1150). narrowed to the extent that it does not open).

Note that the regulation member 1600 is biased by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction in which it maintains a raised posture (posture in which the end on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1610 is placed in the upper position, ejected state).

The rear cover 1700 has a discharge port 1710, which is a through hole through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes. A ball discharged from the discharge port 1710 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 9 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along line IX-IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is accommodated in the rectangular concave portion 1122, so that the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the covering member 1110 are closed. The opening/closing plate 1300 can be arranged along the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without narrowing the distance between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210 . The thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 are arranged side by side with a space that allows a ball to pass through. By guiding the sphere between them, the sphere can be dropped along the channel forming portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 of the load receiving portion 1330 moves toward the front side of the main body member 1100 so as to partially cover the opening of the detection sensor 1240. overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, resulting in an irregular winning (for example, even if the ball is not guided by the opening/closing plate 1300, the ball hitting a nail or the like is thrown laterally and the detection sensor 1240) can be prevented.

Although the details will be described later, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 because the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state. Therefore, FIG. 8 shows a state in which no balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 .

The open state of the opening/closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along line XI-XI of FIG. 10 and 11, the opening/closing plate 1300 is in an open state, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken. In addition, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of the sphere is illustrated with imaginary lines in order to grasp the size of the sphere.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 protrudes toward the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is less than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is prevented from falling.

The ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the front covering plate 1200 rolls along the rolling surface 1311 of the opening/closing plate 1300 along the inclination, and reaches the detection sensor 1240 from the right end thereof. , and enter the storage channel 1231 .

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate portion 1310 and the covering front plate 1200. As shown in FIG. Therefore, compared to the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to the extent that it abuts on the covering front plate 1200, the required materials can be reduced, and the cost of materials required for the opening/closing plate 1300 can be reduced.

Further, by reducing the diameter of the movement locus of the distal end of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the lateral direction, it is possible to easily avoid interference between the ball passing in front of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the opening/closing plate 1300 when the opening/closing plate 1300 rotates. be able to.

Here, although the details will be described later, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the regulation member 1600 is in the storage state. stored in Therefore, FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 .

As shown in FIG. 10, the storage channel 1231 of the present embodiment is formed with a length that allows a predetermined number of balls (10 in the present embodiment) to be stored. When ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 , the tenth ball stops at a position detected by the detection sensor 1240 .

Therefore, the tenth ball acts as a plug, preventing the eleventh ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 . In other words, the resistance when the 11th ball tries to pass through the detection sensor 1240 becomes extremely large, making it difficult for the 11th ball to enter the detection sensor 1240 .

In this embodiment, when the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, and the balls remaining on the opening/closing plate 1300 flow downward. Then, the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged by switching the restricting member 1600 to the discharge state with the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where no ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231, the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, but stops at a position where it does not pass through the detection sensor 1240. do.

When the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state. It is pushed inside the channel 1231 (see FIG. 21(b)). That is, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the 10th ball stops in such a manner as to block the opening of the detection sensor 1240, and while the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the middle of switching to the closed state, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 is closed to the 10th ball. Since the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is closed while contacting (rubbing) the ball, the timing at which the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entry prevention unit 1331 operates are shifted. It is possible to prevent the moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened, and it is possible to prevent the 11th ball from passing through the first specific winning hole 1000a.

Therefore, there is no need to set a limit on the period from when the specified number of balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240 to when the opening/closing plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, and the period can be set arbitrarily. For example, the opening/closing operation may be started 0.2 msec after the detection, or the opening/closing operation may be started 1 second after the detection. Note that in this embodiment, after the tenth ball abuts against the ninth ball (after the center of the ball is placed on the detection sensor 1240 side beyond the front side of the ball entry preventing portion 1331), ) In order to operate the opening/closing plate 1300, the opening/closing plate 1300 is controlled to open/close 0.5 seconds after detection by the detection sensor 1240. FIG.

Due to the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 described above, in this embodiment, the number of balls passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to ten while the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the ball entry prevention (delay) can be performed only for the 11th ball. That is, the first to tenth balls can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progress speed of the special game state compared to delaying the passage of the balls in the whole ball.

For example, in the case of a structure that delays the winning of subsequent balls by decelerating once the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 at the passing position, it is easy to suppress the winning of the 11th ball, while the 1st ball Each of the 10th balls from 1240 decelerates the ball even when it rolls on the rolling surface 1311 in a continuous manner. There is a problem that the length of time becomes long, and the game is slowed down.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the configuration for decelerating the first to tenth balls is not adopted, and only the eleventh ball is configured not to enter the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, the first to tenth balls are Even if the balls flow down in a row, they can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at the same flow speed, so that the speed of the game can be increased.

In addition, even if most of the period in which the open/close plate 1300 is open due to repairs such as clogged balls has passed, and the game is started at the end of the period, the balls entering the detection sensor 1240 are not counted. It doesn't mean slowing you down, so you can get more balls into the ball.

Regarding the eleventh ball, no matter how fast it flows down toward the detection sensor 1240 (at a speed that can reach the detection sensor 1240 before the opening/closing plate 1300 starts tilting), regardless of the speed. , the 11th ball can be physically prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 by the balls up to the 10th ball.

The arrangement of the spheres retained in the retention channel 1231 will be described with reference to FIG. 12 . FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XII-XII of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 12, a sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is illustrated.

Here, the mechanism by which the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are arranged in the same arrangement each time will be described. First, the ball P1 that first enters the empty storage channel 1231 is guided by the guide surface 1231a that slopes backward at the lowest part of the storage channel 1231, and is placed at a position that contacts the front of the regulating member 1600. be.

Ball P1 is weighted by the subsequent arrival of ball P2 at the lower end and settles into the arrangement illustrated in FIG. The sphere P2 has a degree of freedom of arrangement in the front-rear direction on the right side of the sphere P1 in a front view (right side in FIG. 12). That is, depending on how the pachinko machine 10 falls in the front-rear direction, it may lean toward the covering front plate 1200 or toward the projecting portion 1140 of the main body member 1100 . As shown in FIG. 12, the protruding portion 1140 is disposed at a position where the protruding tip of the protruding portion 1140 abuts on the ball P2. There is no contact with the thin plate member 1110 of 1100 .

Sphere P2 is weighted by reaching a position where subsequently entered sphere P3 abuts sphere P2. Here, in the present embodiment, the projecting portion 1235 arranged on the covering front plate 1200 is arranged so that the ball P2 and the projecting portion 1235 are located on the right side of the ball P2 regardless of the position of the ball P2 in the front-rear direction. The ball P3 enters between and is arranged at a position where it is impossible to abut against the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 (a position where the gap with the ball P2 is kept small).

Therefore, regardless of the position of the sphere P2 in the front-rear direction, the center position of the sphere P3 will be located on the back side of the center position of the sphere P2, and the sphere P3 will be located on the back side of the sphere P2 (upper side in FIG. 12). ) to abut. Therefore, the load of the ball P3 pushes the ball P2 toward the front side (lower side in FIG. 12). This settles the sphere P2 into the arrangement illustrated in FIG.

After that, ball P3 receives a load from ball P4, which subsequently enters ball P3, under the same conditions as ball P2 receives a load from ball P3 (except that the front-rear direction is reversed), so that ball P3 settles into the arrangement illustrated in FIG.

That is, the arrangement of the n-th ball that hits the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the (n+1)th ball that hits. In addition, in this embodiment, the arrangement of the spheres is not fixed by narrowing the storage channel 1231, but while maintaining the cross-sectional area of the storage channel 1231 larger than the diameter of the sphere, the projections 1140, It is realized by disposing 1235. As a result, it is possible to fix the arrangement of the stored balls at a unique position while preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

As described above, in this embodiment, by arranging the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the ball is stored in a fixed arrangement each time the action of storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 occurs. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to unify the number of stored items each time.

With reference to FIG. 13, the ejection of balls from the storage channel 1231 will be described. 13(a) and 13(b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 13(a), the ball P1 is ejected and the ball P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b. , is shown.

As will be described later, when the solenoid 1510 is de-energized and the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the regulating member 1600 is brought into the discharge state and the ball is discharged from the storage passage 1231 . when ejecting the ball. A ball (ball P1 in FIG. 12) arranged at the lowest end is ejected along the slope of the rolling surface 1231b to the back side, and the following ball (ball P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space created thereby. Balls are ejected in order.

Here, since the inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal surface of the extended portion (flow path extending in the left-right direction) of the storage passage 1231, the flow velocity of the sphere P1 is reduced. Since the flow speed of the ball P2 is greater than that of the ball P2, a gap is generated between the ball P1 and the ball P2 (see FIG. 13(a)). Therefore, since the load applied from the ball P2 to the ball P1 when the ball P1 is discharged can be minimized, the speed when the ball P1 is discharged is uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the ball P1. can be

After the ball P1 is discharged, the subsequent balls P2, P3, and P4 flow downstream (left side in FIG. 12) along the slope of the extended portion of the storage channel 1231 . Here, the ball P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the balls P3 and P4 come into contact with the protrusions 1140 and 1235 in the process of flowing down (see FIG. 13(a)). Due to this contact, the spheres P3 and P4 are redirected in directions DP3 and DP4 having a front-to-rear component, passing through the positions of the respective leading spheres P2 and P3 and decelerating.

In other words, the balls P3 and P4 are rearranged in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the storage channel 1231 by abutting the projecting portions 1140 and 1235, and the previously stored balls are retained. It is relocated to its original position and slows down.

As a result, a gap is created between the balls P2 and P3 (see FIG. 13(b)), and the load applied from the ball P3 to the ball P2 when the ball P2 is ejected can be minimized. , regardless of the number of balls stored after the ball P2, the velocity of the ball P2 can be made uniform when it is discharged.

That is, since the following ball flows down the storage channel 1231 over a longer distance, the more the number of stored balls increases, the more the subsequent ball accelerates due to gravity. There is a possibility that the ejection interval between the ball P1 and the ball P1 may change, but the change in the ejection mode is determined by the action of the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 described above (the ball ejected on the rolling surface 1231b and the trailing ball P1). This can be suppressed by creating a gap between the ball and the ball to eliminate the load due to gravity.

After that, the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231 by repeatedly flowing down from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13(a) to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13(b). As described above, by creating a gap between the ball that rolls on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball, the discharged ball is discharged without receiving the weight of the subsequent ball. Therefore, regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231, it is possible to uniform the ball discharge mode (discharge speed, discharge interval, etc.).

In other words, in the present embodiment, the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 can equalize the ball discharge mode (speed during discharge, discharge interval, etc.). In this embodiment, it takes about 0.2 seconds to eject one ball. Therefore, by maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharging state for two seconds or more, all the maximum number (10) of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged.

14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 16 is the first variable winning device along line XVI-XVI of FIG. 1000 is a cross-sectional view; FIG. 14 to 16 show the closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is positioned above the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300. are spaced apart.

Since the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged on the upper side and separated from the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not receive a load from the intervening transmission portion 1332, and the regulating member 1600 acts as a torsion spring (not shown). It is maintained in the ejected state by a biasing force.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 protrudes in such a manner that the size of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is equal to or less than the projected area of the sphere. This can physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 .

17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 19 is the first variable winning device along line XIX-XIX in FIG. 1000 is a cross-sectional view; FIG. 17 to 19, the opening state of the opening/closing plate 1300 is illustrated, and illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in an energized state, and the rotational tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced counterclockwise, causing the opening/closing plate 1300 to open. The engaging portion 1333 is pushed into the pushing portion 1422 .

Interposed transmission portion 1332 of opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged on the lower side as power transmission member 1400 rotates. is switched to a tilted posture (regulating member 1600 is switched to a storage state).

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300, the load due to the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and the biasing force of the torsion spring (not shown) are applied to the regulation member 1600. In this embodiment, the biasing force of the torsion spring is applied. is maintained large, and the driving force of the solenoid 1510 when maintaining the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state is suppressed. The large biasing force of the torsion spring enables the regulating member 1600 to be immediately switched to the discharge state, which leads to the effect that the ball can be rapidly discharged from the storage channel 1231 . The adopted structure will be described below.

In this embodiment, the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged on the movement locus E1 of the power transmission member 1400 when the opening/closing plate 1300 starts to operate from the closed state, while the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state. , the power transmission member 1400 is pushed outward along the rotational axis direction of the motion locus E1. Note that the motion trajectory E1 is illustrated as the outline of the movement trajectory of the portion including the pushing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening/closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not the operating direction (rotational direction) of the power transmission member 1400, but the surface that forms the rotation direction. is multiplied in the axial direction which is perpendicular to . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 around the shaft portion 1320 from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400 .

That is, the biasing force of the torsion spring (not shown) that biases the regulating member 1600 is directed in the direction of pushing back the opening/closing plate 1300 toward the closed state. It is not applied to solenoid 1510 via transmission member 1400 .

Thus, once the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, it is possible to prevent the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for keeping the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 . Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the opening/closing plate 1300 at the maximum value.

That is, after energizing the solenoid 1510 so as to generate enough driving force to switch the regulating member 1600 to the storage state against the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) at the start of operation, the applied voltage is lowered. However, the opening/closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

Therefore, even if a varying load is applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, the opening/closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state and the regulating member 1600 can be maintained in the stored state without being affected by the load.

An example of the varying load applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 is the load applied by the weight of a sphere. That is, for example, since the opening/closing plate 1300 has a structure in which balls land on the rolling surface 1311, when the balls land, the load due to the weight of the balls is applied. 1300 is given a varying load. In addition, for example, the regulating member 1600 receives a load from a ball stored in the storage channel 1231, particularly a ball arranged at the bottom end of the storage channel 1231. , a varying load is applied.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19, the opening/closing plate 1300 and the restricting member 1600 are interlocked, so the restricting member 1600 cannot be set to the ejection state while the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state. Therefore, even if the opening/closing plate 1300 is illegally kept open, it is physically possible to detect that more balls than can be stored in the storage channel 1231 (ten balls or more in this embodiment) pass through the detection sensor 1240 . can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent illegally maintaining the openable/closable plate 1300 in the open state and increasing the winning balls.

20 and 21 illustrate the operations of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 in chronological order. 20(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 20(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20(a). 20(c) is a rear view of the first variable prize winning device 1000, FIG. 21(a) is a rear view of the first variable prize winning device 1000, and FIG. 21(b) is a rear view of FIG. 21(a). 21(c) is a rear view of the first variable prize winning device 1000, and FIG. 21(d) is XXId of FIG. 21(c). It is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the -XXId line.

20 and 21, only the opening/closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the restricting member 1600 remain in the assembled state (see FIG. 5) for easy understanding. , the illustration of other configurations is omitted, and the state change of the opening/closing plate 1300 from the open state to the closed state is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the state in which the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500 is located at a position spaced apart from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state). 20(c), the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b). ), the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the second distance h2 is shown in FIGS. 1520 is displaced and placed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 (final position reached when the solenoid 1510 is energized).

In FIG. 21(b), the first specific prize winning opening 1000a arranged on the front side is shown in imaginary lines for reference, and the outline of the cross-sectional shape of the sphere in the same cross section as that used in the illustration is shown in imaginary lines. illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening/closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21(b) without interfering with the ball.

From the state shown in FIG. 20(a) to the state shown in FIG. 20(c), the power transmission member 1400 rotates, but the opening/closing plate 1300 maintains its posture. In addition, in FIG. 20(c), the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 are in contact with each other.

As a result, it is possible to apply force to the power transmission member 1400 before moving the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the driving force required at the start of rotation (initial motion) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening/closing plate 1300 can be increased.

From the state shown in FIG. 20C to the state shown in FIG. It is in an intermediate state between (see FIG. 21(b)).

In the intermediate state of the opening/closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. , the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 can receive the ball. In this case, the weight of the ball acts in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 21(b)) to push down the rolling surface 1311, but the tip member 1520 moves rightward in rear view (rightward in FIG. 21(a)) to transmit power. Since a load in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21(b)) is applied to the engaging portion 1333 via the member 1400, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing plate 1300 from rotating due to the weight of the ball.

Therefore, in the intermediate state of the opening/closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21(b), it is possible to prevent the ball from passing downward through the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 while allowing the ball to be discharged from the discharge port 1150. .

As a result, there is a problem of maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharge state during the time required for the ball to be discharged from the storage channel 1231, and a conflicting problem of shortening the closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300 (shortening the interval). In the state shown in FIG. 21( a ), the ball is sandwiched between the rolling surface 1311 and the covering front plate 1200 by projecting the plate portion 1310 halfway while continuing to discharge the ball. , can be achieved together.

At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21(b), the opening/closing plate 1300 is in a posture of preventing the ball from passing downward and preventing the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240. As shown in FIG. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21(b), the rolling contact surface 1311 is positioned below the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240, so that the rolling contact surface 1311 in the state shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent the ball on the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent balls from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the regulation member 1600 is in the discharged state, and the function of limiting the number of winning balls by the first variable prize winning device 1000 can be effectively maintained. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 21(d), at the same time when the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the regulation member 1600 is switched to the storage state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the opening/closing plate 1300 and the restricting member 1600 are interlocked by the operation of the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500 . That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the driving device 1500 can be used as the driving force of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 as well.

20 and 21, the case where the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state has been described. can do.

When switching from the open state to the closed state, first, the state shown in FIG. 21(d) changes to the state shown in FIG. 21(b). Here, since the load-receiving portion 1330 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged in the movement direction of the regulating member 1600 , the regulating member 1600 does not move more than the amount of movement of the load-receiving portion 1330 .

That is, since the regulating member 1600 is switched to the ejected state after the opening/closing plate 1300 operates, it is impossible for the opening/closing plate 1300 to maintain the open state after the regulating member 1600 is switched to the ejected state. can be done. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent an irregular prize winning in which the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 at a timing slightly after the start of ejection of the ball.

Also, in the state shown in FIG. 21(b), it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 as long as the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still open and the ball hits the rolling surface 1311 and bounces. , in this embodiment, it can be made impossible.

That is, when the state shown in FIG. 21B is viewed as a state in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the process of being closed from the open state, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves upward. When the ball abuts, no load is generated to support the opening/closing plate 1300 acting in the direction opposite to the direction of the weight of the ball. Therefore, when the ball contacts the rolling surface 1311 , the weight of the ball causes the plate portion 1310 to move downward, so the ball cannot bounce to the detection sensor 1240 . As a result, it is possible to prevent irregular winnings from occurring.

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 22(b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 22(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the above fixed value data. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec). When the value of the first winning random number counter obtained based on the start winning coincides with one of the determination values defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is won.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22(b)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is determined by each jackpot type. , And it is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 22(b)).

In the case of jackpot A, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 . In this case, the player can receive a payout of approximately 2250 prize balls.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 49" in association with the jackpot B (see 202b2 in FIG. 22(b)).

When the jackpot B is won, 8 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable prize winning device 1000 . In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 1200 prize balls.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with the jackpot C (see 202b3 in FIG. 22(b)).

When the jackpot C is won, four rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable prize winning device 1000 . In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 600 prize balls.

As described above, when the lottery for the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64) results in a big win, in any case, the first variable winning device 1000 operates in the first operation pattern. works with Therefore, the difference in the number of paid-out prize balls that a player can acquire appears as a difference due to the number of rounds, and the larger the number of rounds, the larger the number of paid-out prize balls and the longer the time required for the jackpot game.

In the jackpot based on the special pattern 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the jackpot of 15 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 20%, while the jackpot of 4 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 50%. So basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, the 4-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, so the launching of the ball for the subsequent jackpot win can be started early.

On the other hand, when the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79". A jackpot a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 22(b)).

When the jackpot a is won, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable prize winning device 1000, as in the case of the jackpot A. In this case, the player can receive a payout of approximately 2250 prize balls.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 89" in association with the jackpot b (see 202b5 in FIG. 22(b)).

In the case of a jackpot b, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in the second operation pattern (details of which will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000 . In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (1200 in this embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game is longer than the jackpot a.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with the jackpot c (see 202b6 in FIG. 22(b)).

In the case of a jackpot c, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the third operation pattern (details of which will be described later) of the first variable prize winning device 1000 . In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (1875 in this embodiment), and further, the time required for the jackpot game exceeds the case of the jackpot a, and the prize is paid out for each round. The time required for the ball and the jackpot game fluctuates.

As described above, when the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) results in a big win, the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes according to the type of the big win. Due to this difference in operation pattern, while the number of rounds for big wins remains unchanged, it is possible to change the time required for the big win game while providing a difference in the number of payouts. In this embodiment, when the number of payouts is small (jackpot b and jackpot c), the time required for the jackpot game can be prolonged compared to when the number of payouts is large (jackpot a). That is, when a small number of jackpots (jackpot b and jackpot c) are obtained, the timing of hitting the ball for the next jackpot is delayed compared to the case of the jackpot a.

Therefore, in addition to providing a difference in the number of prize balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the profit per unit time (time efficiency) that the player can obtain from the jackpot game due to the difference in the jackpot type A difference can be provided in the number of payouts included).

As a result, the breakdown of the jackpot in the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) includes the jackpot (jack a) that allows a large amount of payouts to be received in a time efficient manner and the payout that is inefficient in time. It is possible to provide a small jackpot (jackpot b, jackpot c), and to increase the player's profit obtained when the jackpot a is won. As a result, while maintaining a high probability of winning the jackpot a, the difference in the number of payouts (the maximum total number of balls won and the minimum total number of balls won) when the game is played continuously for a predetermined period of time. It is possible to configure a game machine that can increase the difference).

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol is hit. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 becomes easier. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbol, the variable probability state of the special symbol is likely to become a big hit of the special symbol, and when it becomes a big hit, it is likely to become a big hit a (big hit of the maximum ball). This makes it easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while strongly anticipating that the special symbols will shift to the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 22(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 22(c)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 204" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design (see 202c2 in FIG. 22(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is displayed. It is determined whether it is a hit or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 23, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing timing changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23(b) is a timing diagram of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the second operation pattern. FIG. 23(c) is a diagram showing changes in timing of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the third operation pattern.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure winning determination, after the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, it starts controlling the determined kind of big winning game. Operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be described below.

<When operating with the first operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, or jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening/closing plate 1300 closed until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and the first round round game R is started after the opening time OP has passed.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the win) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning port 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the first round of the round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open/close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round of the round game R is started.

The inter-round first interval time Int1 is set as a time during which the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged globally. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, and each ball is discharged at an interval of about 0.2 seconds regardless of the number of stored balls. be done. Therefore, it takes about 2 seconds to eject 10 balls.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the second round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the round game R of the second round ends.

In the first operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which no balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round by discharging the balls during the inter-round first interval time Int1. Therefore, from the second round onwards, a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a. The round game R can be ended without waiting for the time (30 seconds). Therefore, the round game R can be rapidly advanced.

After that, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated with the inter-round first interval time Int1 interposed between each round game R, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed and opened. , and the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning port 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening/closing plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. Then, the jackpot game ends with the elapse of the time.

<When operating with the second operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot b, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening/closing plate 1300 closed until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and the first round round game R is started after the opening time OP has passed.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the win) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning port 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the first round of the round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 closed until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the second round is started.

The inter-round second interval time Int2 is set as a time during which at least part of the balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged. That is, as described above, in this embodiment, a maximum of 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, and each ball is discharged at an interval of about 0.2 seconds regardless of the number of stored balls. be done. Therefore, since the number of balls that can be discharged in one second is 5, for example, if 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, even if the balls are discharged at the second interval time Int2 between rounds, , there are still five spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 .

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the second round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the round game R of the second round ends.

In the second operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round by discharging the ball during the inter-round second interval time Int2. Therefore, from the second round onwards, a state may arise in which the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has passed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

After that, similarly, the round game R of the 3rd round to the 15th round is repeated with the second interval time Int2 between rounds interposed between each round game R, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening/closing plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. Then, the jackpot game ends with the elapse of the time.

Here, the elapsed time and the number of payouts of the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern in the 15-round jackpot game are compared. The balls can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the shortest.

First, when a jackpot game is played in the first operating pattern, the shortest time required for ten balls to pass through the first specific winning hole 1000a is 6 seconds. When the time required to continue this 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time between rounds Int1, and the ending time RD are added, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( =OP(10s)+(T1(6s)+Int1(2s))*15R+ED(11s)). Also, the number of payouts is 2250 (=15×10C×15R).

On the other hand, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, 10 balls can be won in the first specific prize winning port 1000a in the first round, but only 5 balls can be won in the second and subsequent rounds. The time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (= OP (10 s) + (T1 (6 s) + Int2 (1 s)) + (T1 (30 s) + Int2 (1 s)) x 13R + T1 (30 s) + Int1 ( 2s)+ED(11s)). Also, the number of payouts is 1200 (=(10C*1R+5C*14R)*15) because only up to 5 balls can be won in the round game R from the second round onwards.

Therefore, when the jackpot game is played with the second operation pattern, it takes three times or more time than when the jackpot game is played with the first operation pattern. gets worse dramatically.

As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player when playing the jackpot game in the first operation pattern. That is, the rarity value of the jackpot A and the jackpot a can be increased, the attention to the jackpot type notified for each jackpot can be improved, and the interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

Although the inter-round second interval time Int2 is set to 1.0 seconds, it is not limited to this, and can be set to various numerical values and can be changed for each round.

For example, the inter-round second interval time Int2 after the end of the round game R of the first round is 0.5 seconds, and the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the round game R of the second round is 1.5 seconds. It is also possible to

In the round game R immediately after the inter-round second interval time Int2 is set to 0.5 seconds, only two balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. is stored, the round game R is started with eight balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, since only two balls can be won in the first specific winning hole 1000a, the number of payouts is also small (30).

In the round game R immediately after the inter-round second interval time Int2 is set to 1.5 seconds, seven balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. If the balls are stored, the round game R is started with three balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, 7 balls can be won in the first specific winning hole 1000a, and a certain number (105) of payouts can be expected.

It is also possible to set the length of the inter-round second interval time Int2 to 2.0 seconds (or longer). In this case, there are no balls left in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R immediately after, and it is possible to win 10 balls in the first specific prize winning port 1000a, so many (150) prizes It can be desired to shorten the progress time of the round game R with the ball.

<When operating with the third operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot c, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening/closing plate 1300 closed until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. Drive control is performed, and the first round round game R is started after the opening time OP has passed.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the win) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning port 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the first round of the round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open/close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round of the round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the second round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the round game R of the second round ends.

By discharging the balls during the inter-round first interval time Int1, a state is formed in which no balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of the second round. (In this embodiment, 10 pachinko balls) can be passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the number of balls can be paid out, and the first operation time T1 of each round can be received. The round game R can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Therefore, while the round game R is progressing rapidly, the payout of prize balls can be received in the same manner as in the first operation pattern.

After that, similarly, the round game R of the 3rd round to the 10th round is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds between each round game R, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

When the tenth round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 closed until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the 11th round of the round game R is started.

In the 11th round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the 11th round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the round game R of the 11th round ends.

Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the 12th to 15th rounds is repeated with the inter-round second interval time Int2 interposed between each round game R, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

By discharging the ball during the inter-round second interval time Int2, it is possible to form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R after the 11th round. Therefore, from the 11th round onwards, a state may occur in which the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round has passed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

In addition, the number of prize balls paid out in each round game is also reduced by the tenth round. Therefore, the total number of payouts is reduced compared to the jackpot of the first operation pattern (1875 pieces = (10C x 10R + 5C x 5R) x 15 pieces), and the degree of payout (number, speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is reduced. , can be changed (depending on the timing) depending on what round the round game is being played.

In the third operation pattern, the number of payouts is large at the beginning of the round, and the number of payouts decreases toward the end of the round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of payouts may be small at the beginning, but the number of payouts may increase toward the end, or the number of payouts may peak in the middle round.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening/closing plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. Then, the jackpot game ends with the elapse of the time.

According to this operation pattern, by changing the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game depending on how many rounds the round game R is performed, the jackpot game is given speed and speed, and the player's interest is improved. can be made

In addition, when a jackpot game is played in the third operation pattern, there is no change from the first operation pattern until the 10th round round game R, so the player can expect a payout in the first operation pattern A big winning game can be played while having a feeling of anticipation of obtaining the number.

Further, the inter-round second interval time Int2, which is set to 1 second in the present embodiment, can be set to any numerical value corresponding to each round for each jackpot type. For example, in a certain jackpot type, the second interval time Int2 between rounds of the third operation pattern is set to 1.5 seconds. Settings such as setting the interval time Int2 to 0.5 seconds for odd-numbered rounds and to 1.0 seconds for even-numbered rounds can be made in advance.

That is, by further subdividing the types of jackpots, it is possible to form various jackpot games with different second interval times Int2 between rounds. Therefore, from the 11th round onwards, it is possible to make it impossible to predict the number of balls to be finally paid out until the end of the big win game, so that attention to the big win game can be improved.

Also, the change in the degree of payout may be associated with the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, when a jackpot game is played in the third operating pattern, the liquid crystal screen displays a running character, and during the beginning (early rounds) when the stamina of the character remains, the The character to be run runs well, and many prize balls are paid out in conjunction with it. On the other hand, when the character's stamina runs out (in the final rounds), the displayed character will find it difficult to run and will start walking, which in turn reduces the payout of prize balls.

In this way, by matching the degree of payout of prize balls with the performance displayed on the liquid crystal screen, the player can easily empathize with the liquid crystal performance, and the player's interest in the jackpot game can be improved. be able to.

Further, by performing the jackpot game in the above-described second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, each round can be progressed based on the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so that the jackpot game can be performed at a predetermined time. You can progress over a period of time longer than the production time. In other words, for example, the winning of the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a is performed at an unexpectedly high speed, so that the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is displayed during the jackpot game. To prevent a situation in which a jackpot game ends in the middle of the first reproduction of a moving image loop-reproduced over a predetermined performance time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the end of the big win game before the performance during the big win is completely viewed.

In addition, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen is not limited. For example, in a mode in which a cheering message from a character (“Do your best next time,” etc.) is displayed, the longer the jackpot game time is, the more likely it is to display a cheering message from a character with a lower appearance rate. As a result, the player can proceed with the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern without giving stress to the player (rather happily).

On the other hand, it may be displayed in a manner that gives more stress to the player. For example, a case in which a running character is displayed during a jackpot game and that character is resting in a rest area during an interval between rounds will be described. In the first operation pattern, the interval between rounds is set every time a predetermined number of balls are won, so the character can complete the race without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the 11th round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the predetermined number of winnings are not achieved, and the interval between rounds does not occur unless the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 is reached. Therefore, it is possible to perform the effect in which fatigue accumulates without deviation from the game mode (in the effect mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode). It is possible to perform a production that there is no time to rest. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the exhausted character and to give stress to the player, so that the player's ambition to make up for the next big win can be heightened.

Also, when a similar display is performed, the character may replenish water at the timing of the prize winning. In this case, in the first operation pattern, while sufficient water can be supplied, the number of times of replenishing water (the number of wins) is the first after the 11th round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern. Compared to the operating pattern, it is less and the period during which the character runs (the period of the jackpot game) becomes longer, so the amount of water that can be replenished becomes insufficient compared to the amount of sweat that the character exudes, and the character becomes more and more tired. It is possible to perform the effect without causing any deviation from the game mode (in the effect mode whose time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode). As a result, it is possible to match the appearance of the character with the profit that the player can obtain (discharged balls including time efficiency), and it is possible to determine the extent of the jackpot obtained by the player (whether it is a middle hit or not). , a jackpot or a super jackpot) can be easily grasped by the player through the performance of the entire jackpot game.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30. FIG. In the first embodiment, the number of balls that can be stored inside the first variable winning device 1000 is fixed. is configured to be changeable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. FIG. In FIG. 24, the arrangement of the balls stored in part of the storage channel 1231 and the second storage channel 2251 when the ball enters from the second specific winning hole 2255a is illustrated by hidden lines.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable prize winning device 2000 includes an opening/closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400 and a driving device 1500 similar to those of the first embodiment, and a body member slightly different from that of the first embodiment. 2100, a covering front plate 2200, a regulating member 2600 and a rear cover (not shown), and a second variable winning device 2800 newly introduced in the second embodiment. In addition, the second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable winning device 2800 is provided with a second specific winning opening 2255a through which a ball serving as a reference for payout passes during a jackpot game.

The second specific winning opening 2255a is a winning opening having the same function as the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, when the jackpot of the special pattern occurs, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning port 1000a or the second specific winning port 2255a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). (or until 10 balls are won) is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). Although the details will be described later, the opening operation is enabled by a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern, fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large number of balls enter the first specific prize winning port 1000a and the second specific prize winning port 2255a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out.

The main body member 2100 has the configuration of the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (the thin plate member 1110, the housing portion 1120, the holding hole 1130, the projecting portion 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support portion 1160, and the support claw portion 1170). , a slide guide hole 2181 which is a through hole drilled in the thin plate member 1110, and a holding hole 2182 which is a through hole similarly drilled in the thin plate member 1110 and configured so that the second detection sensor 2255 can be inserted thereinto. a drive guide rib 2183 having a pair of wall portions parallel to each other along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and extending linearly in the left-right direction; It mainly includes transmission guide ribs 2184 in which wall portions are arranged in parallel and extend linearly in the vertical direction, and a shaft portion 2185 that pivotally supports a transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800 .

The slide guide hole 2181 is an elongated hole that guides the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800 . The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 arranged on the covering front plate 2200 is inserted.

Each of the ribs 2183 and 2184 is a rib that guides the sliding motion of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that interlock when the second variable winning device 2800 is driven.

The covering front plate 2200 is connected to the upper right direction of the accommodating portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the accommodating portion 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) of the covering front plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A second housing portion 2250 is provided.

The second accommodation part 2250 has a functional part on the back side of the thin plate formed at the plane position with the thin plate member 1210 , has an upward opening, and has an end connected to the middle of the storage channel 1231 . A storage channel 2251 and a second detector disposed in the second storage channel 2251 with an opening in the vicinity of the upper end of the second storage channel 2251 along the extension direction of the second storage channel 2251 The sensor 2255 closes the space between the front plate of the second housing portion 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the left side portion of the opening of the second storage channel 2251 in front view, and the upper surface slopes down toward the left. and an inclined surface 2257 that

In the second storage channel 2251, when the balls pass through the second detection sensor 2255 and are stored inside the second storage portion 2250, the discharge port 1150 is closed and the balls are stored. It is configured to have 14 at maximum.

The second detection sensor 2255 is a detection device that has a second specific prize winning opening 2255 a and produces the same action as the detection sensor 1240 . That is, when the ball enters the housing portion 1230 by switching the opening/closing plate 1300, the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and by switching the second variable winning device 2800, the ball passes through the second housing portion 2250 and enters the housing portion. When the ball enters at 1230, the second detection sensor 2255 detects the ball.

The inclined surface 2257 causes the ball to flow down to the side where the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged. Therefore, all the balls blocked by the slide plate 2840 and not entering the second storage channel 2251 flow down along the inclined surface 2257 and head toward the channel forming portion on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300. be. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the player can open any of the specific winning ports 1000a and 2255a regardless of whether the first specific winning port 1000a is open or the second specific winning port 2255a is open. In the state, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out by playing a right-handed game. Therefore, even an inexperienced player can easily play the game.

In addition, the second detection sensor 2255 is arranged inside the second storage channel 2251 with a margin for arranging one ball on the upstream side. Therefore, at the timing when the slide plate 2840 is about to close (the timing when the remaining one ball passes through the second detection sensor 2255 and becomes the specified number), a plurality of balls continuously flow into the second storage channel 2251. , a structure that allows more than a specified number of balls to enter.

In addition to the structure (shaft portion 1610, extension portion 1620, and ball receiving portion 1630) of the regulation member 1600 of the first embodiment, the regulation member 2600 further extends the shaft portion 1610 to the left and extends the extension portion 1620. A second extension portion 2640 is formed in a symmetrical relationship with the extension portion 1620 when viewed in the plane direction.

The second extension part 2640 is a part that receives a load when the second variable winning device 2800 operates, as will be described later. Due to the formation of the second extension part 2640, the regulating member 2600 can be adjusted to the second variable winning device 2800 or the opening/closing plate 1300 regardless of whether the second variable winning device 2800 performs the switching operation or the opening/closing plate 1300 performs the switching operation. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation of .

The second variable prize winning device 2800 includes a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 that slides in the horizontal direction by driving the solenoid 2810, and one end supported by the tip member 2820. a transmission member 2830 rotatably supported by a shaft portion 2185, a slide plate 2840 connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830 and projecting from the slide guide hole 2181 toward the front side of the body member 2100, A rod-shaped intervening rod portion 2850 whose one end is fixed to the member 2820 and is slidably disposed inside the drive guide rib 2183, and a transmission guide rib whose one end is disposed at a position capable of coming into contact with the intervening rod portion 2850. 2184 , and the other end is mainly provided with a transmission rod portion 2860 arranged at a position capable of coming into contact with the second extension portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 .

The intervening rod portion 2850 is guided in the left-right direction by the drive guide ribs 2183, but its movement in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction is restricted. In this embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured in such a manner that the longer the separation distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 is, the closer the drive guide ribs 2183 are to each other (the distance between them is narrowed). Movement in the front-rear direction is restricted.

The transmission rod portion 2860 is guided vertically by the transmission guide ribs 2184 and restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured in such a manner that the longer the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110, the closer the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are to each other (the closer the distance between them is). Movement in the front-rear direction is restricted.

The surfaces of the end portions of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that contact with each other are inclined so as to face the mating member. Thereby, force can be smoothly transmitted from the intervening rod portion 2850 to the transmission rod portion 2860 .

26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 along line XXVI-XXVI of FIG. 25. FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extended portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 has an arcuate cross-sectional facing surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod portion 2860. The biasing force of a biasing torsion spring (not shown) is transmitted to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the opposing surface 2641 . As a result, the transmission rod portion 2860 is maintained at the standby position in the state shown in FIGS.

In the states shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the ball cannot enter both the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255 . The opening operation of the second variable winning device 2800 for enabling the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255 will be described below.

27(a) to 27(c) show the operations of the regulating member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 in chronological order. 27(a) to 27(c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 2000. FIG. In FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c), for ease of understanding, illustrations of configurations unnecessary for explanation are omitted, and the slide plate 2840 changes state from the closed state to the open state. The process is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 27(a), the state in which the solenoid 2810 is de-energized and the tip member 2820 is located at the farthest position from the solenoid 2810 is shown in FIG. 27(b) immediately after the solenoid 2810 is energized. The state where the tip member 2820 is arranged at the intermediate position of the movement range is arranged in the state where the tip member 2820 is most attracted to the solenoid 2810 (the final position when the solenoid 2810 is energized) in FIG. 27(c). Each state is illustrated. In the state shown in FIG. 27(a), the slide plate 2840 constitutes a closed state preventing the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255, and in the state shown in FIG. 27(c), the slide plate 2840 , constitute an open state that allows the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255 .

As shown in FIG. 27(a), when the slide plate 2840 is closed, the regulating member 2600 is ejected. Therefore, when the solenoid 2810 is in a non-excited state, the action of the second variable winning device 2800 can prevent the regulating member 2600 from entering a storage state. That is, even if the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in the present embodiment, the control mode (for example, the control mode of the first embodiment) that does not cause the operation of the solenoid 2810 (maintains in non-excitation). Therefore, it is possible to configure a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment.

Also, when the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 or the second storage channel 2251, the ball can be discharged from the first variable winning device 2000 by switching to the state of FIG. 27(a).

As shown in FIG. 27(b), when the solenoid 2810 is energized, displacement of the tip member 2820 causes the slide plate 2840 via the transmission member 2830 and the transmission rod portion 2860 via the intervening rod portion 2850 to start displacing. do. Here, in the present embodiment, since the portion where the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 abut against each other in the state of FIG. At approximately the same time, the movement of bar 2860 is initiated.

When the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed downward by the end portion of the intervening rod portion 2850 , the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 applies a downward load to the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 . As a result, the regulating member 2600 is slightly pushed down to be in the middle of the discharge state and the storage state.

As shown in FIG. 27(c), when the tip member 2830 is completely moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down by the intervening rod portion 2850 to the terminal position, and the regulating member 2600 is maintained in the storage state. As shown in FIG. 27( c ), the intervening rod portion 2850 faces the transmission rod portion 2860 side and slides to such an extent that the inclined surface passes through the transmission rod portion 2860 . A load applied toward 2850 can flow in a direction perpendicular to the direction of movement of intervening rod portion 2850 .

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the intervening rod portion 2850 from fluctuating along the moving direction of the intervening rod portion 2850 due to the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the restricting member 2600 fluctuating. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the tip member 2820 via the regulating member 2600 from fluctuating. It is possible to prevent the driving force from fluctuating. Accordingly, the driving force required for solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

Further, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the slide direction caused by the solenoid 2810 is used as it is as the displacement of the transmission rod portion 2860 to change the state of the regulating member 2600 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness of the operation of the regulation member 2600 with respect to switching of the excitation mode of the solenoid 2810 . As a result, it is possible to finely adjust the state change timing of the regulating member 2600, so that it is possible to suppress the deviation between the control value of the number of ejections specified for each interval time between rounds in the jackpot game and the actual number of ejections, It is possible to stabilize the number of pieces to be discharged.

FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 along line XXVIII-XXVIII of FIG. 27(c). As shown in FIG. 28, the tangential line of the contact portion between the lower end of the transmission rod portion 2860 and the facing surface 2641 of the regulating member 2600 forms an angle with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod portion 2860. Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring (not shown) that biases the restricting member 2600 toward the disposition in the ejected state effectively acts on the transmission rod portion 2860 .

Therefore, when the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27(c)) to the closed state (see FIG. 27(a)) and the regulation by the intervening rod portion 2850 is released, the biasing force of the torsion spring , the transmission rod portion 2860 can be raised, and the transmission rod portion 2860 can be maintained at the standby position (see FIG. 27(a)).

FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first winning type counter C2 and the big winning type in the special symbol in the present embodiment.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in the present embodiment is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored. It is defined in association with the type and the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

In addition, the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case of a jackpot in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64) is Since it is the same as that explained in the first embodiment, the explanation is omitted, and below, in the case where the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) in the present embodiment becomes a big hit. explain.

Specifically, when the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640) results in a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". is defined in association with the jackpot d (see 202b21 in FIG. 29).

When the jackpot d is won, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the fourth operation pattern (details of which will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000 . In this case, the player may receive a payout of approximately 2250 prize balls plus a limited increment.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "30 to 99" in association with the jackpot e (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

In the case of a jackpot e, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the fifth operation pattern (details of which will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000 . In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is 2250 prize balls plus a limited increment, but the degree of difficulty of increasing the number of payouts is lower than that of the fourth operation pattern. , and depending on the timing of increasing the number of payouts, the time required for the big win game is much longer than the case of the big win d.

As described above, when the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) results in a big win, the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes according to the type of the big win. Due to this difference in operation pattern, it is possible to change the time required for the big win game while keeping the number of big win rounds unchanged while providing a difference in the number of payouts.

In this embodiment, in the case of the jackpot e, in a predetermined round game R (round game R of the 1st to 7th rounds). When the first variable prize winning device 2000 is hit with more than a specified number of balls, the extra payout is deducted in the subsequent specific round game R (8th round round game R), and the progress of the 8th round is made. configured to maximize the time required. On the other hand, in the round games R after the specific round game R, the player can obtain the increased amount of balls paid out by making the first variable prize winning device 2000 enter more than the specified number of balls, without being deducted. configured as

In this case, in the case of a jackpot e, the game method that allows the player to obtain the highest profit, including time efficiency, is to win a specified number of prizes up to the 8th round, and to play the round game R from the 9th round onwards. In order to increase the number of payouts, the number of prizes to be paid out is increased. Therefore, depending on what round the round game R is, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to put balls in the first variable prize winning device 2000 in a predetermined number or more, and the player's attention to the jackpot game can be switched. can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 30(a) is a diagram showing changes over time of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the second specific winning hole 2255a in the fourth operating pattern, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the time-measurement change of 1 specific prize-winning mouth 1000a and the 2nd specific prize-winning mouth 2255a.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure winning determination, after the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, it starts controlling the determined kind of big winning game. Operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be described below.

<When operating with the fourth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot d, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

The MPU 201 holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the timer means (not shown) passes a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) when the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends. Solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has passed, the round game R of the first round is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the second specific winning port 2255a by starting to measure the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displacing the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state. to cause the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the win) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is driven and controlled to close the second specific winning port 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means operates the solenoids 1510, 2810 to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 closed until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. is driven and controlled, and the round game R of the second round is started after the first interval time Int1 between rounds has elapsed.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specific operation. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the second round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round ends.

The inter-round first interval time Int1 is set as the time for discharging ten balls from the discharge port 1150, as described in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, depending on the timing of passage through the second specific winning opening 2255a, more than 10 (for example, 11 or 12) balls can be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the inter-round first interval time Int1 is 10, more than 10 balls entered the second specific winning port 2255a in each round game R. At the start of the round game R immediately after, the excess number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231 .

In this embodiment, the maximum number of stored balls is 14 when the ball is entered from the second storage channel 2251 side. It is limited to four pieces throughout the jackpot game. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts (the number of payouts due to over winning) that can be obtained by a player playing the jackpot d can be limited to 60 (=15×4C). As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of payouts from greatly changing due to differences in game modes (timing of launching, intervals between launching, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to construct a gaming machine in which a player can enjoy a fair profit regardless of the experience value of the player.

Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated with the inter-round first interval time Int1 interposed between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is closed and opened. , and the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

When the final round game R ends, the solenoid 2810 drives and controls the timer means to keep the slide plate 2840 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the elapse of the time.

<When operating with the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot e, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. The MPU 201 holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the timer means (not shown) passes a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) when the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends. Solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has passed, the round game R of the first round is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the second specific winning port 2255a by starting to measure the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displacing the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state. to cause the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the win) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is driven and controlled to close the second specific winning port 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 so as to keep the slide plate 2840 closed until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round of the round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specific operation. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the second round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round ends.

The inter-round first interval time Int1 is set as the time for discharging ten balls from the discharge port 1150, as described in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, depending on the timing of passage through the second specific winning opening 2255a, more than 10 (for example, 11 or 12) balls can be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the inter-round first interval time Int1 is 10, more than 10 balls entered the second specific winning port 2255a in each round game R. At the start of the round game R immediately after, the excess number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231 .

After that, similarly, the round game R of the 3rd round to the 7th round is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

When the seventh round round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 so as to keep the slide plate 2840 closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 elapses, and the first inter-round interval time Int1 is reached. After the elapse of, the round game R of the 8th round is started.

In the eighth round, the solenoid 1510 starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the eighth round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the 8th round round game R ends.

Here, in the round game R before the 7th round, if the number of balls exceeding the specified number has passed through the second specific winning opening 2255a, at the start of the round game R of the 8th round, the number exceeding the specified number Since the balls remain in the storage channel 1231, in the round game R of the 8th round, only the number of prizes obtained by subtracting the number of remaining balls from the specified number (the number exceeding the specified number by the 7th round) is won. is not possible, the payout of prize balls including the 8th round is uniformed to the payout of the prescribed number of prize balls up to the 8th round. In addition, in the eighth round of the round game R, it is not possible to win the specified number of pachinko balls, so after waiting for the lapse of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, the next round is performed. I will move on to gaming.

As a result, the player suffers a loss in terms of feeling that the extra prize balls paid out until the 7th round are lost, and a loss in time that the round game R in the 8th round is prolonged more than necessary. will receive As a result, it is possible to encourage the player to carefully play the game so as not to win more than the specified number of balls by the seventh round. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the winning of balls exceeding the specified number, thereby enhancing the fairness of the game.

In addition, if there are no winnings exceeding the specified number up to the seventh round, the specified number of balls can be passed through one specific prize winning opening 1000a in the eighth round round game R, and the specified number of balls are paid out. In addition, the eighth round of the round game R can be finished without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1 of each round. Therefore, the specified number of prize balls can be paid out while the round game R is progressing rapidly.

Therefore, in the jackpot game of jackpot e, intentionally suppressing winnings in excess of the prescribed number until the seventh round leads to the player's profit. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player's attentiveness high in the game up to the seventh round.

When the eighth round jackpot game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open/close plate 1300 closed until the inter-round first interval time Int1 elapses. After the elapse of time Int1, the ninth round round game R is started. In addition, at the start of the round game R of the ninth round, it is possible to make a state in which no ball remains in the storage channel 1231 .

In the ninth round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the solenoid 2810 displaces the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. is driven and controlled to cause the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the ninth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the ninth round ends.

Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the 10th to 15th rounds is repeated with the inter-round first interval time Int1 interposed between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening/closing plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. Then, the jackpot game ends with the elapse of the time.

In the round game R after the 9th round, the opening/closing plate 1300 does not open and close, so the prize balls paid out by the balls that enter the second specific winning hole 2255a in excess of the specified number after the 9th round are , can be received by the player without being deducted.

Therefore, when the jackpot game e is performed, until the 7th round, the jackpot game R is suppressed so that the winning to the second specific prize-winning port 2255a exceeding the specified number does not occur, and the jackpot game R after the 9th round is specified. Aiming to win more than the number of second specific winning holes 2255a is a gaming method with which the player can obtain the greatest profit when considering profits including time efficiency.

That is, in the round game R of each round, by inserting more than the specified number of balls into the second specific winning hole 2255a, the player can obtain a profit or suffer a loss. As a result, it is possible to provide different game characteristics for each round of the jackpot game, and to improve the attentiveness of the player who plays the jackpot game (prevents the player from playing the jackpot game carelessly). .

In addition, according to this operation pattern, the rounds in which the player can receive additional prize balls by winning the second specific prize winning port 2255a with balls exceeding the specified number are substantially changed from the 9th round onwards. can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to narrow the timing at which the number of payouts changes due to differences in game modes (timing of launching, interval between launching, etc.), and prevent large changes in the number of delivered balls. Therefore, it is possible to construct a gaming machine in which a player can enjoy a fair profit regardless of the experience value of the player.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. FIG. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball that reaches the flow path forming portion when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and flows down to the downstream of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state falls as it is in the third embodiment. The first variable prize winning device 3000 is configured to delay the falling of the balls when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state so that some of the balls can win the first specific prize winning port 1000a. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

31 is a front view of the first variable winning device 3000 in the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. 31, and FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of the installation front plate 3200. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable prize winning device 3000 includes an opening/closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a drive device 1500, a regulation member 1600 and a rear cover 1700 similar to those of the first embodiment. It includes a body member 3100 and a covering front plate 3200 that differ slightly from one embodiment. Note that FIG. 32 illustrates the closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300 .

The main body member 3100 has the configuration of the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (a thin plate member 1110, a housing portion 1120, a holding hole 1130, a projecting portion 1140, a discharge port 1150, a rotation support portion 1160, and a support claw portion 1170). , an additional prize winning port 3181 arranged in a manner connected to the left side wall of the covering front plate 3200 in the front view on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and the additional prize winning port 3181 directed upward from the left side wall portion in the front view. and a curved extension plate 3182 that is curved and extended.

The additional winning opening 3181 is a ball entrance that discharges the ball flowing down the game area from the upstream side to the back side of the game board 13. When the ball enters the additional winning opening 3181, the upper limit is 15. The number of prize balls is paid out. In this embodiment, 11 balls are set to be paid out.

The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate that regulates the passage of the ball flowing down the game area by making the gap in the vertical direction view in the game area equal to or less than the diameter of the ball. . In addition, the curved extension plate 3182 is formed in a shape that slopes down from the midsection toward the left in front view and slopes down from the midsection toward the right in front view.

The covering front plate 3200 has the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the housing portion 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) of the front covering plate 1200 of the first embodiment, and also has a structure between the side wall portion 1220 and the housing portion 1230. A fall retardation plate 3250 extending from the rear surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the rear surface side is provided in the region of .

The drop retardation plate 3250 is arranged on the front side of the movement locus of the opening/closing plate 1300 so as to avoid interference with the opening/closing plate 1300, is arranged below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and is a linear plate parallel to the axial direction. An extended plate portion 3251 which is a shaped portion and extends vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, connects the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210, and has a curved shape with a concave upper surface. and a rolling arc portion 3252 formed.

The drop retardation plate 3250 has a shape that is elongated to the left and right, and decelerates so that it takes about 2 seconds or more for the ball to flow down half the length of the plate (including bouncing and rolling down). It is formed from a shape that In addition, the opening/closing plate 1300 is formed in such a manner that when the ball flows down half the length of the plate in the left-right direction, it falls in one second or less.

As shown in FIG. 32 , the extended plate portion 3251 is formed on the side facing the main body member 3100 , and is inclined so that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases as it approaches the detection sensor 1240 . It has a facing surface 3251a and a terminal surface 3251b which is a surface facing the side wall portion 1220 of the accommodating portion 1230 and which is formed with a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere between the accommodating portion 1230 and the accommodating portion 1230 .

The distance between the facing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is the radius of the sphere in the portion arranged vertically below the center of the sphere when the sphere is arranged on the most upstream side (left side in FIG. 32). In the part placed vertically below the center of the sphere in the state where it is switched to the radius of the sphere or more at the intermediate position (halfway position in the left and right direction in FIG. 32) and arranged on the most downstream side (right side in FIG. 32) greater than or equal to the radius of the sphere and less than the diameter of the sphere.

The rolling arc portion 3252 has a shape in which a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end portion of the opposing surface 3251a extends in the front-rear direction, and smoothly intersects the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 3200. It is composed of a shape (a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction is along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 when viewed in the axial direction is set larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, the resistance when the ball rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball that has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the covering front plate 3200 rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At that time, as shown in FIG. 32, the path from the most upstream upstream position Pf1 to the falling position Pf3, which is separated from the rolling arc portion 3252 to the right and is the position immediately before the ball falls, is defined as the downstream position Pf2. flow down through the

In this embodiment, since the distance between the facing surface 3251a of the extension plate portion 3251 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is less than the diameter of the sphere, the ball reaches the falling position Pf3. , the ball is prevented from passing through the rolling arc portion 3252 and falling. Therefore, the ball falls from the rolling arc portion 3252 only after the ball reaches the drop position Pf3. The manner in which the balls flow down on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described below.

34(a) to 34(c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 3000 along line XXXIVa-XXXIVa of FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 34(b) shows the ball arranged at the upstream position Pf1, and FIG. 34(c) shows the ball arranged at the downstream position Pf2. It should be noted that illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 34(b) and 34(c), the ball rolling on the upper surface of the drop retardation plate 3250 rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction and is in contact with the plate portion 1310. As the sphere flows down, the radial length up to the contact portion of the sphere with the fall retardation plate 3250 (the length between the contact portion and the center of the sphere as viewed in the axial direction) is shortened as it flows down.

That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34(b), the radius r1 up to the point where the sphere abuts on the drop retardation plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the sphere. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34(c), the radius r2 of the sphere up to the portion where the sphere contacts the drop delay plate 3250 is shorter than the radius of the sphere.

These radial lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radii of rotation of the sphere when the sphere rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. In other words, if the rotational speed of the ball is the same, the rolling speed of the ball decreases (the ball is retarded) as the radial lengths r1 and r2 become shorter. According to the present embodiment, the facing surface 3251a is formed to be inclined such that the separation distance from the main body member 3100 increases toward the downstream side. Therefore, the radius of gyration of the sphere is gradually shortened as the sphere flows down the retardation plate 3250 downstream (to the right in FIG. 31). Therefore, as the ball flows down the drop delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

Further, since the extension plate portion 3251 extends along the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate 1300, in FIG. 34 showing the axial view, the state shown in FIG. ), the ball is displaced downwards. That is, the more the ball flows downstream on the drop delay plate 3250, the more the ball can be separated from the first specific prize winning port 1000a, so the ball flowing down the fall delay plate 3250 can be diverted from the first specific prize winning port 1000a. can.

As a result, even if the ball entry prevention portion 1331 is not formed in the opening/closing plate 1300, the ball flows down the drop delay plate 3250 to the downstream end and continues toward the first specific winning port 1000a with its momentum. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a player wins a prize by flying.

Next, the case where the opening/closing plate 1300 moves up to the open state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the fall delay plate 3250 will be described with reference to FIG. 35(a) and 35(b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 3000, and FIG. 35(c) is the first variable winning device 3000 along line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b). is a partial cross-sectional view of the. 35(a) shows the closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300, and FIGS. 35(b) and 35(c) show the opening state of the opening/closing plate 1300. In FIG. 35(c), the opening/closing plate 1300 The outlines of the plate portion 1310 and the ball in the closed state are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted. In addition, FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b) show an example of a ball entering the flow path forming portion of the first variable prize winning device 3000. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball that has landed on the upper surface of the fall retardation plate 3250 moves rightward in front view along the extending direction of the extension plate portion 3251. If the opening/closing plate 1300 maintains the closed state, it will drop after reaching the drop position Pf3. At this time, the rolling speed of the ball can be gradually reduced by the action of the extension plate portion 3251 described above, so that the rolling time of the ball can be maintained long and the attention to the ball can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 35(b), when the opening/closing plate 1300 moves upward (rotates) toward the open state while the ball rolls, the ball pressed against the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 rolls. It smoothly moves upward along the arc shape of the dynamic arc portion 3252 . As described above, the tangential line of the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 at the portion where the ball abuts when the ball starts to move is oriented in the front-rear direction, so that the ball can move smoothly when the opening/closing plate 1300 starts to move. can.

The flow-down direction when the ball moves upward, rolls on the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311, and flows down is parallel to the flow-down direction shown in FIG. 35(a). Therefore, compared to the case where the flow direction of the ball changes to a completely different direction before and after the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300, it is possible to alleviate the sense of incongruity felt by the player who visually recognizes the motion of the ball before and after the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300. can.

In this way, the opening/closing plate 1300 moves upward from the state in which the ball is placed below the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 35(c)), thereby opening the ball. By being pushed back (flowing backward) above the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300, it is possible to win a prize to the first specific prize winning port 1000a. In other words, the ball, which is placed below the opening/closing plate 1300 and has been once in a state where it is impossible to enter the first specific prize winning port 1000a, is moved upward to make it possible to win a prize in the first specific prize winning port 1000a. Since it can be returned, the interest of the player can be improved.

In other words, both FIGS. 35( a ) and 35 ( b ) illustrate the state in which the sphere is positioned upstream of detection sensor 1240 since it is still possible for the sphere to pass detection sensor 1240 . It can be said that That is, due to the action of the drop delay plate 3250, the ball can be kept on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 even after the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed.

Also, even when the winning to the first specific winning opening 1000a becomes impossible, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 flows down in the direction approaching the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to make the player feel the expectation that he may win the first specific prize winning port 1000a, and to maintain the player's attention.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the balls that have reached the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 are delayed from falling, and when the opening/closing plate 1300 changes to the open state, the rolling surface 1311 By constructing it so that it can be revived, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball that reaches in front of the opening/closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds in the jackpot game will win the first specific prize winning port 1000a in the next round game. Therefore, the number of balls that pass through the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and enter the first out port 66 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the opening of the opening/closing plate 1300 from being hindered due to the arrangement of the balls on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 . That is, in a structure in which a ball can freely flow down the front side of an opening/closing plate like a conventional game machine, the ball is sandwiched between the opening/closing plate and the glass plate by the operation of the opening/closing plate, thereby opening and closing the ball. There is a problem that the opening of the board may be hindered and the player may suffer a loss.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the ball rolls on the top surface of the drop retardation plate 3250 in front of the opening/closing plate 1300, the separation distance between the rotating shaft of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the ball is kept substantially constant (restricted). can do. Therefore, compared to the case where the ball freely flows down the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the separation distance of the ball from the rotation axis changes freely, the ball is sandwiched between the opening/closing plate 1300 and the glass plate to open and close. The risk that the plate 1300 will be prevented from operating can be reduced. In addition, in this embodiment, the ball is placed slightly above the position of the ball, which may be sandwiched between the glass plate and the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 while the opening/closing plate 1300 is changing to the open state. A fall retardation plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the sphere is maintained at the position of .

FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b) are schematic diagrams showing how the balls that have reached the first variable winning device 3000 flow down. In FIG. 36(a), two balls that have reached the first variable prize winning device 3000 are shown in chronological order when the balls are left unattended. By performing a special hitting method (so-called "twist hitting") in which the ball is hit weakly and the second ball is hit hard (so-called "twisting hit"), the ball when two balls reach the first variable winning device 3000 in a row. is illustrated in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), when the first ball P1 and the second ball P2 reach the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 with a predetermined interval between the balls, the ball When the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state by P1 winning the first specific prize winning port 1000a, the ball P2 can still be placed upstream of the fall delay plate 3250.

Therefore, it is possible to ensure a long time until the ball P2 completely flows down the drop delay plate 3250, so that the ball can be easily maintained on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 until the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened next time. can be done.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when two balls reach the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 in a row, the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed when the ball P1 wins the first specific winning hole 1000a. When the state is switched, the ball P2 is placed in the vicinity of the position (falling position Pf3) immediately before the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, it is not possible to wait until the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened next time, and the ball P2 is delayed in falling. It falls off the plate 3250 .

In this way, in this embodiment, compared to the case where two balls flow down in a row by a special hitting method, the case where two balls flow down with a predetermined interval by keeping hitting (normal hitting method) is improved. This makes it easier to receive the action of the fall delay plate 3250 (change the ball that has reached the front of the opening/closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds so that it can enter the first specific winning hole 1000a). As a result, it is possible to suppress games with special hitting methods such as twisting.

FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable winning device 3000. FIG. FIG. 37 shows a state immediately after the opening/closing plate 1300 changes from the closed state to the open state, and shows a ball that bounces upward by colliding with the opening/closing plate 1300 .

In this embodiment, when the ball lands on the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state, the bounce as shown in FIG. only, the ball bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

The flow of the bounced ball after that is limited to returning to the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 or entering the additional prize opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. be done. Therefore, the player can receive the payout of prize balls by the bounced balls. Therefore, the ball that reaches the opening/closing plate 1300 at a special timing in the middle of switching to the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends up entering the first out port 66, which prevents the player from making a profit. can be prevented.

In addition, even if a ball wins the additional prize-winning hole 3181, the specified number of balls (10 balls in this embodiment) can win the first specific prize-winning hole 1000a. A payout due to winning a prize at the mouth 3181 is a prize ball (additional profit) paid out in excess of the specified number. That is, depending on whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 at a special timing when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the middle of switching to the open state, it is possible to make a difference in the profits that the player can obtain, so that the jackpot game can be played. It is possible to improve the attention to the ball flowing down in.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. FIG. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a variable probability state (high-probability state) of a special symbol is provided as an added value after the end of a big win regardless of the difference in the flow-down mode of the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 1000. However, the first variable winning device 4000 in the fourth embodiment includes a probability variation determination unit that determines the acquisition of the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol based on the difference in the ball flowing down state. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable winning device 4000 is shown enlarged. As shown in FIG. 39, in the present embodiment, a transmission window is formed in the game board 13 in the lower portion of the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 4000, and the probability fluctuation window is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. A determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable prize winning device 4000 has the same configuration as the first embodiment (body member 1100, covering front plate 1200, opening/closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, driving device 1500, regulating member 1600). and a rear cover 1700), and further includes a probability variation determination unit 4800, which is new in the fourth embodiment.

The probability variation determination unit 4800 includes a communication path 4810 extending vertically downward, which is a flow path through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 flows, and a bifurcated flow communicating with the lower end of the communication path 4810. A probability change determination channel 4820 that is a path, a specific region 4830 arranged in communication with the flow channel on the left side of the probability change determination channel 4820 in front view, and a specific region 4830 arranged in communication with the flow channel on the right side in front view. A non-specific area 4840, a distribution device 4850 arranged to be able to interfere with the game ball at the branch of the probability fluctuation determination flow path 4820, a specific area detection sensor 4860 that detects the passage of the game ball in the specific area 4830, and a non- It mainly includes a non-specific area detection sensor 4870 that detects passage of a game ball through the specific area 4540.

Communicating path 4810 is formed with a length such that approximately one second elapses before a ball entered from the discharge port reaches probability variation determination channel 4820 .

The sorting device 4850 is arranged to protrude inside the probability fluctuation determination channel 4820, and has an open position that causes the ball to flow down to the specific region 4830 (forms an open state) and a non-specific region 4840 (to form a closed state). and a solenoid 4852 for driving the diverting motion member 4851 operable between a closed position and a closed position.

It is only in the special round (in this embodiment, the 5th round) during the jackpot game that the probability variation determination unit 4800 determines the acquisition of the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In the special round, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the right for a period of time during which the game ball can pass. At this time, the specific area 4830 is in an open state, and the non-specific area 4840 is in a closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the big hit game, it shifts to the special symbol probability variable state (high probability state). In this embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special design, for example, it is determined that the special design is a jackpot with a probability of 1/99, and in the high probability state of the special design (variable state of the special design), for example, 40 It is determined to be a special symbol jackpot with a probability of 1/1.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, the variable state (high probability state) of the special pattern is imparted until the lottery of the special pattern is completed 50 times, and the lottery of the special pattern is performed 50 times. It is configured to be set to a normal state after the termination.

In this embodiment, five types of special symbol jackpot types are provided: "jackpot D", "jackpot E", "jackpot F", "jackpot G", and "jackpot f" (see FIG. 40). Although the details will be described later, depending on the type of jackpot, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently, the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 4000, It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot types in the special symbols. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table that stores determination values for determining the jackpot types. It is defined in association with the type of ball entrance that triggered the lottery of the pattern. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". is defined in association with the jackpot D (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

In the case of a jackpot D, 5 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 . In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly obtain the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "30 to 49" in association with the jackpot E (see 202b42 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot E is reached, a 5-round jackpot game is executed in the seventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 . In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can rarely obtain the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 79" in association with the jackpot F (see 202b43 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot F is achieved, 5 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 . In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly obtain the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is specified in the range of "80 to 99" in association with the jackpot G (see 202b44 in FIG. 40).

In the case of a jackpot G, 5 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 . In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 750 prize balls, and can rarely obtain the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

As described above, in the jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64), the right to shift to the special symbol probability state (high probability state) with a probability of 50% can be obtained with certainty. On the other hand, even with the remaining 50%, it is possible to rarely obtain the right to shift to the special symbol probability variation state (high probability state).

On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 94". A jackpot f is associated and defined (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

In the case of a jackpot f, as in the case of the jackpot D, 5 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable prize winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 . In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly obtain the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "95 to 99" in association with the jackpot g (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot g is achieved, a five-round jackpot game is executed in the tenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 . In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 600 prize balls, and can rarely obtain the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

As described above, when the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) results in a big hit, the first variable prize winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 are the sixth with a probability of 95%. Operates in an actuation pattern. At this time, since it is possible to acquire the right to shift to the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol almost certainly, the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64) This is advantageous for the player compared to the case of winning the jackpot. Therefore, in order to win a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640), in the special symbol probability variable state (high probability state), the player plays right-handed games. conduct.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is lengthened when the normal symbol is hit (1 seconds x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 becomes easier. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol, it is easy to become a big hit of the special symbol, and when it becomes a big hit, the big hit f (almost certainly the transition to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol) Since the definite variable state of the special symbol that is likely to become a jackpot that can acquire the right is likely to be repeated, the player can easily win a large amount of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while strongly anticipating that the special symbols will shift to the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 41(a) is a diagram showing the timing change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operating pattern, and FIG. 41(b) shows the first specific winning in the seventh operating pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time of a mouth 1000a and a specific region 4830;

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure winning determination, after the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, it starts controlling the determined kind of big winning game. Operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be described below.

<When operating with the sixth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the sixth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) passes a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled to hold, and the first round round game R is started after the opening time OP has passed.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the win) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning port 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

When the first round of the round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open/close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round of the round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the second round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the round game R of the second round ends.

When the second round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open/close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the third round of the round game R is started.

In the third round, similarly to the start of the second round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (up to 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the third round round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the round game R of the third round ends.

When the third round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open/close plate 1300 closed until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round of the round game R is started.

In the fourth round, unlike the start of other rounds, the timer means starts measuring the second operating time T2 (up to 3 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is controlled to open the port 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) performs measurement until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 second in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the solenoid is operated to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again. 4852 is driven and controlled to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short period of time. This predetermined time is set as a time during which the sphere is not allowed to pass through the specific region 4830 .

Then, in the fourth round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

Here, the second operating time T2 is set as a time during which a specified number of balls cannot be entered into the first specific prize winning opening 1000a. That is, in this embodiment, balls can be shot one by one at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the fastest, but it takes 6 seconds to shoot the prescribed number of balls. That is, normally estimated, it is only possible to enter about five balls into the first specific winning hole 1000a in three seconds. Therefore, the fourth round of the round game R ends exclusively in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, since the storage channel 1231 is filled with approximately five prizes that can be won in three seconds, the discomfort given to the player due to the shorter time of the fourth round game R than the other rounds is suppressed. can do.

When the fourth round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the solenoid 1510 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 has passed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has passed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the fifth round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round ends.

In the second opening time OP2, when the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is less than 7 (when the number of balls stored is up to 6), all the balls discharged are On the other hand, when the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 7 or more (when the number of balls stored is 7 or more), at least one of the discharged balls It is set as a time shorter than the time required for the sphere to completely pass through the probability variation determination channel 4820 .

In this embodiment, since the fourth round round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, even if the fourth round round game ends at the second operating time T2, Seven or more balls can be easily stored in the storage channel 1231 . Therefore, since the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened while the ball remains in the probability variation determination channel 4820 , the remaining ball can flow down to the specific region 4830 . Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means keeps the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the lapse of the time.

Here, unlike the prior art, in this operation pattern, it is not necessary to close the opening/closing plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation in the round game R of the fifth round. , the opening/closing plate 1300 can be operated without a sense of discomfort. This will be explained below.

In the prior art, when the specified number of balls wins in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the start of operation of the distribution operation member 4581 and the round game R ends, the distribution operation member 4851 becomes an open state. There is a risk that the player will not be able to win the ball into the first specific winning port 1000a even though it is there, and the player will not be able to acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In order to prevent this, it was necessary to close the opening/closing plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 was in the closed state before the operation (it was opened twice in one round).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game property is to switch whether or not the ball that has won the first specific winning hole 1000a in the round game R of the round immediately before the fifth round is allowed to enter the specific area 4830. , Even if the ball cannot enter the first specific prize winning opening 1000a while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. Since the ball heading for the specific area 4830 has already won the first variable prize winning device 4000, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special pattern probability variable state (high probability state) without any problem.

Therefore, in this operation pattern, even while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation in the round game R of the fifth round, the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be performed by opening the opening and closing plate 1300. While preventing the player from having a sense of incongruity, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to obtain the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols due to the winning mode. can do.

In addition, the ball that has won the first specific winning port 1000a in the round game R of the 5th round stays in the storage channel 1231 during the first operation time T1, so in the round game R of the 5th round It is possible to prevent the winning ball from entering the probability variation determination channel 4820 while the distribution operation member 4851 is open. As a result, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special pattern probability changing state (high probability state) by winning the first specific winning port 1000a in the round game R of the 5th round (special round). It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of changing whether or not it can be done.

<When operating with the seventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the seventh operation pattern. In addition, since it is the same as the case of the above-mentioned jackpot D until the end of the round game R of the 3rd round, description is abbreviate|omitted. Also, the driving mode of the sorting device 4850 is the same as that of the sixth operation pattern.

When the third round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round of the round game R is started.

In the fourth round, unlike the start of other rounds, the timer means starts measuring the second operating time T2 (up to 3 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is controlled to open the port 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) performs measurement until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 second in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the solenoid is operated to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again. 4852 is driven and controlled to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short period of time. Note that this short-time action is set as an action that does not allow the sphere to pass through the specific region 4830 .

Then, in the fourth round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

Here, the second operating time T2 is set as a time during which a specified number of balls cannot be entered into the first specific prize winning opening 1000a. That is, in this embodiment, balls can be shot one by one at intervals of 0.6 seconds at the fastest, but it takes 6 seconds to shoot the prescribed number of balls. That is, normally estimated, it is only possible to enter about five balls into the first specific winning hole 1000a in three seconds. Therefore, the fourth round of the round game R ends exclusively in 3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, ten balls (global balls) are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is not filled with approximately five winning balls possible in 3 seconds, and the open/close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state with the winning balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 in 3 seconds. .

When the fourth round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the solenoid 1510 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 has passed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has passed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the fifth round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round ends.

In this operation pattern, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the round game R of the 5th round is about 5. Therefore, due to some rare cause, 8 or more balls are the first specific winning ball in 3 seconds. Unless a prize is won in the mouth 1000a, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced after all the discharged balls have completely passed through the probability variation determination channel 4820. FIG.

Therefore, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the ball does not remain in the probability variation determination channel 4820, so the ball does not pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot obtain the right to shift to the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means keeps the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the lapse of the time.

In addition, in this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round round game R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern, so even in this operation pattern, the sixth operation pattern It is possible to achieve the same effect as the effect in .

Here, the difference between the 6th operation pattern and the 7th operation pattern is whether or not the ball can be stored until the storage channel 1231 is full during the round game R of the 4th round. That is, it is possible to predict whether or not the player will be able to acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols after that, depending on the difference in the state of accumulation of the balls. You can improve your attention to the ball. Thereby, attention to the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

In addition, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls enter in the round game R of the fourth round, it is possible to almost certainly obtain the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol. However, since the time of the round game R is short, the more experienced the player is in the game, the more likely he or she will fail to acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols even in the sixth operation pattern. A comfortable situation is created.

In other words, an inexperienced player is more likely to keep hitting the ball during the big winning game, whereas a more experienced player is more likely to avoid hitting and keeping the ball to avoid wasting balls between rounds during the big win, and to stop the game between rounds. is the difference arising from

To be more specific, in the case of a continuous game, a plurality of balls are always flowing down near the opening/closing plate 1300, and immediately after the start of the round game R of the fourth round, the winning of the ball to the first specific winning port 1000a Since it occurs, there is enough room for three or more balls to enter in three seconds. Therefore, an inexperienced player can acquire the right to shift to the special symbol probability variable state (high probability state) without any problem.

On the other hand, by starting the launch after the fourth round of the round game R has started, when stopping between rounds to avoid the ball from flowing down near the opening and closing plate 1300 during the interval period, the waste ball is certainly Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach the vicinity of the opening/closing plate 1300 until a while after the start of the round game R of the 4th round (for example, until 2 seconds have passed). Therefore, it becomes necessary to enter three or more balls in the remaining one second, and it becomes difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Therefore, even a player accustomed to the game can be encouraged to hit the ball continuously during the jackpot game.

As described above, the sixth operation pattern has an inherent risk that the more experienced the game player is, the less profit he or she can obtain due to the mode of launch. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is inexperienced or accustomed to it, it is possible to encourage the player to keep hitting during the big win, and to secure the fairness of the profit obtained from the game.

On the other hand, it is possible to provide a jackpot game requiring concentration that cannot be experienced with other pachinko machines 10 to the player who still stops between rounds after grasping the above-mentioned risks. . That is, immediately after the opening of the first specific prize winning port 1000a in the fourth round, the balls flow into the first specific prize winning port 1000a, and the ball is counted backward to start hitting, thereby reducing waste balls. While, it is also possible to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol probability state (high probability state). In this case, the stop between rounds is performed before the end of the round game R of the third round, and the launching is started before the end of the round game R of the third round. In other words, advanced calculation is required to start launching while anticipating the timing of entering the ball while considering the randomness of the falling ball during the round game R of the third round. Therefore, if the timing at which the ball that has started to be launched reaches the vicinity of the first specific winning hole 1000a is as calculated, the interest of the player can be enhanced.

FIG. 42(a) is a diagram showing changes in timing of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the eighth operating pattern, and FIG. 42(b) shows the first specific winning in the ninth operating pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time of a mouth 1000a and a specific region 4830;

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure winning determination, after the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, it starts controlling the determined kind of big winning game. Operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be described below.

<When operating with the eighth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot F, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the eighth operation pattern. In addition, since it is the same as the case of the above-mentioned jackpot D until the end of the round game R of the 3rd round, description is abbreviate|omitted.

When the third round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open/close plate 1300 closed until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round of the round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the solenoid 1510 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment). The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the fourth round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds, which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the round game R of the fourth round, the specified number of balls cannot be entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a. It ends after the passage of

When the fourth round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the solenoid 1510 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 has passed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has passed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved again. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long period of time. Note that this opening operation is performed simultaneously with the opening operation when the third opening time OP3 elapses.

Then, in the fifth round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round ends.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues for the maximum value of the first operating time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage is 7 or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time required for at least some of the discharged balls to completely pass through the probability variation determination channel 4820 .

In this operation pattern, the fourth round round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, so the fourth round round game R waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Therefore, if the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is seven or more, the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened with the balls remaining in the probability change determination channel 4820. can. Therefore, the remaining ball can be made to flow down to the specific area 4830, and the player can acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means keeps the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the lapse of the time.

In addition, in this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening and closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round round game R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern, so even in this operation pattern, the sixth operation pattern It is possible to achieve the same effect as the effect in .

<When operating with the ninth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot G, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the ninth operation pattern. In addition, since it is the same as the case of the above-mentioned jackpot D until the end of the round game R of the 3rd round, description is abbreviate|omitted. Also, the driving mode of the sorting device 4850 is the same as that of the eighth operation pattern.

When the third round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round of the round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the solenoid 1510 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment). The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the fourth round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the round game R of the fourth round ends.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the round game R of the fourth round, the specified number of balls cannot be entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a. It ends after the passage of

When the fourth round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the solenoid 1510 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. , and after the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment). is closed again, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a short period of time. Note that this short-time action is set as an action that does not allow the sphere to pass through the specific region 4830 .

Then, in the fifth round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round ends.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues for the maximum value of the first operating time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage is 7 or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time required for at least some of the discharged balls to completely pass through the probability variation determination channel 4820 .

In this operation pattern, since the round game R of the fourth round is started in a state in which no balls remain in the storage channel 1231, the specified number of balls wins the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fourth round. can be made Therefore, it is possible to end the fourth round of the round game R without waiting for the maximum value of the first operating time T1. However, as in the case where the round game R of the fourth round is ended by winning a specified number of prizes, if the round game R of the fourth round is ended without waiting for the maximum value of the first operating time T1, in many cases , and immediately after that, the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes through the probability variation determination channel 4820, and the displacement of the distribution operation member 4851 occurs.

On the other hand, when the distribution operation member 4851 waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1 and completes the fourth round round game R, if the number of balls discharged in the interval immediately after that is seven or more. A sphere can be made to flow down to a specific area 4830 . Therefore, the player does not rush to win the prescribed number of prizes, but by winning the prescribed number of balls in the first specific prize winning port 1000a just before the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the player can obtain the special symbols. You can acquire the right to transition to the definite variable state (high probability state).

As another method, by ending the round game R of the 5th round immediately after the 4th round at an appropriate timing, the ball discharged at the interval immediately after the round game R of the 5th round is moved to the specific area. The player can obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state) by letting it flow down.

Thus, according to this operation pattern, at the player's discretion (selection of the timing of the winning of the ball into the first specific winning port 1000a, etc.), the player can switch to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol. It is possible to differ whether or not the transfer right can be obtained.

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means keeps the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the lapse of the time.

Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the round game R of the fourth round is designated. When the operation time is designated (in the case of the eighth operation pattern), by continuing the entry of the ball into the first specific winning hole 1000a, the player can enter the special symbol no matter how the game is played. Since it is possible to acquire the right to shift to the probability variable state (high probability state), the game can be played with peace of mind.

On the other hand, when the operating time is not specified (in the case of the ninth operating pattern), the player himself/herself selects the operating time according to the game mode (when the specified number of balls are to be entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a). By selecting), it may be possible to acquire the right to transition to the special symbol probability state (high probability state). Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the round game R, improve the ability to pay attention to the ball flowing down the game area, and give the player an uplifting feeling of acquiring the variable probability state by himself/herself. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

As a feature of the sixth to ninth operation patterns, the interval immediately after the round game R of the third round is shorter than usual, and the round game of the fourth round is played with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231. When R is started, it is easy to acquire the right of transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. That is, when the number of prize balls obtained in the round game R of the fourth round is small, it is possible to realize a game property in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

On the other hand, if the interval immediately after the round game R of the third round is set to a length of about the extent that the ball in the storage channel 1231 is discharged globally, the right to shift to the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol Hard to get. In other words, when it is difficult to obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the variable probability state (high probability state), it is possible to realize the game property that the payout of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game increases. As a result, it is possible to prepare a large number of balls to be hit by the player in the normal state to be continued later, so that it is possible to easily suppress the player's cash investment.

These differences can be grasped by whether or not the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the 4th round, so at the start of the 4th round round game R, the player expects the state after the jackpot game ends. can do. And even in the case of an operation pattern that makes it difficult to acquire the right to shift to the definite variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the right to shift to the definite variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the state of the ball entering can be obtained.

Here, in the present embodiment, by forcing the player to make a selection, it is possible to maintain the concentration of the player during the jackpot game. That is, the game mode in which it becomes easy to acquire the right of the transition to the definite variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol is the exact opposite.

Specifically, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the fourth round round game R, before the second operation time T2 (up to 3 seconds) elapses, as many balls as possible are inserted into the first specific winning hole 1000a By winning a prize, the possibility of acquiring the right to transition to the variable state (high probability state) of the special pattern increases (there is profit in winning many balls from the start of the 4th round), while the second In the case of operation pattern 9, in the fourth round of the round game R, the period of the round game R is extended by waiting for the prescribed number of balls to win until just before the end of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. As a result, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol increases (there is an advantage in suppressing winning of the ball at the start of the 4th round).

In this way, depending on how the ball is won in the round game R (the game mode selected by the player), the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol changes. Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues for a plurality of times, the player can be prevented from getting bored and can maintain concentration on the game.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing changes in timing of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure winning determination, after the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, it starts controlling the determined kind of big winning game. Operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be described below.

<When operating with the tenth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the tenth operation pattern. It should be noted that the process until the end of the round game R of the fourth round is the same as in the case of the sixth operation pattern described above, so the description is omitted.

When the fourth round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open/close plate 1300 closed until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the fifth round (special round) of the round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the solenoid 1510 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. , and after the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment). is closed again, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a short period of time.

Then, in the fifth round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round ends.

In this operation pattern, the opening operation of the distribution operation member 4851 after the passage of the second opening time OP2 is a short-time operation, so basically the ball cannot flow down to the specific area 4830.

Also, since the distribution operation member 4851 is in an open state during the round game R of the 5th round, if the round game can be ended early, the ball that has won the first specific winning hole 1000a in the 5th round will flow down to the specific area 4830. However, in this operation pattern, the fifth round round game R starts with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be entered, and the round game of the fifth round cannot be terminated early. Therefore, the ball that has won the first specific winning hole 1000a in the round game R of the 5th round cannot be made to flow down to the specific area 4830.

When the fifth round of the round game R ends, the timer means keeps the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the lapse of the time.

In addition, in this operation pattern, since the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the fifth round round game R has the same part as the sixth operation pattern described above, this operation pattern also includes the The same effect as the effect in the operation pattern of No. 6 can be produced.

Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specific winning hole 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the round game R of the fourth round. Since the patterns of other parts are the same, it is difficult to grasp the difference, and the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the operation pattern of the first variable prize winning device 4000 can be improved.

The tenth operation pattern, in relation to the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern, makes the ball flow down to the specific area 4830 even if the storage channel 1231 can be filled in the round game R of the fourth round. It is different in that it cannot

That is, by mixing this operation pattern, the player is not relieved even if the ball is fully stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round, and the ejected ball is in the specific area. You can be prompted to see if you pass 4830. That is, in the jackpot game, the stage (first step) of whether or not the ball can be stored in the storage channel 1231, and before the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes, the distribution operation member 4851 operates. or not (second step), and attention can be paid to a different part for each step. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game aimlessly and improve the concentration of the player.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 50. FIG. In the first embodiment, a case was described in which a ball corresponding to the jackpot type can be acquired regardless of the progress of the game in the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment 5000 is provided with a ball output adjustment device 5900 that makes it easier for the player to obtain more balls as the number of fluctuations until a big win is obtained in the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol is smaller. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable prize winning device 5000 arranged near the lower right corner of the game board 13 includes a main body member 2100, a covering front plate 2200, In addition to having an opening/closing plate 1300, a drive device 1500, and a regulating member 2600, a power transmission member 5400 slightly different from the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 5800, and a new A ball output adjusting device 5900 that adjusts the output of a ball by causing the ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640 to enter the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 is mainly provided.

The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 extending downward along the shape of the rotating tip portion 1421 from the lower end portion of the rotating tip portion 1421 of the extension portion 1420 .

As shown in FIG. 45, the time difference forming portion 5423 has a lower tip extending to a position where it abuts against the engaging portion 1333 of the open/close plate 1300 in the closed state when the solenoid 1510 is not energized.

In addition to the configuration described above in the second embodiment, the second variable prize winning device 5800 can slide vertically on the left side of the intervening rod portion 5850 and the transmission rod portion 2860, which have a slightly added shape, when viewed from the rear. By being pushed down by the branched portion of the intervening rod portion 5850 (the L-shaped portion added to the configuration of the intervening rod portion 2850 in the second embodiment), the movable closing member 5931 of the ball output adjusting device 5900 can be contacted. and a pressing action portion 5870 provided.

The ball output adjustment device 5900 includes a downflow passage forming portion 5910 for allowing the ball that enters the second ball inlet 640 to flow down, and a thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 that is formed through the lower end portion of the downflow passage forming portion 5910 to be stored. Communicating hole 5920 arranged in a manner (opening diameter, arrangement) that allows balls to flow into channel 1231, and opening/closing member 5930 that opens and closes communicating hole 5920 in conjunction with driving of solenoids 1510 and 2810. Prepare for. It should be noted that the downflow passage forming portion 5910 is arranged in a manner to pass through the back side of the second variable prize winning device 5800 (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 45), and is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding. Also, illustration of the intermediate portion is omitted.

The downflow passage forming portion 5910 is a branched flow passage through which the ball that enters the second ball inlet 640 flows down. After the number of balls stored in the adjustment channel 5911 formed to be able to flow in and the number of balls stored in the adjustment channel 5911 exceeds a specified number (30 in this embodiment), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. and a surplus ball discharge channel 5915 for discharging the collected balls to a ball discharge channel (not shown).

The adjustment flow path 5911 includes a deceleration flow path 5912 formed as an inverted U-shaped flow path curved half a turn near the lower end, and a second ball inlet 640 extending from the upper end of the deceleration flow path 5912 . and a drop channel 5913 extending vertically toward the rear.

Due to the shape of the deceleration channel 5912, the balls discharged from the communication hole 5920 reduce the load applied in the opening direction of the communication hole 5920 from the following balls staying in the deceleration channel 5912, regardless of the number of retained balls. be able to. That is, the balls discharged from the communication hole 5920 are loaded by the weight of the following balls, and the deceleration flow path 5912 has a gentle slope (nearly horizontal slope) near the communication hole 5920. Therefore, the influence of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Therefore, regardless of the number of balls remaining, the speed at which the ball immediately before the communicating hole 5920 is ejected from the communicating hole 5920 can be made uniform, and the load applied from the ball to the opening/closing member 5930 can be made uniform.

Since the drop channel 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the falling balls are not decelerated and fall freely. Therefore, when a series of balls enter the second ball entrance 640, the leading ball is decelerated earlier than the trailing ball. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the surplus ball discharge channel 5915.

In the present embodiment, the adjustment channel 5911 causes the balls to stay in order from the front of the communication hole 5920, and when the number of staying balls reaches 30, the upper end of the 30th ball becomes the surplus ball discharge channel 5915. The channel length is designed to extend beyond the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, the balls after the 31st ball enter the surplus ball discharge channel 5915 . In other words, a maximum of 30 balls stay in front of the communication hole 5920 .

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high probability state of 30 rotations. During this period, the ball is likely to enter the second ball inlet 640, and the player can aim for the next big win while suppressing the loss of the ball by proceeding with the right-handed game. On the other hand, since the ball that entered the second ball entrance 640 enters the adjustment channel 5911, it stays in the adjustment channel 5911 from the start of the high-probability state toward the end of the high-probability state. ball increases.

When the solenoids 1510, 2810 are not energized, the opening/closing member 5930 is arranged at a position that protrudes inward of the communication hole 5920 and closes the opening below the outer shape of the sphere. A movable closing member 5931 arranged at a position retreating to the outside of the communication hole 5920 is connected to the movable closing member 5931 and the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the solenoid 1510 is driven to be movable in the left-right direction. A connecting rod portion 5932 supported by the thin plate member 1110, and a slide rail portion 5933 disposed at the tip of the connecting rod portion 5932 and supporting the movable closing member 5931 so as to be vertically movable relative to the connecting rod portion 5932. , and an elastic spring 5934 having one end disposed on the connecting rod portion 5932 and applying an upward biasing force to the movable closing member 5931 .

46(a) and 46(b) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 5000 taken along line XLVI-XLVI in FIG. 46(a) illustrates a state in which the communication hole 5920 is open, and FIG. 46(b) illustrates a state in which the communication hole 5920 is closed.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and the balls flow into the storage channel 1231 from the communication hole 5920 and can be retained, up to the third ball AP53 flows into the storage channel 1231. On the other hand, the fourth ball AP54 is held at a position where it cannot escape from the communication hole 5920. - 特許庁

In the jackpot game, in this state, a plurality of balls IP51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) that have passed through the first specific winning port 1000a or the second specific winning port 2255a flow into the storage channel 1231, so that the communication hole The ball IP51 that has flowed in fills the space for the ball AP54 held in a position where it does not come off from the 5920 to enter the storage channel 1231 . Therefore, the ball held in a position where it cannot escape from the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 thereafter and is maintained at that position.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are de-energized and the restricting member 2600 is changed to the discharge state, so that the movable closing member 5931 moves from the extension adjustment channel 5911 to the storage channel 1231. The inflow of balls is restricted.

When the discharge of the balls from the storage channel 1231 is completed, the state is switched again to that shown in FIG. 46(a). spheres flow into storage channel 1231 .

In the jackpot game, as described above, the inflow of balls from the adjusting flow path 5911 to the storage flow path 1231 is repeated, and the inflow is defined to be a maximum of three balls per opening of the communication hole 5920. be.

With reference to FIG. 47, the case where the jackpot game progresses by driving the solenoid 1510 will be described. 47(a) to 47(c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. 47(a) to 47(c) show the operations of the opening/closing plate 1300, the regulating member 2600, and the opening/closing member 5930 driven by the solenoid 1510 in chronological order.

In FIG. 47(a), the state in which the solenoid 1510 is energized is shown, and in FIG. 47(b), and FIG. 47(c) shows a state where the time difference forming part 5423 is arranged above the engaging part 1333.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), the communication hole 5920 is opened as the solenoid 1510 is energized so that the ball can pass therethrough.

When the state of FIG. 47(a) changes to the state of FIG. 47(b), the movable closing member 5931 moves along with the movement of the tip member 1520 to close the communication hole 5920, while the opening/closing plate 1300 is engaged. Since the portion 1333 still contacts the time difference forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction and the movement of the opening/closing plate 1300 is restricted, the restriction member 2600 maintains the storage state.

In the state shown in FIG. 47(c), the regulating member 2600 is put into the discharge state, and the balls staying in the storage channel 1231 are discharged. That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven, the communication hole 5920 can be closed before the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 is started. Balls can be prevented from flowing in from 5911.

48(a) and 48(b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. 48(a) and 48(b) show the operation of the regulation member 2600 and the opening/closing member 5930 by driving the solenoid 2810 in chronological order. FIG. 48(a) shows a state in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are not energized, and FIG. 48(b) shows a state in which the solenoid 2810 is energized.

As shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), when the solenoid 2810 is energized, the pressing portion 5870 presses down the movable closing member 5931, thereby opening the communication hole 5920. As shown in FIGS. This allows the ball to flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 . On the other hand, when the solenoid 2810 is de-energized, the movable closing member 5931 is moved upward by the biasing force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

Therefore, when either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is energized, the communication hole 5920 is opened to allow the ball to flow into the storage channel 1231, and when it is de-energized, the communication hole 5920 is opened. It is closed and the inflow into the storage channel 1231 is restricted.

Due to the mechanism described above, in a jackpot game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, a certain number of balls (up to three in this embodiment) flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 .

In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special design, for example, it is determined that the special design is a jackpot with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special design (variable state of the special design), for example, 20 minutes With a probability of 1, it is determined as a special symbol jackpot. When it is determined that the special symbol is a big win, after the end of the big win game, the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 30 times, and the lottery of the special symbol is performed 30 times. It is configured to be set to a normal state after the termination. In this embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, three types of "jackpot H", "jackpot h", and "jackpot i" are provided as the special symbol jackpot types (see FIG. 49). Although the details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific prize winning port 1000a and the second specific prize winning port 2255a are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entering the first variable prize winning device 5000 can be changed. Configured.

FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot types in the special symbols. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table that stores determination values for determining the jackpot types. It is defined in association with the type of ball entrance that triggered the lottery of the pattern. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99". is defined in association with the jackpot H (see 202b51 in FIG. 49).

In the case of a big hit in the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". are associated and defined (see 202b52 in FIG. 49).

When the jackpot H or jackpot h is achieved, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the eleventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 . In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2250 prize balls, can win the specified number of balls regardless of the timing of winning the big win, and can receive the payout of the specified upper limit.

When the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) results in a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99". are associated and defined (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

When the jackpot i is achieved, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the twelfth operating pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 . In this case, according to the number of balls entering the second ball entrance 640 until the big win is won, the maximum number of prize balls to be paid out and the time required for the big win game are variable.

That is, in the case of a big win in the lottery for the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), a specified number of prize balls can be paid out regardless of the timing of the big win. In the case of a big hit in the special pattern 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640), the number of prize balls is determined according to the number of balls entering the second ball entrance 640 until the big win is obtained. Since the maximum value of the number of payouts and the time required for the jackpot game are variable, the payout of the prize balls is varied depending on when the jackpot of the right-handed game occurs in addition to the game property of obtaining the jackpot in the right-handed game. You can add sex. As a result, it is possible to suppress the right-handed game from being played carelessly, and it is possible to improve the attention to each variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 50(a) is a diagram showing changes in timing of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the eleventh operating pattern, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the time-measurement change of 1 specific prize-winning mouth 1000a and the 2nd specific prize-winning mouth 2255a.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure winning determination, after the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, it starts controlling the determined kind of big winning game. Operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be described below.

<When operating in the 11th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot H or jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the eleventh operation pattern.

The MPU 201 holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the timer means (not shown) passes a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) when the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends. Solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has passed, the round game R of the first round is started.

That is, the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the second specific winning port 2255a by starting to measure the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displacing the slide plate 2840 from the closed state to the open state. to cause the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the win) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is driven and controlled to close the second specific winning port 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In the first round round game R, the communication hole 5920 is opened with the opening of the second specific winning port 2255a, and a maximum of three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48), but the When the balls are stored from the storage channel 2251 to the storage channel 1231, 13 balls can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255, so how many balls (1 to 3), there is no problem, and the round game R can be terminated by winning the specified number (10C).

When the first round of the round game R ends, the timer means operates the solenoids 1510 and 2810 to keep the open/close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 closed until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. is driven and controlled, and after the elapse of the third interval time Int3 between rounds, the round game R of the second round is started. Here, with an interval of 3 seconds, it is possible to discharge a maximum of 15 balls from the discharge port 1150. A maximum of 14 spheres that can be stored in a row can be discharged globally.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specific operation. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the second round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round ends.

Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated with the inter-round first interval time Int1 interposed between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is closed and opened. , and the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

When the final round game R ends, the solenoid 2810 drives and controls the timer means to keep the slide plate 2840 closed until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the jackpot game ends with the elapse of the time.

According to this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 from the adjustment channel 5911 each time the solenoid 2810 is driven (excited). Therefore, even if the maximum number (30) of balls is stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, until the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the 10th round round game R), all the balls are stored. Since the ball can enter the path 1231 , the jackpot game can be finished in a state in which no ball remains in the storage path 1231 .

<When operating with the 12th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot i, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operating pattern. The MPU 201 holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the timer means (not shown) passes a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) when the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends. Solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has passed, the round game R of the first round is started. In addition, since it is the same as that of the 11th operation|movement pattern until the round game R of the 4th round, description is abbreviate|omitted.

When the fourth round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 so as to keep the slide plate 2840 closed until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the third interval time Int3, the fifth round round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the solenoid 1510 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. is driven and controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the fifth round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the fifth round ends.

Here, in the round game R of the 5th round, the ball is allowed to enter from the communication hole 5920, but unlike the 4th round, the ball enters from the first specific winning hole 1000a. Therefore, when balls are actually introduced from the communication hole 5920, the prescribed number of balls cannot win. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the fifth round of the round game R of this operation pattern is less than the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the same round of the round game R in the case of the eleventh operation pattern, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round is reduced. Since the end of the round game R is awaited until the operating time T1 elapses, the time until the end of the jackpot game is lengthened.

After that, similarly, the round game R of the 6th round to the 15th round is repeated with the third interval time Int3 between rounds interposed between each round game R, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the timer means keeps the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. Then, the jackpot game ends with the elapse of the time.

In this operation pattern, the reduction in the number of prize balls that can occur in the round game R after the fifth round and the extension of the round time are caused by the balls flowing into the storage channel 1231 from the communication hole 5920. Depending on the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 at the start of the jackpot, how much the number of prize balls is reduced and the round time is extended changes. While the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel corresponds to the number of balls that have passed through the second ball entrance 640, passing of the balls through the second ball entrance 640 results in a special symbol 2 lottery (second ball entrance). 640), the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 is related to the number of special symbol 2 lotteries.

In the following description, in this operation pattern, the number of special symbol 2 lotteries (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) in the high probability state and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 will be described. are the same number.

As described above, in the jackpot game of this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 by opening the first specific winning port 1000a or the second specific winning port 2255a once. In other words, up to 12 balls have already flowed into the storage channel 1231 by the round game R of the fourth round. Therefore, in round games from the 5th round onwards, balls flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 only when 13 or more balls are stored in the adjustment channel 5911 when the jackpot game is started. is the case. In other words, after shifting to the high probability state, the jackpot game is started in a state where the lottery for the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) has been received 13 times or more. .

Therefore, if a big hit is obtained during the period from the transition to the high probability state to the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) 12 times, the number of prize balls is reduced. In addition, since the round time is not extended, it is possible to improve the player's attention to winning the big win by the twelfth lottery.

In addition, even after the 13th lottery, the number of prize balls is reduced for each lottery, and the round time is extended for every three lotteries. attention can be improved.

That is, for example, when the jackpot is obtained in a state in which 14 balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911 (the 14th lottery of the special symbol 2), the ball is stored through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the round game R of the fifth round. Since the number of balls flowing into the channel 1231 is two, the number of winning balls in this round is eight. In addition, when the jackpot is obtained in a state in which 15 balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911 (the 15th lottery of the special pattern 2), the storage flow path through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the round game R of the 5th round. Since the number of spheres flowing into 1231 is 3, the number of prizes that can be won in this round is 7. Therefore, as the number of remaining balls increases, the number of paid-out prize balls decreases in the round game R of the fifth round.

On the other hand, when a big hit is obtained in the 13th to 15th lotteries, in any case, the balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 by flowing into the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the round game R of the 5th round. becomes 0. Therefore, from the 6th round round game R, the specified number of balls can be entered into the first specific prize winning port 1000a, and the 6th round round game R can be ended. There is no change in the degree of extension.

In addition, when the residual number of the adjustment flow path 5911 is 16 to 18 when the jackpot is won, in the round game R of the 6th round, when it is 19 to 21, in the round game R of the 7th round, 22 to 24 Decrease in the number of prize balls in the round game R of the 8th round when the number is 25-27, in the round game R of the 9th round when the number is 28-30, in the round game R of the 10th round when the number is 28-30. and an extension of the round time.

As a result, as in the present embodiment, in the game property in which the high probability state ends depending on the number of lotteries, the case where the jackpot is obtained soon after the transition to the high probability state, and the case where the jackpot is obtained just before the end of the high probability state. , it is possible to differentiate the profits (the number of prize balls to be paid out, the progress time of the jackpot game, etc.) given to the player.

In this case, in this embodiment, as the number of lotteries from the transition to the high-probability state to the winning of the big win increases, the profit given to the player is reduced. Originally, there should have been an opportunity to receive a lottery with a high probability even with the remaining number of lotteries, but the player's dissatisfaction that he or she cannot receive the lottery can be partially resolved.

In other words, if a big win was won in the first lottery after the high probability state was reached, the remaining 29 lotteries should have been added, and the next lottery should have been 59. In fact, the player's dissatisfaction with the fact that the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game is again limited to 30 times can be partially resolved. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

Even in the high-probability state, when a big hit is won in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the second specific winning hole 2255a is opened in the eleventh operation pattern. It is possible to receive the maximum payout regardless of the number of lotteries after it is opened and closed and shifted to the high probability state. Therefore, the player may play a game (left-handed game) aiming at winning the ball into the first ball entrance 64 in the high probability state.

In this case, the number of balls discharged from the first out port 66 without being connected to the special symbol lottery increases, and the interval at which the lottery can be received becomes longer and the game time is longer, as compared with the case of playing the right-handed game. It may take longer.

Therefore, as a way of playing the game in the high probability state, the player can receive the maximum number of payouts in a short time while suppressing the number of balls discharged from the first outlet 66 until the player wins the jackpot. Aiming to win a big win h) (doing a right-handed game), or playing a big win game with the expectation that the number of balls discharged from the first outlet 66 will increase until the big win is won, and the game time will be prolonged. It is possible to appropriately select whether to aim for a jackpot (whether to play a left-handed game) of the jackpot type (jackpot H) that can eliminate the risk of lowering the number of prize balls in . As a result, it is possible to expand the range of game methods to be selected according to the taste of the player and the situation (playable time, etc.).

After the high probability state ends, it becomes difficult to open the second ball entrance 640, and the player shifts to a left-handed game. In this case, a plurality of balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911, but in the jackpot type (jackpot H) that can be obtained in the left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by winning the prescribed number of prizes, the benefits (both the number of prize balls and the playing time) provided to the player are not impaired. Therefore, even if a player quits the game with the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 and the next player continues playing, it is possible to prevent the loss of the profit given to the player. A player can start a game at any timing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of lotteries for special symbol 2 in the high probability state (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (the second ball However, in actual games, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 when the big win is won is the same as the number of special symbols 2 until the big win is won. It should be noted that it is rare that the number is the same as the number of lotteries.

That is, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is carried out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the player recognizes whether or not the big win is won in the lottery after the ready-to-win effect or the like. , button-pressing effects, etc., the player normally continues to hit the ball into the second ball entrance 640 during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, up to four balls entered into the second ball entrance 640 can be held. In addition to the number of lotteries that allow the player to recognize the determination of a big win, a state is maintained in which a maximum of about four balls enter the second ball entrance 640 in excess.

In addition, even if the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 when the number of reservations is maximum, the lottery cannot be accepted, but the ball enters the adjustment flow path 5911, so that the profit that the player can obtain in the jackpot game is increased. more likely to decrease. The suspension is consumed when the fluctuation stops and the next fluctuation starts, so in other words, the longer the period until the fluctuation stops, the higher the possibility that the profit that the player can obtain in the jackpot game will decrease. It will be.

Therefore, it is possible to form a game property in which the possibility that the player's profit in the jackpot game is reduced is increased if the ball is kept hitting during performance with a high expectation such as long reach. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to launch the ball during performances with high expectations such as long reach, thereby eliminating the concentration that the player has been spending on adjusting the shooting force of the ball. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the concentration of the player on the performance such as long reach, and to improve the attention to the performance.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. FIG. In the first embodiment, the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position. The arrangement of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, below the first variable prize winning device 6000 in this embodiment, the probability variation determination section 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is arranged, and the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 It is configured to change the state after the jackpot game depending on whether or not it passes through.

FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 6000 taken along line LII-LII in FIG. Note that FIG. 52 illustrates the retracted state of the interference member 6930 . The first variable prize winning device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable prize winning device 1000 in the first embodiment (main body member 1100, covering front plate 1200, opening/closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, driving device 1500, regulating member 1600 and rear cover 1700), the sixth embodiment also includes a novel interference device 6900. FIG.

The interference device 6900 includes a solenoid 6910 arranged on the back side of the main body member 1100 and having a slide movable shaft along a plane parallel to the surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and a tip of the movable portion of the solenoid 6910. and an interference member 6930 that slides in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the tip member 6920 .

The tip member 6920 has a slot 6921 that is slanted with respect to the plane of the thin plate member 1110 . The long hole 6921 is slanted so as to approach the thin plate member 1110 toward the distal end side of the distal end member 6920 .

The interfering member 6930 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction in a through hole H61 formed in the thin plate member 1110 arranged to face the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200, and has a long hole 6921 at the rear end. , and the rear end moves back and forth along the long hole 6921 as the solenoid 6910 is driven. This back-and-forth movement allows the liquid to enter the inside of the storage channel 1231 through the through hole H61.

The through-hole H61 is arranged at a position slightly leftward from the center of the third sphere P3 stored in the storage channel 1231 . The interfering member 6930 is slid forward from the through-hole H61 to be in an overhanging state (see imaginary line in FIG. 52), so that the sphere P3 is pressed and pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231 .

53(a) and 53(b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000. FIG. 53(a) illustrates the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53(b) illustrates the case where the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state. Balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and "V" is written on the ball that first enters the specific region 4830 according to the 13th and 14th operation patterns described later. .

As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the retracted state of the interference member 6930, while the third ball is stored in the extended state of the interference member 6930. Subsequent balls are pushed into the upstream side of the storage channel 1231, and the number of stored balls remains less than 10 balls. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the prescribed number for each round game R of the jackpot game is 10, if the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the prescribed number of balls cannot be won. Since the round game R cannot be ended by winning the specified number of prizes, the completion of the round game R is waited until the specified time. Effects that can be realized by using this difference will be described below together with the description of the game modes in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special design, for example, it is determined that the special design is a jackpot with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state of the special design (variable state of the special design), for example, 4 minutes With a probability of 1, it is determined as a special symbol jackpot.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special pattern probability variable state (high probability state) is given until the special pattern lottery is completed 10 times, and the special pattern lottery is performed 10 times. After the end, while it is configured to be set to the normal state, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, the normal state is set until the lottery of special symbols is completed 10 times. It is configured to be in a time-saving state of the pattern.

In this embodiment, two types of "jackpot I" and "jackpot j" are provided as the jackpot types of special symbols. Although the details will be described later, depending on the type of jackpot, the opening pattern of the first specific winning hole 1000a and the operation pattern of the distribution device 4850 are configured differently, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 6000, It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Specifically, when the lottery for the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64) results in a big win, the big win I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54). . In the case of jackpot I, two rounds of jackpot games are executed in the thirteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850 . In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 285 prize balls, and almost certainly cannot obtain the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

On the other hand, when the lottery for the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640) results in a big win, a big win j is associated and defined (see FIG. 54).

In the case of a jackpot j, two rounds of jackpot games are executed in the 14th operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850 . In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 300 prize balls, and can almost certainly obtain the right to shift to the variable probability state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

As described above, when the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640) becomes a big hit, the right to shift to the special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is almost certainly acquired. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player compared to the case where the lottery for the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64) results in a big win. Therefore, in order to win a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640), in the special symbol probability variable state (high probability state), the player plays right-handed games. conduct.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is lengthened when the normal symbol is hit (1 seconds x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 becomes easier. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the definite variable state of the special symbol, it is easy to become a big hit of the special symbol, and when it becomes a big hit, the big hit j (almost certainly shift to the definite variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol) Since the definite variable state of the special symbol, which is a jackpot that can acquire the right of , is easily repeated, the player can easily win a large amount of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while strongly anticipating that the special symbols will shift to the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 54(a) is a diagram showing changes over time of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific region 4830 in the thirteenth operating pattern, and FIG. 54(b) shows the first specific winning in the fourteenth operating pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing changes over time of a mouth 1000a and a specific region 4830;

In FIG. 54, for ease of identification, the inter-round first interval time Int1 is shown ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long-term operation time TL). be done. Therefore, it is not used for the relative comparison of the length of each time in FIG. 54, and the relative comparison of the length of each time is made according to the time relationship described below.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure winning determination, after the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, it starts controlling the determined kind of big winning game. Operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851 and the interference member 6930 performed when a jackpot game is provided will be described below.

<When operating with the thirteenth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 so that the opening/closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) passes a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). , Solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 are driven and controlled to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. , and after the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the long-term operating time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment) the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is closed again, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long period of time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) keeps the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. Then, after the sixth opening time OP6 has passed, the interference member 6930 is changed to the extended state for the long-term operation time TL, and after the long-term operation time TL has passed, the solenoid 6910 is driven to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state again. Control to cause interference member 6930 to operate for a long period of time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the win) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning port 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In this embodiment, the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for the long-term operation time TL. During this period, the specified number of balls cannot be entered in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 53(b)). In this embodiment, the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long-term operation time TL is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. is in a retracted state, it is virtually impossible to win the specified number of balls, and the first round of the round game R ends when the first operating time T1 elapses.

Simultaneously with the end of the round game R of the first round, the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 cannot pass through the specific region 4830 . Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

When the first round of the round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open/close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round of the round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the second round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the round game R of the second round ends.

When the second round game R ends, the timer means closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse, and the interference member 6930 are held in the retracted state, and the jackpot game ends with the lapse of time.

<When operating with the 14th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot j jackpot game, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 so that the opening/closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the fourteenth operation pattern. Control.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) passes a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). , Solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 are driven and controlled to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displace the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning hole 1000a. to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) keeps the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. , and after the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the long-term operating time TL (27 seconds in this embodiment) the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is closed again, and the distribution operation member 4851 is operated for a long period of time.

When the MPU 201 displaces the opening/closing plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) keeps the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until the predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. Then, after the sixth opening time OP6 has passed, the interference member 6930 is changed to the extended state for a short time (0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the short time has passed, the interference member 6930 is held in the retracted state again. Solenoid 6910 is driven and controlled to cause interference member 6930 to operate for a short period of time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls When the win) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning port 1000a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In this embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state for a very short time, it is in the retracted state for most of the time, so as shown in FIG. It is possible to win a ball. Therefore, while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the regulating member 1600 is set in the discharge state, and the ball can be discharged toward the probability variation determination channel 4820. It can flow down to a specific area 4830 . Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbols.

When the first round of the round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open/close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round of the round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the second round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the round game R of the second round ends.

When the second round game R ends, the timer means closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse, and the interference member 6930 are held in the retracted state, and the jackpot game ends with the lapse of time.

Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time during which the winning number of balls is expected to be 3 or more and less than 6 in the round game R of the first round. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is arranged on the back side of the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, the player's line of sight is blocked by the ball, making it difficult to visually recognize the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. This makes it difficult for the player to confirm the operation mode of the interference member 6930 .

Therefore, since the change due to the protrusion of the interference member 6930 is limited to the movement of the third and subsequent balls in the storage channel 1231, the player can recognize whether or not the interference member 6930 has caused a change. To allow a player to enjoy a game of winning a ball in a first specific winning port 1000a and storing the ball in a storage channel 1231 without giving a sense of incongruity to a player due to the action of an interference member 6930.例文帳に追加can be done.

When the balls are stored up to the vicinity of the entrance of the storage channel 1231 and the round game R of the first round is not completed even then, a sense of incongruity is given for the first time, and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is actually counted. It is possible to form a new game property in which the difference between the jackpot types is recognized for the first time.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, while making it difficult to recognize a change in the situation visually recognized through the game board 13 (a change in the state of the interference member 6930), the operation mode of the first variable winning device 6000 allows the player to It is possible to notify the change in the situation of the game board 13 from the sense of incongruity given in an easy-to-recognize manner, and to make the player recognize the difference in the types of big wins. Therefore, attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be improved.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. FIG. In the third embodiment, the case where the ball placed at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 falls as it is when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed has been described. , the second drop delay plate 7260 allows the ball placed at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 to flow down toward the drop delay plate 3250 when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

55 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate 7200 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b). It is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 7000 on the line corresponding to the line. The configuration of the first variable prize winning device 7000 of the present embodiment is the same as that of the first variable prize winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment, except for the covering front plate 7200, so description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the covering front plate 7200 has the same configuration as the configuration described in the third embodiment (thin plate member 1210, side wall portion 1220, accommodation portion 1230, detection sensor 1240, and drop delay plate 3250). ), a second fall retardation plate 7260, which is newly introduced in this embodiment, is provided.

The second drop retardation plate 7260 is a plate member that extends to the rear side of the thin plate member 1210 between the terminal surface 3251b and the housing portion 1230, and is lowered so that the upper surface 7261 thereof separates from the detection sensor 1240. incline. As shown in FIG. 57, the second fall delay plate 7260 extends rearward to such an extent that it does not interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 .

As shown in FIG. 56, the second fall retardation plate 7260 has a distance from the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 in the vicinity of the detection sensor 1240 that is less than the diameter of the sphere, and is located at the farthest position from the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance between the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 is less than the diameter of the sphere.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second drop retardation plate 7260 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) of the locus of movement of the ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop retardation plate 3250 . That is, it does not act on the ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 . That is, the second fall retardation plate 7260 is configured as a plate member that changes whether or not it comes into contact with the ball depending on the path of the ball's arrival. This will be explained below.

FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 7000 along the line corresponding to line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b). FIG. 58(a) shows a case where the opening/closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state while the ball is positioned near the vertical position of the falling position Pf3, and FIG. 58(b) shows the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state. A case is illustrated in which the ball rolls toward the falling position Pf3.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), when the ball is placed in the vicinity of the vertical position of the falling position Pf3, as the plate portion 1310 tilts forward when the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated, the ball falls to the covering front plate. It flows down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, it abuts on the second fall retardation plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, flows down along the slope of the upper surface to the fall retardation plate 3250 side, and then rolls on the upper surface of the fall retardation plate 3250 to fall position Pf3 again. to reach

The distance between the second drop retardation plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (the distance between the rolling surface 1311 of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the sphere. , the ball can be prevented from falling vertically on the back side of the second drop retardation plate 7260 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58(b), when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball rolling on the drop retardation plate 3250 moves along the backward inclination of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop retardation plate 3250 toward the main body member 3100. It flows down while contacting.

At this time, the center position (maximum diameter position) of the sphere is arranged below the second drop retardation plate 7260, so that the extension length of the second drop retardation plate 7260 to the back side is less than the movement trajectory of the sphere. The upper surface 7261 can catch the ball falling from above while the front side is also fixed.

The ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not contact the second drop delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, and after reaching the drop position Pf3, it drops as it is. Therefore, similarly to the third embodiment, the ball can be dropped smoothly from the lower end of the drop retardation plate 3250 .

As described above, in this embodiment, depending on which direction the ball approaches the second fall retardation plate 7260, it is possible to switch between the case where the ball is affected by the second fall retardation plate 7260 and the case where it is not affected.

In this embodiment, while maintaining the action of smoothly dropping the balls rolling on the drop retardation plate 3250 to the position facing the end surface 3251b, two balls in a row roll on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 1300, and the previous ball passes the detection sensor 1240 and the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the falling of the ball arranged immediately before the detection sensor 1240 can be delayed.

Also, even if two balls do not come in a row, the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed by chance when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 is placed in front of the detection sensor 1240. can also cause the ball to flow down to the fall retardation plate 3250 side. In this case, the ball rolls leftward on the upper surface 7261 of the second fall retardation plate 7260 and then resumes rolling rightward along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall retardation plate 3250 .

Therefore, substantially, the ball can be maintained on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 for longer than the time required to roll over the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 . As a result, the number of useless balls (balls flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and discharged from the first out port 66) that may occur during the interval time can be reduced.

Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 65. FIG. 59 and 60 are front views of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment, and FIGS. 61 and 62 are rear views of the first variable winning device 8000. FIG.

59 and 60, the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away so that the opening/closing plate 8300 is visible, and a portion of the side wall portion 1220 and a portion of the inclined surface 1237 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 59 and 61, after the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening/closing plate 8300 is in the open state (raised posture), and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is in the open state (extending posture). 60 and 62, the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is released, the opening/closing plate 8300 is closed (tilted posture), and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed (retracted posture). ) is shown. Also, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in the above-described embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the paper is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper is defined as the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 59 to 62, the opening/closing plate 8300 of the first variable winning device 8000 includes the shaft portion 1320 described in each of the above embodiments, the load receiving portion 1330, and the distance between the shaft portions 1320 of about 4 or the like. A plate portion 8310 formed in a plate shape is provided in three sections on the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) in front view.

That is, in this embodiment, a gap is formed between the opening/closing plate 8300 and the detection sensor 1240 on the front surface of the thin plate member 1110, and the fixed receiving portion 8250 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are arranged in this gap. is set.

Since the axial length of the plate portion 8310 of the opening/closing plate 8300 is shorter than that of the first embodiment, the formation range of the rectangular concave portion 1122 can also be shortened. In this embodiment, the rectangular concave portion 1122 is formed in the minimum necessary range for the plate portion 8310 to enter (see FIG. 59).

The fixed receiving part 8250 is a part fixed to the covering front plate 8200 and serves as a rolling surface for the ball guided to the detection sensor 1240 . The configuration of the covering front plate 8200 is the same as that of the covering front plate 1200 described in the above embodiment, except for the fixed receiving portion 8250. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to each configuration, and the details thereof will be described. Description is omitted.

The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a rod-shaped member that protrudes from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the main body member 1100 , and the protruding end (back side end) thereof fits into the support recess 1121 on the right side of the main body member 1100 . abuts on the main body member 1100 in such a manner as to close the open end (front side end) of the . Therefore, in this embodiment, the right shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 8300 is rotatably supported by the support recess 1121 and the fixed receiving portion 8250 .

The fixed receiving portion 8250 is formed so that the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) is aligned with the upper surface (rolling surface) of the opening/closing plate 8300 in the open state, that is, as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the right. , the lower surface is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotating shaft of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 . The arc on which the shape of the lower surface is based is formed as an arc with a radius shorter than the radius of the motion trajectory (arc) of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (radius of the longest part, that is, the radius of the motion trajectory of the upper end of the facing surface 8341b). be done. As a result, the upper corner of the facing surface 8341b and the fixed receiving portion 8250 come into contact with each other in the moving direction of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 moves (rotates) the fixed receiving portion 8250 by a predetermined angle or more. Regulated.

As shown in FIG. 59, the projecting margin (length of projecting to the left) of fixed receiving portion 8250 is designed to prevent a ball falling from the left end of inclined surface 1237 from riding on the rolling surface. be. That is, in this embodiment, the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is arranged to the left of the left end of the inclined surface 1237, but the overhang length is less than the radius of the sphere. Therefore, even if the ball falls vertically from the inclined surface 1237 and collides with the fixed receiving portion 8250, the center of gravity of the ball is to the left of the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250. , the event that the ball flows down to the detection sensor 1240 hardly occurs, and the ball spills leftward from the fixed receiving portion 8250 and falls toward the first outlet 66 .

In addition, when the ball spilled leftward from the fixed receiving portion 8250 rolls on the facing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the load applied from the ball to the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 causes the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 to move to the closed state. (directed to rotate the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 clockwise when viewed from the front). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the state change of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 to the open state due to the load applied from the ball.

In addition, from the upstream configuration of the first variable winning device 8000 in the game area (the arrangement of the nail, the second ball entrance 640, etc., see FIG. 2), a ball with a speed to the lower right reaches the fixed receiving portion 8250. The probability of a jump event occurring is extremely low.

Therefore, while the fixed receiving portion 8250 having a rolling surface is disposed upstream of the detection sensor 1240, the fixed receiving portion 8250 alone does not cause the ball to be excessively easily guided to the detection sensor 1240. configured to

The essence of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is to prevent the balls rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) from flowing down while the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened and closed by rotating operation. Details of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 will be described below.

The auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is a member rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110, and includes a receiving plate 8341 arranged on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 and extending from the receiving plate 8341 toward the rotation shaft. a rod-shaped connecting portion 8342, a load receiving portion 8343 disposed on the back side of the thin plate member 1110 and capable of coming into contact with the power transmission member 1400, and the connecting portion 8342 and the load receiving portion 8343 being relatively non-rotatable. It mainly includes a shaft support rod portion 8344 which is a connecting rod-shaped member and is rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110 .

In the present embodiment, the shaft supporting rod portion 8344 has a circular cross-sectional portion supported by the thin plate member 1110, and has a support portion that supports the connecting portion 8342 on the front side and a load receiving portion 8343 on the rear side. A supporting portion for supporting is formed to have a D-shaped cross section (a shape that is not circular). Fitting portions (holes or recesses) having a shape corresponding to this D shape are formed in the connecting portion 8342 and the load-bearing portion 8343, and in the state of use (see FIG. 59), the supporting portion and the fitting portion are fitted. By being put together, the connecting portion 8342 and the load receiving portion 8343 are configured to rotate integrally.

The load receiving portion 8343 is a substantially fan-shaped portion whose end portion is supported by the shaft support rod portion 8344 . and a center of gravity portion 8343 b that is arranged on the right side of the pivotal support rod portion 8344 regardless of the posture of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 and includes the center of gravity position of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 .

As shown in FIG. 62, the contact curved surface 8343a is a straight line that overlaps with the lower surface of the extension portion 1420 during operation of the power transmission member 1400, and the extension portion 1420 moves downward (tilts). The right end portion where extension portion 1420 starts contacting has a surface substantially parallel to contact start line FL1 including the point where portion 1420 and load receiving portion 8343 start contacting.

Since a smooth curved surface is formed in such a manner that the radius of rotation is gradually shortened from the right end to the left end, which is the end point of contact with the extension 1420, the extension 1420 and the load-bearing portion are formed. 8343 can be smoothly transmitted (with small dynamic friction). Thereby, followability of the load receiving portion 8343 to the extension portion 1420 can be improved.

The center-of-gravity portion 8343b is a portion for maintaining the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 in the closed state (inward posture) when no load is applied from the power transmission member 1400 . That is, since the gravity center position of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is included in the gravity center portion 8343b, the posture of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 changes toward the closed state (immersion posture) due to rotation by its own weight. Further rotation of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is restricted by the abutment of the receiving plate 8341 of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 and the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250, and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state (inward posture). be done.

The connecting portion 8342 is coupled to the receiving plate 8341 at the left end of the receiving plate 8341 (that is, the portion adjacent to the opening/closing plate 8300 and where a load may occur). As a result, the rigidity of the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 can be improved while narrowing the arrangement range of the connecting portion 8342 . Even if it collides with the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the possibility of damage to the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 can be reduced.

Note that the connecting portion 8342 only needs to connect the receiving plate 8341 and the pivotal support rod portion 8344, and the configuration thereof is not limited to this. For example, in addition to connecting the left end of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support rod 8344, the right end of the support plate 8341 and the shaft support rod 8344 may be connected (that is, two The left and right ends of the receiving plate 8341 may be supported by rods.) In that case, the two rods are connected by a planar plate portion along a plane perpendicular to the pivotal support rod portion 8344 and reinforced. Also good.

The receiving plate 8341 is a plate-like portion having a front-to-rear width approximately equal to the lateral width of the plate portion 8310 of the opening/closing plate 8300. and a facing surface 8341b arranged to face the right end surface of the plate portion 8310 of the opening/closing plate 8300 in the open state (see FIG. 59).

The rolling plane 8341a is formed as a plane parallel to the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 8310 of the opening/closing plate 8300 in the open state (up posture) in the open state (extended posture).

The opposing surface 8341b is configured as a plane perpendicular to the rolling plane 8341a, and its lateral width (thickness of the receiving plate 8341) is configured to be approximately equal to the thickness of the plate portion 8310. As a result, the surface that receives the load when the opposing surface 8341b and the plate portion 8310 abut can be enlarged, so that the receiving plate 8341 or the plate portion 8310 is not damaged (cracked or chipped) due to the load at the time of abutment. occurrence, damage, etc.) can be easily avoided.

Here, the facing surface 8341b is disposed on the left side of a plane passing through the pivot rod portion 8344 and perpendicular to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320 (away from the detection sensor 1240). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, the motion locus LC1 of the opposing surface 8341b when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 operates between the open state (see FIG. 59) and the closed state (see FIG. 60) is the rolling plane in the open state. It bulges upward (outside in the radial direction of the shaft support rod portion 8344) from 8341a. This makes it possible to easily push a ball (in this embodiment, one ball) on the upper surface of the rolling plane 8341a into the detection sensor 1240, which will be described later in detail.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, the operation mode and operation sequence of auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, opening/closing plate 8300, and regulating member 1600 according to the load transmitted through power transmission member 1400 will be described.

63 and 64 show the operations of the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 in chronological order. FIG. 65 also shows changes in the drive (excited) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 over time.

63(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 along line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63(a). 63(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63(d) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 along line LXIIId-LXIIId of FIG. 63(c).

64(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). 64(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64(d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 along line LXIVd-LXIVd of FIG. 64(c).

63 and 64, for ease of understanding, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500, the restricting member 1600, and the covering front plate 8200 are fixed. Only the receiving part 8250 is shown while maintaining its arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 59 to 62), and the illustration of other configurations is omitted, and the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are in the closed state (see FIG. 63 ( 63(b)) to the open state (see FIGS. 64(c) and 64(d)) in chronological order.

That is, in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the state in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is located at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state) is shown. 63(c) and 63(d), the tip member 1520 is displaced from the reference line O1 to a second auxiliary distance shorter than a second distance h2 (see FIG. 20(c)) shorter than the first distance h1. 64(a) and 64(b), the tip member 1520 is displaced and separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a. 64(c) and 64(d), the distal end member 1520 is displaced and separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4, which is shorter than the third distance h3 (the solenoid 1510 is The final position when excited) is shown in each figure.

When the tip member 1520 is positioned apart from the reference line O1 by the second auxiliary distance h2a (see FIG. 63(c)), the power transmission member 1400 contacts the lower surface of the extension portion 1420 with the contact start line FL1. Consent with matching conditions. 63(c) and 63(d), the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 begins to receive the load from the power transmission member 1400 (from the state shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the 63(c) and 63(d), the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 remains closed).

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excited) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 over time. In addition, in FIG. 65, distances h1, h2, h2a, h3, and h4 are illustrated in the column of the tip member 1520 corresponding to the position of the tip member 1520. As shown in FIG.

The opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are each driven (excited) by a single solenoid 1510, but as shown in FIG. 65, there is a time lag in operation timing.

That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening/closing plate 8300 starts operating earlier than the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and finishes the operation earlier. .

In addition, the regulation member 1600 starts moving toward the storage state after the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 starts moving toward the open state, and enters the storage state at the same time that the opening/closing plate 8300 opens. As shown in FIG. 65, each timing chart is bilaterally symmetrical, and when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released, each member operates in the reverse order of the case of being driven (excited).

As shown in FIG. 65, when the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening/closing plate 8300 is not closed at the timing when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened. A state in which a ball can be entered is maintained (see FIGS. 63(c) and 63(d)). Therefore, during the period when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 changes its state from the open state to the closed state, the state in which the ball can pass through the detection sensor 1240 is maintained.

Here, in the present embodiment, the motion locus LC1 of the opposing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is configured to swell above the rolling plane 8341a. The center of the sphere P82, which flows down the upstream side of the sphere P81 in tandem with the sphere P81, is a plane perpendicular to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320 and passing through the center of the shaft support rod portion 8344 (the maximum expansion point of the motion locus LC1 is (see FIG. 59). Therefore, when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 changes state from the open state to the closed state, the upper end of the facing surface 8341b can apply a rightward load (into the detection sensor 1240) to the sphere P82.

As a result, with the configuration of this embodiment, on the premise that a continuous ball is formed (the condition of the ball upstream of the detection sensor 1240 satisfies the conditions, see balls P81 and P82 in FIG. 59), the ball P81 is the detection sensor. When the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 1510 is canceled by being detected by 1240 (for example, when the ball P81 is detected by the detection sensor 1240 and a specified number of balls in the round game R are detected) However, only one ball on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (corresponding to the ball P82), excess winning (so-called over winning. That is, the specified number of round games R (this In the embodiment, it can be configured to allow more than 10 balls to be detected by the detection sensor 1240 (to pass through the first specific winning hole 1000a).

In this embodiment, the receiving surface 8341 operates in an arcuate trajectory to apply a load to the sphere P82. Therefore, compared to the case where the ball P82 is pushed into the detection sensor 1240 along an arc track, fluttering when the ball P82 passes through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 (the ball P82 collides with the inner surface of the detection sensor 1240, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of stagnation, rebounding, etc.).

In this embodiment, the ball is stored downstream of the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231). It is configured to be able to regulate passage of 1240 spheres. Therefore, when the storage channel 1231 is full of balls, the ball P82 is restricted by the balls stored in the storage channel 1231, so that the ball P82 does not enter the storage channel 1231, and the auxiliary opening/closing operation is performed. After the member 8340 is closed, the liquid spills out and flows down toward the first out port 66 .

On the other hand, if there is a gap in the storage channel 1231, only one ball on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 can be allowed to win excessive prizes. Therefore, the arrangement of the balls downstream of the detection sensor 1240 (that is, the arrangement of the balls inside the storage channel 1231) can change the likelihood of occurrence of excess winnings, so the number of excess winnings can be This can be done by a control that adjusts the flow of the spheres in path 1231 .

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The contact curved surface 8343a of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is smooth in such a manner that the turning radius gradually decreases from the contact start portion (right end) with the power transmission member 1400 to the contact end portion (left end). A curve was formed. As a result, load transmission can occur with small dynamic friction. Thereby, followability of the load receiving portion 8343 to the extension portion 1420 can be improved.

In a state where continuous balls are formed on the upstream side of the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific winning hole 1000a), only one ball on the rolling plane 8341a is opened by the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340. When the state is changed (rotated) from the open state to the closed state, a load is applied from the rolling plane 8341a toward the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning hole 1000a). As a result, when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 rotates (operates to the closed state), a limited number of balls (in this embodiment, one ball) enter the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific winning hole 1000a). It can be made easier to ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that a limited number of excess winnings will occur.

In addition, the possibility of occurrence of this excess winning varies depending on how balls are accumulated in the accumulation channel 1231 . That is, it is possible to change the possibility of excessive winning depending on the arrangement state (the number of stored balls, etc.) in the storage channel 1231 when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 rotates (operates toward the closed state). Furthermore, the arrangement state of the balls in the storage channel 1231 can be adjusted by the drive (excitation) control mode of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the operation mode of the interference member 6930 . That is, by controlling the drive (excitation) mode of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the interference member 6930, it is possible to level out the number of prize balls to be paid out due to excessive winning.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. FIG. 66 and 67 are front views of the first variable winning device 9000 in the ninth embodiment, and FIGS. 68 and 69 are rear views of the first variable winning device 9000. FIG. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in the above-described embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

66 and 68, the state after the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening/closing plate 8300 is in the open state (up position), and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is in the open state (extended position). 67 and 69, the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500 is released, the opening/closing plate 8300 is closed (tilted posture), and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed (retracted posture). The state after becoming is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the first variable winning device 9000 is a combination of the configurations described in the above embodiments, except that the thin plate member 9110 of the main body member 9100 is different from the above embodiment. Briefly, it corresponds to the one in which the power transmission member 1400 of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment is replaced with the power transmission member 5400 described in the fifth embodiment.

As in the above-described embodiment, in the power transmission member 5400 , the front-side projecting end of the pushing portion 1422 and the front-side projecting end of the time difference forming portion 5423 are located at the same angle perpendicular to the rotation axis of the power transmission member 5400 . placed on a plane. Therefore, even when the time difference forming portion 5423 pushes the engagement portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 8300 (even the state before being pushed by the pushing portion 1422 corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 71(a)), the opening/closing plate 8300 is opened. The state changes to the state (see FIGS. 66 and 68).

The thin plate member 9110 is provided with an auxiliary ball entrance 9111 drilled with a size that allows the ball to pass through, and a length that allows the ball to be guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 and extends toward the front side of the thin plate member 9110. A rolling plate 9112 is mainly provided.

The auxiliary ball entrance 9111 is a through hole arranged to the left of the ejection port 1150 in a front view, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) balls are dispensed by detecting the passage of the balls. It is a prize mouth. It should be noted that, without being limited to the configuration of this embodiment, for example, the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 may be an entrance (for example, an exit) in which prize balls are not paid out.

The rolling plate 9112 is configured as a plate on which balls flowing down between the main body member 9100 and the covering front plate 8200 roll. ) is formed as a downwardly sloping ramp. Furthermore, the rolling plate 9112 is formed in a manner connected to the lower side of the auxiliary ball entrance 9111, and on the front side of the auxiliary ball entrance 9111, the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the rear side. be.

That is, the ball on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 is guided along the slope to the front side of the auxiliary ball entrance 9111, passes through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111, and is discharged from the game area. At this time, in this embodiment, three prize balls are paid out to the player.

The length of the rolling plate 9112 is designed so as not to pick up the ball rolling on the upper surface of the inclined surface 1237 and flowing down the free-falling ball flow-down path FK1. That is, in a state in which the first variable prize winning device 9000 is not driven, the ball will not pass through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 no matter how long the player continues to hit to the right.

On the other hand, the opening/closing plate 8300 having an upper surface that slopes down toward the right is slightly driven (for example, it is energized for 0.1 second to rotate the opening/closing plate 8300 toward the open state). When a ball given a load flows down the load flow path FK2, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 and can pass through the auxiliary ball inlet 9111. That is, in this embodiment, the ball that abuts the opening/closing plate 8300 when the opening/closing plate 8300 is driven can pass through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 in addition to the first specific winning hole 1000a.

Here, since the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 8300 differs from that described above in the eighth embodiment, it will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. FIG.

70 and 71 show the operations of the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the restricting member 1600 in chronological order. FIG. 72 also shows changes in the drive (excited) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 over time.

70(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70(a). 70(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70(d) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 along line LXXd-LXXd of FIG. 70(c).

71(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 along line LXXIb-LXXIb of FIG. 71(a). 71(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71(d) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 along line LXXId-LXXId of FIG. 71(c).

70 and 71, for ease of understanding, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500, the restricting member 1600, and the covering front plate 8200 are fixed. Only the receiving part 8250 is shown while maintaining its arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 66 to 69), and the illustration of other configurations is omitted, and the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are in the closed state (FIG. 70 ( 70(b)) to the open state (see FIGS. 71(c) and 71(d)) in chronological order.

That is, in FIGS. 70(a) and 70(b), the state in which the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500 is located at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state). 70(c) and 70(d), the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by an auxiliary first distance h1a shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIG. 71 ( 71(c) and 71(b), the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a second auxiliary distance h2a shorter than the first auxiliary distance h1a is shown in FIGS. 71(c) and 71(b). In FIG. 71(d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and placed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a (the final reach position when the solenoid 1510 is excited). Each state is illustrated.

In the state where the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the reference line O1 by the first auxiliary distance h1a (see FIG. 70(c)), the intermediate transmission portion 1332 of the opening/closing plate 8300 pushed down by the power transmission member 5400 and the restriction This is the same as the state in which the extended portion 1620 of the member 1600 starts to abut. 70(c) and 70(d), the regulating member 1600 starts receiving a load from the opening/closing plate 8300 (from the state shown in FIGS. 70(a) and 70(b) to the state shown in FIG. 70 ( The regulating member 1600 is maintained in the raised posture (discharged state) until reaching the states shown in c) and FIG. 70(d)).

In the present embodiment, unlike the eighth embodiment, the opening/closing plate 8300 is opened when the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 71(a)). state (up posture), and the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state. Then, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (see FIG. 71(a)), which has been in the closed state, is opened (see FIG. 71(a)) in a state in which the distal end member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the fourth distance h4. 71(c)).

Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b) to the state shown in FIGS. Member 1600 remains in storage.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excited) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulation member 1600 over time. In addition, in FIG. 72, distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 corresponding to the positions of the tip member 1520 are illustrated in the column of the tip member 1520. As shown in FIG.

The opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are each driven (excited) by a single solenoid 1510, but as shown in FIG. 72, there is a time lag in operation timing.

That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the distal end member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening/closing plate 8300 starts to operate earlier than the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the opening/closing plate 8300 starts operating earlier than the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340. After the operation ends, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 starts operating.

Moreover, the regulation member 1600 starts operating toward the storage state before the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 starts operating toward the open state, and enters the storage state at the same time that the opening/closing plate 8300 opens. As each timing chart is symmetrical in FIG. 72, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released, each member operates in the reverse order of the case of being driven (excited).

As shown in FIG. 72, when the solenoid 1510 starts driving from the de-energized state, only the opening/closing plate 8300 starts operating, and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 does not yet start operating. Therefore, by shortening the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 (short opening), the state of the opening/closing plate 8300 can be changed while the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state. This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excited) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, changes in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 over time. In addition, in FIG. 73, distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 corresponding to the position of the tip member 1520 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 73, the period for driving (exciting) the solenoid 1510 is half the time (0.1 second in this embodiment) required for the switch plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state. (that is, the case where it is driven (excited) for 0.05 seconds is shown).

In this case, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state, and only the opening/closing plate 8300 is repeatedly raised to the intermediate state. According to this operation, a load can be applied to the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 8300, so that the falling path of the ball that reaches the front side of the opening/closing plate 8300 at the timing when the opening/closing plate 8300 is driven is changed. The route FK1 can be switched to the load downflow route FK2 (see FIG. 66). Therefore, by continuing to hit the right ball, the ball can be passed through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111, and prize balls can be paid out to the player.

With this configuration, for example, it is possible to configure a game feature in which prize balls are paid out in a small winning game. In the small winning game, by driving (exciting) the solenoid 1510 in the open pattern shown in FIG. A ball can be guided to the ball entrance 9111 to cause a prize ball payout.

Since the drive of the solenoid 1510 of this small winning game can be continuously executed a plurality of times, the timing at which the ball reaches the front side of the opening/closing plate 8300 can be set at a plurality of times. For example, one drive (excitation) period is 0.05 seconds, so if the total drive (excitation) period of the solenoid 1510 is 1.8 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) 36 times. be able to.

Also, by setting the interval of driving (excitation), it is possible to easily apply a load to the sphere via the opening/closing plate 8300 . For example, if the ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, 0.6×X (the number of times the ball reaches)=0.5×X+0.1×X=, so the solenoid 1510 By driving (exciting) with , a load can be applied to the balls via the opening/closing plate 8300 at a rate of about one in five balls regardless of the timing of the start of driving (excitation).

In this case, about 7 balls can be guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 in one small winning game, and about 21 prize balls can be paid out to the player.

The period of the small winning game in this case is 0.5 seconds interval×36 times=about 18 seconds. In this way, by lengthening the time of one small winning game, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the reserved ball of the special symbol disappears (cuts) before the end of the small winning game. As a result, small winning games can be generated without interruption.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 arranged above the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 is maintained in the closed state. ), the ball flowing down to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 side (that is, the ball flowing down along the load flow path FK2) receives a load from the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 and is repelled, or the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 It is possible to prevent the member 8340 from riding on the rolling plane 8341 a and being guided by the detection sensor 1240 .

Returning to FIG. 72, description will be made. As shown in FIG. 72, when the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening/closing plate 8300 is not closed at the timing when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened. Maintaining the state in which the ball can be entered is the same as described above in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, as described in the eighth embodiment, even in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it easier to make excessive winnings with a limited number of balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the regulation member 1600 is controlled to change its state to the discharge state after the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed. When the storage channel 1231 is in a full state, it is possible to prevent the discharge of the balls from the storage channel 1231 from being erroneously premature, thereby preventing the occurrence of excessive winning.

Here, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing plate 8300 maintains the open state at the timing when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed (see FIG. 71(a)). Therefore, the state of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 can be changed while maintaining the state (open state) in which a ball can be placed on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 8300 . This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excited) state of solenoid 1510 of drive device 1500, changes in the positions and states of tip member 1520, opening/closing plate 8300, auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and regulation member 1600 over time. In addition, in FIG. 74, distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 corresponding to the positions of the tip member 1520 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 74, the period for releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is set to 1/4 of the time (0.1 second in this embodiment) required for the switching plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state. (ie, the case in which the drive (excitation) is released for 0.025 seconds). Note that, hereinafter, this mode of releasing the drive (excitation) is also referred to as “1/4 release”.

In this case, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the regulating member 1600 maintain their states (maintain storage of balls in the storage channel 1231), and only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state. According to this operation, among the balls on the upper surfaces of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, several balls arranged on the upstream side of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 and the opening/closing plate 8300 are (mainly balls located outside the motion locus LC1) can flow down toward the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66).

As a result, when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 8300 passes through the detection sensor 1240 while the opening/closing plate 8300 is still maintained in the open state (when 15 prize balls are dispensed). , the detection sensor 1240 does not pass through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 (when three prize balls are paid out).

In this case, the time required for the prescribed number of balls to pass through the detection sensor 1240 is extended, so the time for the round game R can be extended without causing a loss of balls.

The upper surfaces of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 may be provided with unevenness, or a longitudinal rib may be provided on the front side of the thin plate member 9110 at a position where the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 8300 contacts. Alternatively, the flow rate of the balls may be suppressed, and the balls may be connected upstream of the detection sensor 1240 . As a result, when the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is canceled by 1/4, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will be arranged at the boundary position between the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 and the opening/closing plate 8300. The function of guiding the ball to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be improved by releasing the drive (excitation) by 1/4.

Further, the timing and the number of times of executing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 can be set in a plurality of types by associating with the jackpot type.

For example, if ball launch occurs at 0.6 second intervals, 1/4 release of solenoid 1510 drive (energization) during the 9.0 seconds required for 15 balls to reach open/close plate 8300. occurs 5 times, that is, once every 1.8 seconds, and 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 drive (excitation) occurs once, thereby assisting about 5 balls during the round game R It can be guided to the entrance 9111.

In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player can be the same as in the case where only one ball enters the first specific prize hole 1000a in the round game R.

Also, by doubling this interval, i.e. once every 3.6 seconds, by making the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occur once, about 5 balls can be played while the round game R is executed twice. It can be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111.

In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player can be the same as in the case where only one ball is excessively won in the first specific prize winning port 1000a while the round game R is executed twice.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to have equal intervals of 1.8 seconds in order to satisfy five times within 9.0 seconds. For example, 1.4 seconds, 1.6 seconds, 1.8 seconds, 2.0 seconds, 2.2 seconds, and so on, five times during 9.0 seconds in a manner that adds 0.2 seconds in order, the solenoid 1510 may cause a 1/4 release of . Also, the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 may be generated at different timings. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 will occur.

In addition, for example, by making the timing of executing 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 concentrated in the first half of the round game R, the ball is guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 by continuing to shoot the ball from the start of the round game R. It is possible to configure a game property that increases the probability of being played.

In this case, if the shooting of the ball is stopped during the inter-round interval, there is a possibility that the ball will not reach the first variable winning device 9000 at the timing when the solenoid 1510 is released by 1/4, so the inter-round interval is stopped. can be suppressed.

That is, if the ball is hit during the inter-round interval, the next round game R can be started in a state in which the hit ball has reached the vicinity of the first variable winning device 9000, and the auxiliary entry can be started. It is possible to increase the probability that the ball is guided to the ball opening 9111, and as a result, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls to be paid out. can.

In addition, for example, the timing of executing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is concentrated in the second half of the round game R, so that the specified number (10 in this embodiment) winning (first specific It is possible to promote a leisurely jackpot game in which balls are intermittently shot so as not to cause a winning to the winning opening 1000a.

In this case, in the second half of the round game R, if the round game R is prolonged until the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed, the balls pass through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111, resulting in the payout of prize balls. Since the number of balls to be put out can be increased, it is possible to make the player willingly execute a leisurely big winning game by intermittently shooting balls.

In this case, in the latter half of the round game R, a difference is provided in the number of times the solenoid 1510 is 1/4 released (for example, there are 0 times, 1 time, and 5 times). Thus, it is possible to make a difference in the additional prize balls obtained as a result of the leisurely jackpot game, so that the player's attention to the flow-down manner of the balls reaching the first variable prize winning device 9000 is maintained in a high state. can do.

On the other hand, it is also possible to continue shooting balls and cause a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the first specific prize winning opening 1000a before the solenoid 1510 is de-energized. . In this case, an increase in the payout of prize balls due to the passage of the ball through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 cannot be expected, but by shortening the time required for the round game R, the start timing of the next round game R and the end of the jackpot game The timing of receiving the lottery later can be hastened.

In this way, the player can arbitrarily select whether to aim for the payout of prize balls through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 or to ignore it and end the round game R early.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A ball that collides with the opening/closing plate 8300 during the operation of driving the opening/closing plate 8300 from the closed state to the intermediate state can enter the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 by applying a load toward the auxiliary ball entrance 9111. did. As a result, even in an operation mode in which the period in which the open/close plate 8300 is maintained in the open state is short, it is possible to facilitate the payout of prize balls. can be carried out willingly.

While continuing the state where the opening/closing plate 8300 guides the ball to the detection sensor 1240, the excitation (driving) of the solenoid 1510 is canceled by 1/4. flowed down toward the auxiliary ball entrance 9111. As a result, variations can be provided in the mode of progress of the round game R in the jackpot game and the mode of payout of prize balls.

For example, even if the number of balls passing through the first specific winning hole 1000a does not exceed the prescribed number, the player can receive the excess prize balls (first When a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) enters the specific winning hole 1000a, more prize balls (150 in this embodiment) can be obtained.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG. 75 is a front view of the first variable winning device 10000 in the tenth embodiment, and FIGS. 76 and 77 are rear views of the first variable winning device 10000. FIG. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in the above-described embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

75 and 76 show a state in which the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is de-energized and the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231 reaches the bottom end, and FIG. is driven (excited), and the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231 can be ejected on the way.

As shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the first variable prize winning device 10000 includes a case where the ball can be discharged from the middle position of the storage channel 1231 formed by the main body member 10100 and the covering front plate 10200. Except for being different from the embodiment, it is a combination of the configurations described in the above embodiments. Briefly, the movable parts (that is, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the driving device 1500, the regulating member 1600, and the interference device 6900) except for the intermediate discharge device 10180 are configured in the eighth embodiment. is used as is.

In the present embodiment, a mechanism for discharging balls at a midway position of the storage channel 1231 will be described. In this embodiment, the covering front plate 10200 is extended in a box-like shape that opens toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210, and includes a storage passage 1231, a projecting portion 1235, and an accommodating portion 10230 having an inclined surface 1237. .

The housing portion 10230 includes a bulging portion 10232 formed in such a manner that the bottom wall portion of the box bulges downward, and a through hole 10233 drilled in the front-rear direction near the bulging portion 10232 .

The bulging portion 10232 bulges vertically below the sphere whose flow is restricted by the interference member 6930 with a volume larger than that of a sphere, and a through hole 10233 having a cross-sectional area larger than that of a sphere connected to the storage channel 1231 is formed in that portion. is formed. Thereby, it is possible to configure such that the ball staying in the vicinity of the interference member 6930 drops downward from the storage channel 1231 toward the bulging portion 10232 .

The through-hole 10233 includes a horizontal hole 10233a extending in the left-right horizontal direction below the bottom surface of the storage channel 1231, and a vertical hole spatially connected to the horizontal hole 10233a and extending downward with a width equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. 10233b, and an inclined surface 10233c that is inclined downward toward the back side as the upper bottom surface of the vertical hole 10233b.

The horizontal hole 10233a is arranged above the bulging portion 10232 at the left and right ends, below the bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 near the right end, and near the left end of the storage channel 1231. It is constructed so as to enter the upper side of a plane (a plane with a constant inclination) along the extension of the lower bottom surface.

The main body member 10100 includes, in addition to the configuration of the main body member 1100 described in the above embodiment, a thin plate member 10110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board and having substantially the same shape as the horizontal hole 10233a. A horizontal hole 10111 is drilled, a discharge port 10112 is drilled so that the ball thrown to the back side along the inclined surface 10233c can pass through, and a thin plate member 10110 is provided and moves along the horizontal hole 10111. and an intermediate ejection device 10180 having a portion.

The intermediate ejection device 10180 mainly includes a movable member 10181 that is inserted through both of the horizontal holes 10111 and 10233a and can move left and right, and a solenoid 10182 that generates a driving force for moving the movable member 10181 left and right. Prepare.

The movable member 10181 moves the solenoid 10182 to a closed state (see FIGS. 75 and 76) that closes an opening in the middle of the storage channel 1231 (opening leading to the through hole 10233) when the solenoid 10182 is not excited (non-driving). The (driving) state is switched to an open state (see FIG. 77) that allows passage of the ball through an opening in the middle of the storage channel 1231 (opening leading to the through hole 10233).

The movable member 10181 is kept out of contact with the bulging portion 10232 when the ball is not on it. As a result, friction between the movable member 10181 and the bulging portion 10232 can be avoided, and movement resistance can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the closed state, the movable member 10181 is supported by the contact between the upper surface of the bulging portion 10232 and the left and right ends thereof. This prevents the movable member 10181 from sagging excessively even when the ball rides on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 when the movable member 10181 is closed. can smooth out the flow of

The movable member 10181 has an upper surface, which is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left, and which functions as a rolling surface on which the ball rolls in the closed state. It mainly includes an inclined lower surface 10181b formed at the left end portion and inclined downward toward the right.

The inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state before a ball is placed thereon, and in a state in which the movable member 10181 is not in contact with the bulging portion 10232 vertically (a state in which the movable member 10181 is floating), the right end portion is adjacent to the reservoir. It is arranged slightly below the lower bottom surface of the channel 1231 . As a result, the load (resistance) that the ball receives when it moves from the storage channel 1231 to the inclined upper surface 10181a can be reduced.

In addition, the inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state after the ball has landed on it, and in a state in which the movable member 10181 abuts on the bulging portion 10232 at the top and bottom (a state in which the movable member 10181 is sunk), the left end of the inclined upper surface 10181a It has a shape that coincides with the lower bottom surface of the channel 1231 . As a result, the load (resistance) that the ball receives when it moves from the inclined upper surface 10181a to the storage channel 1231 can be reduced.

In addition, the shape of the inclined upper surface 10181a described above is less inclined than the shape of the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231, and is not the same shape. However, since the difference is slight, in this embodiment, as in the above embodiment, the time required for one ball to be discharged from the storage channel 1231 in the closed state of the movable member 10181 is 0.2. seconds.

The inclined lower surface 10181b makes it easy for the ball to ride on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 before the movable member 10181 reaches the open state, and even if the movable member 10181 is about to fall forward, it can easily ride on the bulging portion 10232. is an inclined surface provided in the As a result, the movement of the tip of the movable member 10181 is restricted by the inner surface of the vertical hole 10233b, and it is possible to prevent the problem of being stopped in that state, thereby maintaining the flow of the balls in the storage channel 1231 smoothly. be able to.

When the intermediate discharge device 10180 is in an open state (see FIG. 77), the balls on the upstream side, including the third ball counted from the downstream end, flow down the vertical hole 10233b and the load from the inclined surface 10233c. The ball is received and sent to the back side, and is sent to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the discharge port 10112.

In this embodiment, the discharge port 10112 is provided with a detection sensor 10112a for detecting passage of balls, and is configured to be able to determine the number of balls that have passed through the discharge port 10112. FIG. Then, the ball that enters the first specific winning hole 1000a is detected by the detection sensor 10112a or the detection means that detects the ball discharged from the discharge hole 1150 (for example, the specific area detection sensor 4860, the non-specific area detection sensor 4870, FIG. 51 ), the passage is detected, and control is executed to determine whether the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls match.

According to this embodiment, due to the operation mode of the intermediate discharge device 10180 in the round game R, when the specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) enters the first specific winning hole 1000a, the storage channel It is possible to switch between the case where the reservoir 1231 is full and the state where the storage channel 1231 is not full. This will be described with reference to FIG. In the description of FIG. 78, for ease of understanding, it is assumed that the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state.

FIGS. 78(a) to 78(d) are diagrams showing an example of changes in the state of the first specific winning opening 1000a and changes in the state of the movable member 10181 over time in the round game R. FIG. In FIG. 78(a), the first specific winning opening 1000a is in an open state (also indicated as "open" in the figure. The closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is also indicated as "closed" in the drawing. The change over time when the movable member 10181 is maintained in the closed state (also shown in the drawings as “closed”; the same applies in the following drawings) over a period of time is shown in the drawings. In 78(b), the movable member 10181 is maintained in an open state (also indicated as "open" in the figure, the same applies in subsequent figures) over the period in which the first specific winning hole 1000a is in the open state. The timing changes for each case are illustrated.

In addition, in FIG. 78(c), the movable member 10181 changes to the open state after the lapse of the first predetermined time (1 second in this embodiment) after the first specific winning port 1000a starts to change to the open state, and then the first 2 After a predetermined period of time (three seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, the movable member 10181 changes to the closed state, and the timing change when the state is maintained is shown in FIG. The movable member 10181 changes to the open state after the reference time T11s (approximately 15 seconds in this embodiment) has passed since the state change started, and the movable member 10181 closes after the second predetermined time (2 seconds in this embodiment). Timing changes when changing states and remaining as they are are illustrated respectively.

In this way, the driving of the movable member 10181 (the driving of the solenoid 10182) is linked (associated) with a combination of what round the round game R to be executed is and what the jackpot type is. It is made feasible in a variety of drive modes.

For example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(a), the movable member 10181 is always closed during the round game R, so the ball entered into the storage channel 1231 is discharged as in the above embodiments. It is discharged from outlet 1150 . That is, since the ball is not discharged from the middle position of the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is closed by the specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) entering the first specific winning hole 1000a. become full. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult (to make it impossible) to generate excess prizes exceeding the specified number (in this embodiment, 10) of the round game R.

Further, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(b), the movable member 10181 is always in an open state during the round game R, so the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is different from the above embodiments. , drops into the through-hole 10233 and is discharged from the discharge port 10112 before reaching the discharge port 1150 . That is, even if a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls enters the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, the storage channel 1231 does not become full. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to generate excess winnings exceeding the prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) of the round game R (can be made possible).

In addition, in FIG. 78(b), the movable member 10181 changes to an open state, the ball including the ball that passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a last (immediately before the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released) can be dropped toward the through hole 10233. Therefore, it is possible to configure such that the ball that has passed through the first specific prize winning port 1000a does not flow down to the discharge port 1150 at all.

Further, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(c), 1.0 seconds after the start of the round game R, the movable member 10181 changes from the closed state to the open state, and 3.0 seconds after that, the movable member 10181 Since it is controlled to change from the open state to the closed state, if the ball can be dropped toward the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds elapse from the start of the round game R, the specified number (10 in this embodiment) ) enters the first specific winning hole 1000a, the storage channel 1231 does not become full. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to generate excess winnings exceeding the prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) of the round game R (can be made possible).

In order to arrange the ball above the through-hole 10233 before 4 seconds have passed since the start of the round game R, it takes about 2.5 seconds from the start of the round game R, considering the time for the ball to flow down the storage channel 1231. The ball must pass through the first specific prize winning opening 1000a before the second elapses.

This time of about 2.5 seconds is the time (minimum time, about 4 seconds). Therefore, if the ball is shot from the start of the round game R, it will not be in time.

Therefore, in order to prevent the storage channel 1231 from becoming full, it is necessary to continue to shoot the ball during the inter-round interval before the round game R. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the shooting of the ball is stopped during the interval between rounds.

In addition, an effect by a display device or the like is configured so that the player cannot grasp information such as in what round of the round game R the driving mode shown in FIG. Thus, regardless of whether or not the round game R is driven in the driving mode shown in FIG. can be done.

Further, for example, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78(d), when the reference time T11s (15 seconds in this embodiment) elapses from the start of the round game R, the movable member 10181 is opened, and 2.0 seconds have passed since then. Later, the movable member 10181 is controlled to change state to the closed state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the control of the movable member 10181 is effectively executed while the round game R continues, but when the round game R ends, the control is skipped and the movable member 10181 is forced to the closed state. automatically switched.

In the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(d), for example, when the first end time T11a (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, the specified number (in this embodiment, 10 ) when the ball passes through the first specific winning port 1000a, since the round game R is completed before the movable member 10181 is in an open state, all the balls that have passed through the first specific winning port 1000a are in the storage channel 1231, and the storage channel 1231 becomes full. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult (to make it impossible) to generate excess prizes exceeding the specified number (in this embodiment, 10) of the round game R.

On the other hand, for example, when the second end time T11b (for example, 20 seconds) longer than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, the specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) is the first specific winning When passing through the opening 1000a, the movable member 10181 is opened before the round game R ends, the ball falls toward the through hole 10233, and is discharged from the discharge port 10112, so the storage channel 1231 is full. Don't become a tan. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to generate excess winnings exceeding the prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) of the round game R (can be made possible).

Therefore, according to the drive mode of FIG. 78 (d), the time required for the round game R is less than the reference time T11s or the reference time T11s or more, the specified number of the round game R (10 pieces in this embodiment) It is possible to switch whether or not an excess winning exceeding the winning amount occurs.

In the case of this drive mode, it is preferable to execute the round game R over a long period of time if the payout number of prize balls in the round game R is emphasized. That is, it is preferable to intermittently stop the shooting of the balls so that the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls do not enter the first specific winning hole 1000a early. Therefore, there is a possibility that a game mode in which the shooting of balls is stopped at intervals between rounds will be promoted.

On the other hand, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78(c), as described above, it is possible to aim for excessive winning by continuously shooting balls at intervals between rounds.

In this way, by distributing the driving modes in which the preferred ball shooting modes are opposite to each other in the round game R of the jackpot game (even in the same round, the driving mode is controlled to be different depending on the jackpot type), Compared to the case where the jackpot game should always be executed in the same shooting mode (the player obtains the same profit), the player's concentration on the jackpot game can be improved.

According to this embodiment, when the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state and the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 is controlled by the operation mode of the movable member 10181. can be changed. That is, it is possible to switch between the case where the storage channel 1231 is filled with ten balls and the case where the storage channel 1231 is not filled with ten balls.

In addition, when the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, there are seven storage channels 1231 (nine when two spheres are already arranged downstream of the interference member 6930, see FIG. 75). ) and the case where the storage channel 1231 does not become full even when seven (or nine) balls are hit can be switched.

Although the case where the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state corresponding to the opening of the movable member 10181, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing (jumping over) the through hole 10233 in the left-right direction with momentum. can be prevented.

It should be noted that the driving mode of the movable member 10181 is not limited to the one described above. For example, it may be configured to be driven by operating the operation button 300 .

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

By opening the movable member 10181 , the ball can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 . As a result, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be changed independently of the state of the first specific winning hole 1000a.

That is, while the first specific winning opening 1000a is maintained in an open state, the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is the same as the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231; A case can be configured in which the number of spheres is different from the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 . As a result, the possibility of excessive winning to the first specific winning opening 1000a can be changed depending on the driving mode of the movable member 10181. FIG.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85. FIG. 79 is a front view of the first variable winning device 11000 in the eleventh embodiment, FIG. 80 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 11000 taken along line LXXX-LXXX in FIG. 79, and FIG. 112 is a rear perspective view of the installation front plate 11200. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, in the first variable prize winning device 11000 of the present embodiment, the shape of the opening/closing plate 11300 is changed, the formation of the upstream portion of the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted, and the main body member 11100 It has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 3000 of the third embodiment except that 2 additional winning ports 11183 and the like are added. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the above-described embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The body member 11100, in addition to the configuration already described in each of the above embodiments, has a thin plate member 11110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, separated by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the ball. A pair of left and right protruding ribs 11111 projecting toward the front side of the thin plate member 1110, a guide hole 11112 formed as a horizontally elongated hole for guiding the movement of opening/closing means 11190 described later, and the guide hole 11112 extending to the left. a guide recess 11113 configured as a bottomed recess formed by

Further, the main body member 11100 mainly includes a second additional winning port 11183 through which a ball can pass, and an opening/closing means 11190 that changes the winning probability of the ball entering the second additional winning port 11183 . Details of the opening/closing means 11190 will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the drop retardation plate 3250 formed on the covering front plate 11200 is maintained only on the right side of the cut surface SP12 formed at a position away from the side wall portion 1220 by more than the diameter of the sphere on the upstream side, A left portion of the cutting plane SP12 is omitted.

The position of this cut plane SP12 is set as a position where the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 1237 and reaches the drop retardation plate 3250 does not reach by itself. That is, the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 1237 and reaches the drop retardation plate 3250 flows down along the slope of the drop retardation plate 3250 (in the direction approaching the detection sensor 1240) to the lower right unless an external force is applied. do.

On the other hand, when a load is applied to the ball and the ball is thrown to the left of the cut surface SP12, the ball will drop toward the second additional winning hole 11183 with a high probability. This falling ball enters the second additional winning hole 11183 after passing through the opening/closing means 11190 newly described in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the second additional prize winning opening 11183 is configured as a winning opening from which three prize balls are paid out by detecting passage of the balls.

The opening/closing plate 11300 has an inclined surface 11340 that remains after the left half part thereof is scraped off in a shape inclined so as to approach the left shaft part 1320 as it goes from the rotating tip side toward the rotating shaft side.

The inclined surface 11340 is positioned so that the end on the tip side of the rotation is to the right of the cutting surface SP12 and the lateral velocity becomes 0 after landing on the drop delay plate 3250 (final arrival position FP12, FIG. 82(a)) is positioned to the right of the center of the sphere that reaches it.

Therefore, when the ball is at the position where the left-right velocity is 0 (final reaching position FP12, see FIG. 82(a)), when the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state, the inclined surface 11340 , a load is applied to the sphere. This will be described with reference to FIG.

82(a) to 82(c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 11000. FIG. 82(a) to 82(c) show changes in the state of the first variable prize winning device 11000 in time series. The final arrival position FP12 of the ball that rolls on the surface 1237 and lands on the fall delay plate 3250 is illustrated by an imaginary line. The state after the change is shown, and FIG. 82(c) shows how the ball falls from the state shown in FIG. 82(b).

As shown in FIG. 82(b), the ball placed at the final reach position FP12 comes into contact with the inclined surface 11340 as the opening/closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, and is given a leftward load. A leftward loaded ball is pushed to the left of the cut surface SP12, spills from the drop delay plate 3250, and enters the second additional winning hole 11183.

On the other hand, when the ball does not reach the final reaching position FP12 (for example, when it flows slightly down from the final reaching position FP12 and is placed at the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 82(a)), the opening/closing plate 11300 opens. Even if the state changes, the inclined surface 11340 does not come into contact with the sphere, and the sphere has a rightward component because the rotation direction of the opening/closing plate 11300 (since the rotation axis is inclined to the lower right with respect to the horizontal) direction) and is pushed toward the detection sensor 1240 side. Therefore, in this case, the ball will not enter the second additional winning hole 11183 .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, at the timing when the opening/closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, the position of the ball on the front side of the opening/closing plate 11300 determines whether the ball moves toward the detection sensor 1240. , and the second additional winning port 11183 can be switched.

The ball passing through the second additional winning hole 11183 is paid out by the ball passing through the second additional winning hole 11183 because, for the player, the winning ball exceeds the prize balls scheduled in the jackpot game. The more is, the more profit the player can get.

While the opening and closing plate 11300 maintains the closed state (interval period between rounds), by continuing to shoot the ball toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, compared to the case of stopping the shooting of the ball, the opening and closing plate Since it is possible to make it easier for the ball to be placed at the final reaching position FP12 at the timing when 11300 changes to the open state, it is possible to promote a game mode in which the ball is continuously shot over the inter-round interval period. can. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game mode in which the player stops shooting balls during the inter-round interval period.

It should be noted that the entry ball to the second additional winning port 11183, since the condition is that the opening and closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, the state in which the opening and closing plate 11300 is driven to the open state (jackpot game or small winning game) In other states, even if the player continues to hit to the right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second additional winning hole 11183 .

As a result, in a situation where the opening/closing plate 11300 does not change to the open state (for example, a situation in which the instruction effect of hitting to the right is not executed), even if the ball is hit to the right, the ball cannot enter the second additional winning hole 11183. It can be configured to make it difficult for the player to obtain the benefits that accompany it. That is, the second additional winning hole 11183 can function as a winning hole that makes it easier for a ball to enter in a situation where the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven (a small winning game or a big winning game).

Next, the opening/closing means 11190 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. FIG. 83 and 84 are rear views of the first variable prize winning device 11000, and FIGS. 85(a) to 85(c) show the arrangement of the projecting rib 11111, the opening/closing means 11190 and the second additional prize winning port 11183. It is a schematic front view of the projecting rib 11111, the opening/closing means 11190 and the second additional winning opening 11183, which are schematically shown. 85(a) to 85(c) show changes in the state of the opening/closing means 11190 over time.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the opening/closing means 11190 is movable means that moves left and right while being guided by the guide hole 11112 in conjunction with the movement of the distal end member 1520, and is supported in a state of being inserted into the guide hole 11112. a main body support portion 11191 extending upward from the back side portion of the main body support portion 11191 and supported by the tip member 1520; An extending portion 11193, a first projecting portion 11194 projecting toward the front from the left end of the extending portion 11193, and a space slightly longer than the diameter of a sphere on the right side of the first projecting portion 11194. and a second projecting portion 11195 projecting in the same shape as the first projecting portion 11194 .

A method of assembling the opening/closing means 11190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in this embodiment, the right end of the guide hole 11112 is vertically enlarged so as to be slightly longer than the transmission portion 11192, and the other portion is slightly longer than the main body support portion 11191. It is formed as a horizontally long hole.

Therefore, after the transmitting portion 11192 protrudes to the back side through this enlarged portion, the opening/closing means 11190 is slid to the left, and then the driving device 1500 is assembled to the main body member 11100, and the transmitting portion 11192 is supported by the tip end member 1520. Thereby, the opening/closing means 11190 can be assembled in a manner interlocking with the distal end member 1520 . In the movable range of the solenoid 1510, the transmission part 11192 does not reach the enlarged portion at the right end of the guide hole 11112 (see FIGS. 83 and 84). can do.

The extension part 11193 is formed with a thickness that can be completely accommodated in the guide recess 11113 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing means 11190 from colliding with the extended portion 11193, and the flow path of the ball changes in the front-rear direction, and the extended portion 11193 may be damaged by the load from the ball. It can be prevented from being damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 85(a) to 85(c), the first projecting portion 11194 and the second projecting portion 11195 are formed as sloped plates that slope downward to the left in a front view. In this embodiment, when the ball on the drop delay plate 3250 flows to the left of the cut surface SP12, it falls between the protruding ribs 11111 and enters the second additional winning hole 11183 by the opening/closing means 11190. You can switch whether or not to This will be explained in detail.

FIG. 85(a) illustrates a state in which the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) and the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end of the movement range (see FIG. 84). In this case, the upper end of the second projecting portion 11195 and the right projecting rib 11111 are arranged on the center line of the second additional winning hole 11183 .

When the ball falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85(a), the ball contacts the second protruding portion 11195 and flows leftward. Therefore, since the ball deviates from the second additional prize winning port 11183 and flows down, the probability of the ball entering the second additional prize winning port 11183 can be reduced.

FIG. 85(b) shows a state in which the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at the intermediate position of the movement range (see FIG. 20(c)). That is, it corresponds to immediately after the opening/closing plate 11300 is closed.

In this case, the upper end of the first projecting portion 11194 is arranged to the left of the vertical line passing through the middle position of the pair of projecting ribs 11111, and the upper end of the second projecting portion 11195 is the second additional winning prize. It is arranged to the right of the center line of the mouth 11183 .

Therefore, when the ball falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. flow to the left. Since the falling ball flows down toward the second additional prize winning port 11183, the probability of entering the second additional prize winning port 11183 can be increased.

FIG. 85(c) shows a state in which the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at the right end position of the movement range (see FIG. 83). Also in this case, the opening/closing plate 11300 is maintained in the closed state as in FIG. 85(b).

In this case, the upper end of the first projecting portion 11194 is arranged to the right of the vertical line passing through the middle position of the pair of projecting ribs 11111 .

Therefore, when the ball falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85(c), the ball contacts the first protruding portion 11194 and flows leftward. Since the falling ball deviates from the second additional prize winning port 11183 and flows down, the probability of entering the second additional prize winning port 11183 can be reduced.

In other words, the opening/closing means 11190 keeps the probability of the ball entering the second additional winning port 11183 low while the opening/closing plate 11300 is maintained in the open state or the closed state, and the second additional winning port is opened during the state change. It is configured to increase the probability that the ball will enter the mouth 11183 .

Thus, in this embodiment, the opening/closing means 11190 interlocks with the state of the opening/closing plate 1300, so that the probability of a ball entering the second additional winning hole 11183 changes. Here, it will be explained that depending on the difference in drive control of the solenoid 1510, there are cases where the ball can be expected to enter the second additional winning hole 11183 and cases where it cannot be expected.

The phenomenon in which the ball flows to the left of the cut surface SP12 of the drop delay plate 3250 occurs when the opening/closing plate 11300 changes to the open state (see FIGS. 82(b) and 82(c)).

Therefore, in a drive pattern (operation pattern with a low probability of entering a ball) in which the solenoid 1510 continues to be driven (excited), when the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 passes through the protruding rib 11111, the tip member 1520 , the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position. Since the magnetization (driving) of the solenoid 1510 is maintained, the state of the opening/closing means 11190 is maintained, so the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 deviates from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down (see FIG. 82). ).

On the other hand, in the drive pattern (operation pattern with a high probability of entering a ball) in which the drive (excitation) is once canceled (the opening/closing plate 11300 is briefly opened) immediately after the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the cut surface SP12 When the ball flowing leftward passes through the protruding rib 11111, the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position. The opening/closing means 11190 moves toward the right end position due to the biasing force of the return spring. As a result, the ball that has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 receives a rightward load from the first protruding portion 11194 and flows down along the second protruding portion 11195. can flow down.

Thus, by providing a variation in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate 11300, at the same timing (for example, the timing at which the inclined surface 11340 contacts the ball at the start of the round game R, see FIG. 82(b)), the cut surface SP12 It is possible to change the probability that the ball that has flowed to the left enters the second additional winning hole 11183 .

In addition, in the operation pattern with a high probability of entering a ball, the timing of releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is not particularly limited. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 due to the load from the opening/closing plate 11300 passes through the protruding rib 11111 and reaches between the first protruding portion 11194 and the second protruding portion 11195. is controlled to release the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 at .

It should be noted that the second additional winning hole 11183 may be configured as a ball entry hole for starting the variation of the special symbol 2 by entering a ball. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 by the balls that have reached the opening and closing plate 11300 during the interval period between rounds, so that after the jackpot game is finished, the normal symbol is in a high probability state (time saving state). In spite of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a phenomenon in which a change accompanying the holding of the special symbol 1 is started and the player is disadvantaged.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Depending on where the ball is placed on the front side of the opening/closing plate 11300 at the timing when the opening/closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, it is determined whether the ball is going to the detection sensor 1240 (enters the ball) or the second additional winning opening 11183. In addition to being able to switch whether to go to (enter the ball) or not, the ball is more likely to flow down to the second additional winning hole 11183 if the ball is continued to be shot during the inter-round interval period. As a result, it is easier to increase the number of prize balls to be paid out by continuing to shoot balls during the inter-round interval period, thus promoting a game mode in which balls are continued to be shot during the inter-round interval period. can be made easier.

The second additional prize winning port 11183 is configured such that it is difficult for a ball to enter while the state of the opening/closing plate 11300 is maintained, even if the ball reaches it. As a result, the second additional winning hole 11183 can function as a winning hole that makes it easier for the ball to enter in a state in which the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven (a small winning game or a big winning game).

While it is difficult for a ball to enter the second additional prize winning port 11183 while the state of the opening/closing means 11190 is maintained, the ball is likely to enter the second additional prize winning port 11183 while the state of the opening/closing means 11190 is changing. In addition to the second additional winning hole 11183, a ball receiving a load from the opening/closing plate 11300 when the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state is the second additional winning hole. It was configured to flow down to 11183. Thus, by providing variations in the operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 11300 after the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven toward the open state (the round game R is started), the probability that the ball enters the second additional winning hole 11183 can be changed.

Next, a first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 140. FIG. 86(a) and 86(b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000 in the first control example. 86(a) and 86(b), the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is visible, and part of the side wall portion 1220 and part of the inclined surface 1237 are drawn in imaginary lines. is illustrated. In addition, FIG. 86(a) shows a schematic diagram showing the shielding state of the first variable winning device 6000, and FIG. to a visible transparent state. Also, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in the above-described embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the first variable winning device 6000 described in this control example has a thin plate member 1210 arranged on the front side of the storage channel 1231, making it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231. (the thin plate member 1210 is configured to have low permeability).

In addition, even if an attempt is made to look into the inside of the storage channel 1231 through the opening of the detection sensor 1240, the storage channel 1231 is formed as a bent channel and the downstream side cannot be visually recognized. It is configured so that it is not possible to grasp the number of balls stored in. In addition, since the arrangement position of the interference device 6900 is downstream of the bent portion, it is configured such that the movable state of the interference device 6900 cannot be visually recognized.

Further, by extending the thin plate member 1210 upstream (left side in FIG. 86(a)) in the opening direction of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 14), the direction of the line of sight when looking through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is limited. and is configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 .

With this configuration, it is difficult to grasp the number of balls stored inside the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900 when the first variable prize winning device 6000 is in the blocked state. can.

In the variable prize winning device 6000 configured as described above, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on when a predetermined condition (for example, the success of the timing effect (operation effect) (see FIG. 88(b)) is established). However, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the covering front plate 1200 is configured with a half mirror so as to switch to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized. Thus, when the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are lit, the player can grasp the number of balls stored inside the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900. FIG.

An optical sensor for detecting light incident from the outside may be arranged behind the covering front plate 1200 . In this case, by utilizing the characteristic of the half mirror that allows the interior to be visually recognized when strong light is irradiated from the outside, it is possible to detect that a fraudulent act of irradiating the covering front plate 1200 with a strong light and visually recognizing the interior has been carried out. , can be determined by the output of the optical sensor. Therefore, by setting an error command in response to a change in the output of the optical sensor and controlling the continuation of the game to make it difficult, it is possible to suppress cheating.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which the covering front plate 1200 is switched to a transparent state by irradiating light (transmissive lamp), but other configurations may be used. For example, a part of the covering front plate 1200 (for example, the thin plate member 1210) or the light emitting means can be moved so that the incident angle of the light emitted to the covering front plate 1200 from the constantly lit light emitting means (LED) is switched. It may be constructed such that the interior can be viewed in a transparent state only when the movable portion is positioned at a predetermined position.

Alternatively, the covering front plate 1200 may be made of a transparent color that allows the inside to be visually recognized, and the surface thereof may be processed (for example, texturing) to diffusely reflect the irradiated light. As a result, while the game is being played on the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the various lamps makes the inside of the first variable winning device 6000 difficult to see, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, various The inside of the variable winning device 6000 may be made visible in the state where the lamp is not lit. As a result, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the clerk can easily inspect the inside of the variable winning device 6000. - 特許庁

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall that shields the first variable winning device 6000 from being irradiated with light emitted from various lamps is provided, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielding state and a non-shielding state. Configuration should be provided. This allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 even while the game is being played.

In addition, by providing a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating light to the first variable prize winning device 6000 and performing light emission control on the light emitting means, the inside of the storage channel 1231 can be made difficult to see. The state (state in which light is applied) and the visible state (state in which light is not applied) may be switched.

Furthermore, by providing a movable member for decoration on the covering front plate 1200 whose inside is visible, and controlling the operation of the movable member, the inside of the storage channel 1231 can be visually confirmed (the movable member for decoration is a state in which the inside of the storage channel 1231 is difficult to see (a state in which the movable member for decoration moves in a position overlapping the storage channel 1231 so as to cover it). You may make it switch.

Further, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 86(a), the covering front plate 1200 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire range of the storage channel 1231, thereby ensuring that the movable state of the interference device 6900 can be visually recognized. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be employed as long as it has the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 in a normal game posture.

For example, only the lower half of the storage channel 1231 (downstream side of the bend) may be made difficult to see, and the visibility of the upper half may be secured (even if the formation of the half mirror in the upper half is omitted). good), or in a similar way of thinking, only the portion of the interference device 6900 that overlaps the interference member 6930 in a front view may be made difficult to see. As a result, a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 can be constructed at low cost.

Further, for example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 may be ensured (formation of a half mirror in the lower half is omitted), while the upper half may be difficult to see. In this case, the lower limit of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped by visually checking the balls remaining in the lower half of the storage channel 1231. It can make it difficult to get an accurate count.

Therefore, when the player temporarily stops shooting balls to reduce the number of useless balls (balls that do not enter the winning hole), it is possible to make it difficult to determine the timing of stopping the shooting. In addition, in the first variable winning device 6000 (see FIG. 53) described in this control example, when the storage channel 1231 is full (10 balls are stored), no more balls can be expected to enter. By stopping the shooting of balls at that timing, it is possible to reduce the number of wasted balls.

On the other hand, in this control example, the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 6000 in the predetermined number of round games R does not necessarily match the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Even if the number of balls entering the variable winning device 6000 is counted, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 cannot be known accurately. Therefore, in order to directly grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231. FIG.

That is, precisely because of the configuration of this control example, it is effective to ensure the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 (omitting the formation of the lower half mirror) while making the upper half difficult to see. It becomes difficult for the player to easily determine the timing to stop shooting the ball. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention and concentration of the player to the shot of the ball in the jackpot game, and prevent the player from playing the game carelessly.

86(a) and 86(b) is characterized in that, in addition to the change in the visual recognition state described above, the operation timing of the interference member 6930 can be controlled by operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). The timing that can be set with is prepared, but the details will be described later.

Next, the screen configuration of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 , a second pattern display device 83 , and a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer circumference of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol). executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Also, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third pattern display device 81, or the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 87 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 87(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 87(b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result of the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 93) to be described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

As shown in FIG. 87(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second.

In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether the combination of the third symbols corresponds to the big win (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Also, when the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this control example) is aligned on the effective line L1, a big winning moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time. Further, when both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 are present, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 .

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. A situation in which no ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 even though the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) is rare. In most cases, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all. to cause.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new ball entrance. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

A third pattern is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with different types of special symbols (either special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) for which the lottery is likely to be executed depending on the game state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed in the current gaming state is executed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display is displayed when a special symbol lottery that is difficult to be drawn in the current gaming state is executed.

Here, the fact that a special symbol lottery, which is difficult to be drawn, has been executed is a matter of great interest to the player. For example, when the lottery of the special symbol 2, which is difficult to be executed in the normal state of the special symbols, is executed and the result of the lottery is a big win, compared with the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big win, the player is more likely to win. There are cases where the expected degree of profit that can be obtained is high. Further, for example, when the lottery of the special symbol 1, which is difficult to be executed in the state of high probability of the special symbol, is executed and the result of the lottery is a big hit, it is compared to the case of the big win in the lottery of the special symbol 2.例文帳に追加, the player may have a lower expectation of profit.

Therefore, in the small area Ds3, by performing a variable display only when a special symbol lottery that is difficult to be selected in the current game state is executed (separately from the variable display in the main display area Dm), the game can be played. It becomes easy to attract the attention of the player, and the player can be drawn into the variable display.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 87(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a total of three main patterns of the third pattern different from the main pattern displayed in the main display area Dm are displayed in the right small area Ds3. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy wearing a headband in this control example) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character performs a specific action. A notice effect is performed by appearing or the like.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 2 is being performed, the number of times of entering the ball is suspended up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is the first. It is displayed by the pattern display device 37 and is also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Specifically, the pattern displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 (first reserved ball number pattern) indicates the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64, and the pattern displayed in the lower half (second Retained ball number pattern) indicates the number of retained balls for the second ball entrance 640 . FIG. 87 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all second reserved symbols are blank).

In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 by numbers, or the areas divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, timing effects (operation effects) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 92. FIG.

This control example is configured to execute an effect related to the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 86) based on the operation of the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). Note that effects related to the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 include, for example, a performance that changes the visibility inside the storage channel 1231, and a discharge mode of the balls stored inside the storage channel 1231. An effect to be changed is exemplified. These effects are configured such that the contents of the effects change depending on the degree of deviation between the predetermined reference operation timing and the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300 .

Here, in this control example, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed as an effect for notifying the timing of operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). Then, according to the timing effect (operation effect), the effect is configured so that the profit that the player can obtain is maximized by executing the operation with good timing. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operation button 300 can be enhanced.

First, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 88(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during the notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and FIGS. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during a timing effect (operation effect); FIG. In addition, in each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation status of the operation means (operation button 300) are used. The display contents of the 3-symbol display device 81 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 88, on the third symbol display device 81, a round number display portion 714 for displaying the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a manner indicating that the round game R of the third round is being performed. In the area Ds2, an acquisition display indicating the number of balls acquired during the big win is executed, and in the small area Ds3, a display of "Aim right" is displayed on the guidance display section for guiding the game method. Then, the winning number display mode 718 for suggesting the number of balls won based on the winning of the balls in the specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is displayed as "15" indicating the number of winning balls in the specific winning opening 1000a. be done. After the winning number display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball into the specific winning opening 1000a, it is displayed moving toward the small area Ds2, and finally displayed in the small area Ds2. Counts as earned display.

In the round number display section 714, the display regarding the section of the game currently being executed (the number of rounds or the interval) is displayed large on the left side, and the display regarding the section of the game to be started after the section of the game currently being executed is displayed on the right side. displayed small.

In addition, four circle marks are displayed side by side below the round number display. The filled circles are switched depending on the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 . That is, when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than 4, the leftmost circle is filled in (see FIG. 88(a), corresponding to the shortage display), and the balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. When the number of spheres to be stored is 4 or more and less than 7, the second circle from the left is filled (corresponding to the middle number display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 7. If the number is less than 9, the second circle from the right is filled (see FIG. 92(a), corresponding to the shortage display), and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is 10. 92(b), corresponding to the full tank display).

In the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying the player that the timing effect (operation effect) will start from the next round and a guide display for notifying the game nature of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. . At the bottom of the screen, an effect area used in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

In this rendering area, a button display mode 715 corresponding to the operation button 300 is displayed. , and below the sub-display area Ds4, there is provided a sub-display area Ds5 that is arranged in the same shape as the sub-display area Ds4 and displays information related to the player's operation.

The secondary display area Ds4, which will be described later in FIG. 88B, is an area in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scrolled and displayed from right to left. By operating the operation button 300 (operation means) at a timing that matches the bar display portion 717, a success effect (see FIG. 88(b), which will be described later) is executed. Further, when the operation means is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display portion 717, a failure effect (see FIG. 89 to be described later) is executed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 88(b), transmission lamps 227ba to 227be light up in connection with execution of the success effect in the round game R of the fourth round (see FIG. 86(b)). In the explanation of this control example, as shown in FIGS. It is composed of a half-mirror so that when 227ba to 227be are lit, it switches to a transmissive state in which the inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, by turning on the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the falling state of the balls flowing down near the interference device 6900 (see FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b)) (the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231) It is possible to make the player grasp the storage mode).

Further, as shown in FIG. 89, in connection with the execution of the failure effect in the round game R of the fourth round, some transmission lamps 227ba among the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are lit. As a result, while the storage mode of the spheres arranged near the interference device 6900 (lower half of the storage channel 1231) cannot be visually recognized, the ball is arranged near the detection sensor 1240 (upper half of the storage channel 1231). The manner in which the balls are stored is configured to be visible.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), while the advance notice effect is being executed, the characters "waiting" are scrolled and displayed in the sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 from right to left.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88(b), the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4. , the characters "good" are displayed as the result display mode 720, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), at the same time when the result display mode 720 is displayed, the characters "Watch out for attackers!" Similarly, the characters "good" are displayed.

In this case, by distributing the characters "good" on the third pattern display device 81, the player can easily notice the display, and the player who notices the display can be attacked by an attacker (the first variable winning device 6000). ) can be made easier to draw attention to. Then, the player can be made aware that the stored balls stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable prize winning device 6000 can be visually recognized, and the player who has noticed it can check the number of stored balls. Appropriate launch ball adjustments can be made accordingly.

The state shown in FIG. 89 is a state in which the operation button 300 is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719c does not match the bar display portion 717 in the timing effect (operation effect), and the result display mode 720 is displayed in the center of the screen as " "bad" is displayed, and the operation of the operation button 300 is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 89, at the same time that the result display mode 720 is displayed, the characters "bad" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds5 as in the result display mode 720. FIG. Note that the text "Watch out for attackers!" is not displayed here.

In this case, by dispersing the characters "bad" on the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily notice the display. In addition, by intentionally not displaying the characters "Pay attention to the attacker!", the player can make the attacker (first variable Since it is possible to suppress the player from paying attention to the winning device 6000), the player's attention to the performance of the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's confidence in the display of the characters "Pay attention to the attacker!"

As described above, when the result display mode 720 is displayed as shown in FIG. 89, some transmission lamps 227ba are lit. On the other hand, in this control example, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the round game R of the fourth round, the operation of the operation button 300 is not performed even after 3 seconds have elapsed after the display pointer 719 has passed the bar display portion 717. If not performed, since it is controlled to keep all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be turned off, in the round game R after that (from the 4th round to the 6th round), the storage channel 1231 It is configured so that it is extremely difficult to see the inside.

FIG. 90(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) in the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round, and FIG. 90(b) to FIG. ) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the timing effect (operation effect). In addition, in each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation status of the operation means (operation button 300) are used. The display contents of the 3-symbol display device 81 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 90, on the third symbol display device 81, the above-described round number display section 714 is displayed at the upper left of the screen in a manner indicating that it is during the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round, In the small area Ds2, an acquisition display indicating the number of balls acquired during the big win is executed, and in the small area Ds3, a display of "Aim right" is displayed on the guidance display section for guiding the game method.

At the center of the screen, an operation instruction display consisting of the characters "Push!" prompting the operation of the operation button 300 is executed. At the bottom of the screen, an effect area used in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

In the sub-display area Ds5 corresponding to the lower part of the effect area, a band display section 716, which is a display mode indicating operation timing, is displayed in the same manner as the bar display section 717. FIG. The band display portion 716 includes a first band portion 716a on the right side of the bar display portion 717, on which the characters "Reassurance" are displayed, and a bar display portion 716a adjacent to the left side of the first band portion 716a. A second band 716b overlapping the upper and lower sides of 717 and displaying the characters "best", and a third band 716c displaying the characters "failure" to the left of the second band 716b. .

As described above, the display pointer 719d is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4 from right to left. In this example of control, depending on the position of the display pointer 719d on the band display portion 716 when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated, the profit obtained by the player is controlled to change.

For example, when the operation button 300 (operating means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the first belt portion 716a, a relief effect (see FIG. 91(a), which will be described later) is executed. In this case, after the end of the jackpot game, there is an advantageous event that it is possible to acquire the privilege of transitioning to the high probability state of the special symbol, while the payout of the prize balls in the round game R of the fifth round is slightly reduced (the specified number (In this control example, 10 balls cannot be entered, so the number of prize balls is reduced), and a disadvantageous event occurs in which the duration of the round game R in the 5th round becomes the maximum time (30 seconds). .

Also, for example, when the operation button 300 (operating means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the second belt portion 716b, the maximum effect (see FIG. 90(b) described later) is executed. In this case, after the end of the jackpot game, an advantageous event occurs in which a privilege to shift to a state of high probability of special symbols can be obtained, and the specified number (10) of balls is placed in the first round game R in the fifth round. A ball can be entered into the specific winning hole 1000a, and the duration of the round game R of the 5th round can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

Further, for example, if the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated while the display pointer 719d is above the third belt portion 716c, or if the operation button 200 (operation means) is not operated, a failure effect is produced. (See FIG. 91(b) described later) is executed. In this case, after the jackpot game is over, a disadvantageous phenomenon occurs that the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol cannot be obtained, while the specified number (10) of balls is placed in the first round game R in the fifth round. A ball can be entered into the specific winning hole 1000a, and an advantageous event occurs in which the duration of the fifth round round game R can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

By operating the operation button 300 (operating means) when the display pointer 719 is on the second belt portion 716b that vertically overlaps the bar display portion 717, the maximum profit can be obtained. And even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) displayed in FIG. 89, the player can operate the operation button 300 (operation means) without a sense of discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90(b), an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the big win will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4. , is displayed in the center of the screen as a result display mode 720, and the fact that the operation button 300 has been operated is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715. be. As a result, the player can visually recognize that the maximum profit can be obtained, and the interest of the player can be improved.

By operating the operation button 300 (operating means) when the display pointer 719 is on the second belt portion 716b that vertically overlaps the bar display portion 717, control is performed so that the maximum profit can be obtained. Even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) (fourth round round game R effect) displayed in FIGS. ), the player can operate the operation button 300 (operating means) without a sense of discomfort.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88(a), since the guidance display reads "Don't let your guard down even after the round ends", the interval between rounds after the round game R of the fourth round (Fig. 90(a)), the player's attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will be disadvantaged by not being able to operate the operation button 300 (operation means) without noticing the display of the timing effect (operation effect) shown in FIG. 90(b). can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91(a), an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the big win will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4. In the center of the screen, as a result display mode 720, the characters (relief effect) of "Reassured! Gain V with a reason!" is displayed. As a result, the player can visually recognize that it is now possible to acquire a profit that can be reassuring, although there are some disadvantages, and the player's interest can be improved.

As described above, the slight disadvantage is that the payout of prize balls in the round game R of the fifth round is slightly reduced (the specified number (10 balls in this control example) cannot be entered. minutes, fewer prize balls), and the continuation time of the fifth round round game R becomes the maximum time (30 seconds).

Next, with reference to FIG. 91(b), an example of the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display area Ds4. , the characters (failure effect) are displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen. It is displayed by letting As a result, the player can be notified that a large amount of disadvantage will occur.

In addition, as described above, the great disadvantage is the disadvantage that it is not possible to acquire the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. Also, in this case, as described above, in the round game R of the 5th round, the specified number (10) of balls can be entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the round game R of the 5th round can be continued. Since the time can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), compared with the case shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to easily advance the transition timing to the next big winning game.

Thus, in this control example, the profit that the player can obtain is based on the operation result of the operation button 300 (operation means) in the timing effect (operation effect) in the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round. Since it changes, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to operate the operation button 300 (operating means).

Next, with reference to Fig.92 (a) and FIG.92(b), the display in the round game R of the 6th round is demonstrated. FIGS. 92(a) and 92(b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the round game R of the sixth round is being executed. In addition, FIG. 92(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display when the jackpot type is "jackpot L" or "jackpot N", and in FIG. 92(b), the jackpot type is "jackpot K", It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display in the case of "jackpot M" or "jackpot k".

In one example of the display in the 6th round round game R shown in FIG. 92 (a), the jackpot type is "jackpot L" or "jackpot N" jackpot, that is, the 6th round jackpot is won. The word "jackpot" is displayed.

In addition, in one example of the display in the 6th round round game R shown in FIG. 92(b), the jackpot type is "jackpot K", "jackpot M" or "jackpot k". is displayed, and the interference device 6900 is executed in an operation pattern (twentieth operation pattern) advantageous to the player in the sixth round of the round game R. is displayed as the excessive winning possibility increase notification mode 721, and along with this, the characters "Striking to the right!"

If the jackpot type is "jackpot K", "jackpot M" or "jackpot k", in the 6th round round game R, the number of balls entered is more than the specified number by continuing the ball launch without stopping. The interference device 6900 is driven so as to increase the possibility of occurrence of (see FIG. 99(a)). Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of receiving more prize balls than the specified number by continuing to shoot the balls according to the display of FIG. 92(b).

In this way, in addition to the aspect of notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol was a big win, the aspect of notifying the operation status of the interference device 6900 during the big win is reported on the display screen in the round game R, It is possible to display display modes suitable for round games R of various patterns. In this control example, by continuing or stopping the shooting of the ball according to this display, the player can easily receive the maximum profit expected for each jackpot type as a profit to be given to the player. controlled by Therefore, the player can easily obtain the maximum profit by shooting the ball according to the display.

In addition, in this control example, the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) is changed based on the operation content of the player who executes the timing effect (operation effect). Operation history (operation) in which the player operates the operation button 300 (operation means) in operation effects executed other than (operation effect) (for example, mini game effect during jackpot game, reach effect during special symbol fluctuation) The timing effect (operation effect) may be changed based on the number of times, operation content, operation result). As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in response to various operation effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, and to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In addition, not limited to the operation result of the operation button 300 (operating means) by the player, for example, the timing effect is based on the time measured by the time measuring means (RTC) or the game period during which the player played the game. It may be configured to switch the presentation mode of (operation presentation).

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 93, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained again. FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 4 will be described, and the description of the same parts will be omitted.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery of the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 100) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 100, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 100 is a model diagram for explaining counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small win) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot pattern). 1st winning type counter C2 used for , stop type counter C3 used for selecting stop type, variation type counter CS1 used for selecting variation pattern, and initial value setting of 1st random number counter C1 A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used.

A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In addition, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 117). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the winning to the first ball entrance 64 and each counter value for the winning to the second ball entrance 640. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage 203b is provided.

In this control example, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each provided with a maximum of four reserved balls, and a total of a maximum of eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a special symbol lottery period, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value changes to the special symbol. It is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and when the game ball wins the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the special symbol 1 is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Various settings and control processing are executed for this purpose. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and various Settings and control processing are executed.

On the other hand, during the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, or during the jackpot game of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, during the period when the lottery of the special symbol is impossible, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second entrance. When winning the ball opening 640, if the number of pending balls for the winning ball opening (starting opening) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired and the winning is performed. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entrance. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning ball entrance is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value etc. is not acquired and prize balls (5 in this control example) Prize balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 319 in this control example), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (319 in this control example). there is In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 319, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 319. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 117).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 94(a)) of the main control device 110, and the first winning random number counter C1 If the value coincides with the value of the random number for the big win defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the special symbol big win.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 94(a)) will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined to be winning in each game state are set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 lottery. Specifically, when the game state is a low probability state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0" in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 lottery, If it is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, when the game state is a high probability state, in the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is within the range of "1 to 4". If the number is within the range of "1 to 4", it is determined to be a big win.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big win is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-319. As described above, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol. 202a (see FIG. 94(a)). Among the total number of random number values of 320, the total number of random number numbers that result in a big win is 1, so the probability of a special symbol becoming a big win is "1/320". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. 202a. In this way, among the total number of random numbers of 320, the total number of random number numbers that become a big hit is 4, so the probability of a special symbol big win is "1/80".

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94(b)). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 94(b).

In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol is different from the symbol on which the ready-to-win is applied. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected, namely, "reach out" (for example, the range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops and "complete loss" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203 as a special It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into one for when the probability of special symbols is high and one for when the probability of special symbols is low. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in the variable probability state of special symbols, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, and "completely out of reach" is likely to be selected, and "out of reach" is narrowed to 90 to 99, making it difficult to select "out of reach". In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. A low-probability table is selected, making it difficult to select "completely out of reach", and the range of random numbers corresponding to the "out of reach" stop type is widened to 80-99. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do.

In this control example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern selection table set by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 117), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d storing random values for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables commonly used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are set, and for each variation pattern selection table is set for each success/failure determination result. It is

In this control example, the second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially adds 1 within the range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this example of control, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol execution area of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is defined in the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 94(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the value of the winning random number defined in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol (second symbol). In this control example, in the second winning random number table 202c, when the probability of the normal design is low (during the normal state of the normal design), there are five random numbers that are the normal design hits, and the range is "5 to 9 ”. Among the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, the total number of random number numbers that will be a win is 5, so the probability of winning a normal pattern when the probability of a normal pattern is low is "1". /48”.

On the other hand, when the probability of normal symbols is high (during the time-saving state of normal symbols), there are 200 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 204". The total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that will be a win is 200. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2". . In this manner, in this control example, the random number value for winning the normal symbol is greatly different between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, so the probability of winning is greatly different. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 in the case of winning the normal pattern are different between when the probability of the normal pattern is low and when the probability is high. . For this reason, the ease of entering the second ball entrance 640 is greatly different between the low probability state of normal symbols and the high probability state of normal symbols, so in the low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, A player can be made to play a game aiming at the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加

In the normal pattern low probability state, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 (see FIG. 2), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 (Fig. 2), the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), and the second ball entrance 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal symbol high probability state, the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed for 1 second on the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 2). If the value of the second winning random number counter C4 executed and acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second As a symbol), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the second ball entrance 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". In addition, in this control example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the normal electric accessary product opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the playability.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (that is, "0 to 239"), and once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107). As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 117).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 93, the description is continued. The RAM 203 stores various counters shown in FIG. 93, the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, etc., a stack area, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 117) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 116) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 115) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95. FIG. FIG. 94(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above-described first winning random number table 202a and second winning random number table 202c, a first winning type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and an opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area. 202e, and an opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f.

First, the details of the first win type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 94(b). FIG. 94(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b. The first per type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94(b)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the first per type counter C2 is determined. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined as a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 per one is selected.

As shown in FIG. 94(b), with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 24" is defined in association with the "jackpot K". This "jackpot K" is a jackpot with 6 rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 25 counter values become ``big hit K'', so when the lottery of the special pattern 1 results in a big win, ``big hit K'' is determined. The proportion is 25% (25/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "jackpot K", and after the jackpot is completed, the state shifts to a high probability state (ST80 times) with 80 times of time reduction. Therefore, the type of jackpot is advantageous in terms of the number of balls (expected number of balls) that the player can obtain from the start of one big win until the game state returns to the normal state.

In addition, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "25 to 49" in association with "jackpot L". This "jackpot L" is a jackpot with 6 rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 25 counter values become ``jackpot L'', so when the lottery of the special pattern 1 results in a jackpot, ``jackpot L'' is determined. The proportion is 25% (25/100).

This "jackpot L" has 6 rounds set as the number of rounds, and the transition to a high probability state (ST80 times) with 80 times of time reduction after the jackpot is completed is the same as the "jackpot K", but as described later, In terms of game efficiency (the number of prize balls to be paid out/the time required for the jackpot game), this jackpot type is disadvantageous compared to the "jackpot K".

In addition, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 74" in association with "jackpot M". This "jackpot M" is a jackpot with 6 rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 25 counter values become ``jackpot M'', so when the lottery of the special pattern 1 results in a jackpot, ``jackpot M'' is determined. The proportion is 25% (25/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "jackpot M", and after the jackpot is finished, the time-saving state of normal symbols is provided 100 times.

In addition, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "75 to 99" in association with "big winning N". This "jackpot N" is a jackpot with 6 rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 25 counter values become ``big hit N'', so when the lottery of the special pattern 1 results in a big hit, ``big hit N'' is determined. The proportion is 25% (25/100).

This "jackpot N" is the same as the "jackpot M" in that 6 rounds are set as the number of rounds, and after the jackpot ends, the time-saving state of the normal pattern is given 100 times, but as described later, " It is disadvantageous in that the maximum number of payouts is small (possibility of over winning (over winning) is low) compared to the jackpot M.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 99" (whole range) in association with "jackpot k". This "jackpot k" is a jackpot with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first win type counter C2, 100 counter values become ``big win k'', so when the special pattern 2 is a big win, the ``jackpot k'' is determined. The percentage is 100%.

This "jackpot k" is set to 6 rounds as the number of rounds, and after the jackpot ends, it is possible to move to a high probability state of 80 times of time reduction (80 times of ST), or to give 100 times of time reduction state of normal patterns. , changes depending on the game mode of the player during the jackpot game. The game mode of the player is not limited in any way, and may be passing the ball through a predetermined ball entrance or operating a predetermined operation means. will be described later.

In other words, the special pattern 1 and the special pattern 2 have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the special pattern 2 is more advantageous in the benefits (ordinary pattern time saving state or high probability state) given after the end of the jackpot. (It becomes easier to shift to a high-probability state).

As described above, in this control example, the game shifts to a high probability state in which the player wins more in the lottery with the special symbol 2 than in the case where the lottery with the special symbol 1 results in a big win. It is configured to make it easier. Therefore, once the renso mode (high probability state of special symbols and short time state of normal symbols) is set, the lottery of special symbols 2 is made by entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 by striking to the right. is likely to be executed and the jackpot game is likely to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with one purpose of shifting to the continuous mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the detailed contents of the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 95(a). FIG. 95(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e. The opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which an operation scenario used for controlling the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 52) is stored for each scenario type. And using the information stored in the interference member motion scenario storage area 202e, the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game.

Specifically, operation scenarios 1 to 6 are defined as scenario types in the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e. Operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario for a maximum of 30 seconds in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is set to “open (open state)” and the interference member 6930 is set to “retreat state”. In operation scenario 1, even before 30 seconds have passed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 balls in this control example), thereby ending the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 and returning to the initial state. It is controlled to return to the state (the state in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state and the interference member is in the retracted state).

Operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario for a maximum of 10 seconds in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is set to be “open (open state)” and the interference member 6930 is set to be “retracted state”. In operation scenario 2, even before 10 seconds have passed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 balls in this control example), and the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends. controlled to return to state.

In operation scenario 3, the opening/closing plate 1300 is set to “open (open state) 0.2 seconds→closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds→open (open state)”, and the interference member 6930 is set to “retracted state”. 1.0 seconds→protruding state 0.1 seconds→retracted state” is set for a maximum 30 seconds operation scenario. In operation scenario 3, even before 30 seconds have passed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 balls in this control example), and the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends. controlled to return to state.

In this operation scenario 3, unlike the above-described operation scenarios 1 and 2, the opening/closing plate 1300 is first opened (open state) and then closed (closed state), so that the storage channel 1231 You can eject the balls left in the , but the details will be described later. Since the closure (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to four balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged (0.2 seconds are required to discharge one ball as described above).

Of the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 , the balls ejected while the closure (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability change determination section 4800 . In this control example, regardless of the jackpot type, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position 2.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the 5th round, and 18.0 seconds after that (the 5th round 20.0 seconds after the start of the game R), the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position.

This "after 2.0 seconds" is after the timing when the third ball counted from the downstream among the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 passes through the distribution operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51). , is a numerical value set as a point in time before the timing at which the fourth ball passes through the distribution operation member 4851 . That is, the fourth ball passes through the discharge port 1150 just before the end of 0.8 seconds during which the opening/closing plate 1300 is kept closed (closed state) (1.5 seconds after the start of the fifth round round game R). 0 seconds elapsed), and the setting that it takes 1.0 seconds to pass through the communication path 4810 from the discharge port 1150 (2.0 seconds elapsed from the start of the fifth round round game R). .

In operation scenario 4, the opening/closing plate 1300 is set to “open (open state) 0.2 seconds→closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds→open (open state)”, and the interference member 6930 is set to “retracted state”. 1.0 seconds → protruded state 24.0 seconds → retracted state” is set for a maximum 30 seconds operation scenario. In operation scenario 4, the operation scenario of opening/closing plate 1300 ends when the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 balls in this control example) even before 30 seconds have passed, and the initial controlled to return to state.

In this operation scenario 4, as in the operation scenario 3 described above, the opening/closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), so that the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged, the details of which will be described later. Since the closure (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to four balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged (0.2 seconds are required to discharge one ball as described above). Among the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, the balls ejected while the closure (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability change determination unit 4800 as described above. be.

"24.0 seconds in the extended state" of this operation scenario 4 is set as a numerical value that allows the extended state to be maintained at least until the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position. That is, in operation scenario 4, as will be described later, until the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, the specified number of balls (10 balls in this control example) cannot pass through the detection sensor 1240. Since the distribution member 4851 is displaced to the closed position before the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, the ball ejected from the ejection port 1150 after the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state is It becomes impossible to flow down to the specific area 4830 .

In operation scenario 5, the opening/closing plate 1300 is set to “open (open state) 3.0 seconds→closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds→open (open state)”, and the interference member 6930 is set to “retracted state”. 0.2 seconds→extended state 0.2 seconds→retracted state 2.6 seconds→extended state 20 seconds→retracted state” is set for a maximum of 30 seconds operation scenario. In operation scenario 5, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 balls in this control example), thereby ending the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 and returning to the initial state. controlled to return to state.

In this operation scenario 5, the open/close plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed), so that one ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 is discharged as described later. In addition, the interference member 6930 regulates the downflow of the balls and limits the number of balls stored inside the storage channel 1231 to eight (see FIG. 53(b), the interference member 6930 (equivalent to a state in which there is one ball downstream of ).

In this case, it is possible to restrict the balls from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the number of balls that have passed through the detection sensor 1240 is less than the specified number (nine in this control example). Since it is possible to allow the ball to pass through the detection sensor 1240 based on the displacement to can. As a result, it is possible to easily generate excessive winning (so-called "over winning").

In action scenario 6, the opening/closing plate 1300 is set as the scenario content to "open (open state) 3.0 seconds -> close (closed state) 0.2 seconds -> open (open state)" as in action scenario 5. In an operation scenario of maximum 30 seconds, in which interference member 6930 is set to "retracted state 0.2 seconds → extended state 2.6 seconds → retracted state 0.2 seconds → extended state 0.2 seconds → retracted state" be. In operation scenario 6, even before 30 seconds have passed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a specified number of balls (10 balls in this control example), thereby ending the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 and returning to the initial state. controlled to return to state.

In this operation scenario 6, the switch plate 1300 is first opened (opened) and then closed (closed). An operating scenario in which no balls are ejected from ejection port 1150 while maintaining closure (closed state). In addition, after 3 seconds have passed since the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state, so the number of balls stored inside the storage channel 1231 is 10 (Fig. 53 ( a) reference), the round game R ends based on the detection of the tenth ball by the detection sensor 1240 . Therefore, in the operation scenario 6, unlike the operation scenario 5, excessive winning cannot be easily generated.

In this way, by classifying and storing the action scenarios based on the difference in the profit that the player can obtain, the profit given to the player by the action of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 currently being executed can be determined. can be easily identified.

In each operation scenario, the opening/closing plate 1300 is forcibly closed (see FIGS. 8 and 9) when a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) enter the first specific winning hole 1000a. (the action scenario ends), but the interference member 6930 is controlled so that the round game R The operation based on the action scenario is continued until the inter-round interval ends after the end of , and at the same time as the inter-round interval ends, the state changes to the retracted state (the action scenario ends).

FIG. 95(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f. This opening/closing plate and interfering member operation scenario table 202f is provided with information indicating which jackpot type and what round of round game R each predetermined scenario type corresponds to.

When the MPU of main controller 110 executes the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930, the information corresponding to the contents defined in the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is transferred to the opening/closing plate and the interference member. The opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are moved by reading from the operation scenario storage area 202e.

This opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is configured so that a corresponding operation scenario can be set based on the combination of the jackpot type and the round game R of which round. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the movement of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 is controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

In addition, in this control example, the case where the interference member 6930 is movably controlled corresponding to the start timing of the round game R of the jackpot game has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the setting order is stored in advance in the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f, and the interference member 6930 is movable in an operation scenario that changes in order each time the operation scenario is completed from when the power is turned on (or at a predetermined operation start timing). may be controlled. As a result, the correspondence between the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 can be broken, so that the player can hardly predict the action of the interference member 6930 .

96(a), 96(b), 97(a), 97(b), 98, 99(a) and 99(b), opening/closing plate corresponding to jackpot type 1300 (first specific winning port 1000a), interference member 6930 and distribution device 4850 (specific region 4830, see FIG. 51) will be described.

96(a), 96(b), 97(a), 97(b), 98, 99(a) and 99(b) show the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a. Also shown as "open", the closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is also shown as "closed", the overhanging state of the interference member 6930 is also shown as "extended", the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is also shown as "retracted", and the specified A state in which a ball can flow into the region 4830 (that is, a state in which the distribution operation member 4851 is arranged in the open position) is also indicated as “open”, and a state in which a ball cannot flow into the specific region 4830 (that is, a distribution operation member 4851 in the closed position) is also indicated as "closed".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 95(b), the operating mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 (first specific winning port 1000a) and the interference member 6930 from the first round round game R to the fourth round round game R is Since it is common regardless of the jackpot type, the period from the end of the fourth round round game R to the end of the jackpot game will be described in detail.

Further, as described above, the driving mode of the distribution operation member 4851 is common regardless of the type of jackpot (see FIG. 96(a)). That is, 2.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round round game R, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position (opened so that the ball can pass through the specific area 4830), and 18.0 seconds later (5 After 20.0 seconds from the start of the round game R of the round eye), the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position (the ball is closed so as not to pass through to the specific area 4830).

FIG. 96(a) is a diagram showing changes over time of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930 and the specific area 4830 in the fifteenth operation pattern. In addition, in this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 96(a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot K (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 96(a), in the fifteenth operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the first interval time between rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds) is interposed, and the fifth round The game R is started, and the fifth round of the round game R is executed in the operation scenario 3 described above (see FIG. 95(b)).

First, according to this operation pattern, all the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged at the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round (0.2 seconds x 10 balls). = 2.0 seconds), the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round of the round game R do not remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the fifth round of the round game. In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, during 1 second after the start of the round game R of the 5th round No balls are discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 .

Therefore, the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the period (0.8 seconds) when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed (the regulation member 1600 is discharged) immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round. Therefore, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position, and an event in which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball is opened to pass through the specific area 4830 does not occur.

On the other hand, since the storage channel 1231 is configured in a shape capable of storing the regulated number of balls (10 in this control example), the fifth round of the round game R is performed by placing 10 balls in the first specific winning opening 1000a. It can be terminated by making one ball enter. Therefore, during the state in which the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 (20.0 seconds), the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fifth round round game R can be discharged, so the first specific By continuing to shoot the ball toward the prize winning opening 1000a, an event occurs in which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after the round game R of the fifth round ends.

That is, in this operation pattern, since the ball is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 4830, it is possible to provide the player with an advantageous privilege (in this control example, the continuation of the high-probability state of the special symbol). In addition, the fifth round of the round game R can be finished in a short time (it can be finished when a specified number (10 in this control example) has been won), so the time efficiency with respect to the number of paid-out prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. can be raised.

Also, since the timing at which the ball passes through the specific region 4830 is after the round game R of the 5th round is completed, it is not known whether the ball passes through the specific region 4830 over the round game R of the 5th round. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 96(b) is a diagram showing changes over time of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930 and the specific area 4830 in the sixteenth operation pattern. In addition, in this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 96(b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot L (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 96(b), in the 16th operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the 4th round, the 5th round is interposed with the inter-round second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds). The game R is started, and the fifth round of the round game R is executed in the operation scenario 3 described above (see FIG. 95(b)).

First, according to this operation pattern, five balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged at the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round (0.2 seconds x 5 = 1.0 seconds), the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round of the round game R may remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the fifth round of the round game R. For example, in the fourth round round game R, when five or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the number of balls obtained by subtracting 5 from the number of stored balls remains in the storage channel.

Here, since progress of the round game R of the 5th round changes with the number of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the 4th round, the cases will be described separately below.

First, when 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the 4th round round game R, the 5th round round game R starts with 5 balls stored in the storage channel 1231. be done.

Here, as described above, in this control example, at the start of the fifth round round game R, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round round game R is started with five balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific area 4830. As a result, it is possible to early give a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, the continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol).

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds × 4 balls = 0.8 seconds), the storage channel One sphere remains at 1231 . Therefore, in the 5th round round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage channel 1231 is 9 (the number less than the specified number (10 in this control example)), so 5 rounds The second round game R does not end until 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operating time T1, has passed, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of paid-out prize balls in the jackpot game decreases.

As a representative example, FIG. 96(b) shows a change in timing when 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round.

Secondly, in the fourth round round game R, when nine balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the fifth round round game R starts with four balls stored in the storage channel 1231. be done.

Here, as described above, in this control example, at the start of the fifth round round game R, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round round game R is started with four balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific area 4830. As a result, it is possible to early give a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, the continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol).

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds × 4 balls = 0.8 seconds), the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 Any balls that were in it are ejected. Therefore, in the round game R of the 5th round, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the round game R of the 5th round is performed with the specified number. The game can be terminated by entering the ball into the first specific winning hole 1000a. Therefore, it is possible to increase the time efficiency with respect to the number of paid-out prize balls in the jackpot game.

Third, in the fourth round round game R, when the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is 0 to 8, 5 is added to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231. The round game R of the 5th round is started in a state in which the drawn number of balls (0 to 3 balls) are stored.

Here, as described above, in this control example, at the start of the fifth round round game R, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific region 4830).

In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, during 1 second after the start of the round game R of the 5th round No balls are discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 .

Therefore, immediately after the 5th round round game R is started, while all the balls (0 to 3) discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass, the distribution operation is performed in a state where the balls cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the fifth round of the round game R is started.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds × 4 balls = 0.8 seconds), the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 Any balls that were in it are ejected. Therefore, in the round game R of the 5th round, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the round game R of the 5th round is performed with the specified number. The game can be terminated by entering the ball into the first specific winning hole 1000a.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the time efficiency with respect to the number of paid-out prize balls in the jackpot game. In addition, if the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 for 1 second or more after the end of the round game R of the 5th round (19 seconds have passed since the start of the round game R of the 5th round If a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) are entered into the first specific winning port 1000a before, the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 will pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, as the ball passes through the specific area 4830, a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, the continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) is given. be able to.

Summarizing the above-described first to third cases, when the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round round game R is ten, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is early. On the other hand, the time efficiency with respect to the number of prize balls paid out in the round game R of the 5th round decreases (first case), and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the 4th round is 9. In the case of , the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 can be caused early, and the time efficiency for the number of prize balls paid out in the 5th round game is increased (second case), and the 4th round When the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R is 0 to 8, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is after the end of the round game R of the 5th round. The time efficiency with respect to the number of paid-out prize balls in the round game is increased (third case).

Therefore, in the case of controlling with the same operation pattern, the timing at which the player can obtain a profit and the magnitude of the profit to be obtained can be changed for each game mode of the jackpot game.

In this control example, as described above, in the fourth round of the round game R, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is set to nine, thereby maximizing the profit that the player can obtain. . Therefore, at least when the jackpot type is the jackpot L, information regarding the standard number of coins to be stored in the storage channel 1231 is displayed (see FIG. 88(b)). As a result, attention to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved, and the player's line of sight can be guided.

FIG. 97(a) is a diagram showing changes over time of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930 and the specific area 4830 in the seventeenth operation pattern. In addition, in this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 97(a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot M (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 97(a), in the 17th operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the 4th round, the 5th round is interposed with the 4th inter-round interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds). The game R is started, and the fifth round of the round game R is executed in the operation scenario 4 described above (see FIG. 95(b)).

First, according to this operation pattern, the upper limit of 9 balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is discharged at the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the 5th round (0.2 seconds × 9 pieces = 1.8 seconds), the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the 4th round can remain in the storage channel 1231 with an upper limit of 1 until after the start of the round game of the 5th round. have a nature. In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, the ball is newly inserted into the storage channel 1231 in the fifth round round game R. The entered ball is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 during one second after the start of the round game R of the fifth round.

Therefore, immediately after the start of the fifth round round game R, the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed (the regulation member 1600 is discharged) during the period (0.8 seconds), the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 , the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position, and the event of passing through the specific area 4830 does not occur immediately after the ball is opened to pass through the specific area 4830 .

In addition, from 1.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the fifth round until 25.0 seconds have passed, the interference member 6930 is in an overhanging state to regulate the flow of the ball (see FIG. 86 (a)), the storage channel 1231 is in a state in which the restricted number of balls (10 in this control example) cannot be stored (up to 9 balls can be stored, substantially downstream of the interference member 6930). Since the spheres are not stored, they are maintained in a state where a maximum of seven can be stored. Therefore, the round game R of the fifth round cannot be finished until 25.0 seconds have passed since the start of the round game R of the fifth round, and then ten balls are entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a. Or, when a predetermined time (in this control example, 30.0 seconds) elapses, the fifth round of the round game R ends.

Therefore, during the state in which the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 (until 20.0 seconds have passed since the start of the 5th round round game R), the 5th round round game R is stored in the storage channel 1231 You cannot eject the ball that has been dropped. Therefore, even if the ball continues to be shot toward the first specific winning hole 1000a, the event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 does not occur after the round game R of the fifth round ends.

That is, in this operation pattern, since the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830, it is possible to give an advantageous benefit to the player (in this control example, the continuation of the high-probability state of the special symbol). In addition to this, the round game R of the 5th round becomes longer, so the time efficiency for the number of paid-out prize balls in the jackpot game cannot be increased (can be reduced).

FIG. 97(b) is a diagram showing changes over time of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930 and the specific area 4830 in the eighteenth operation pattern. In addition, in this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 97(b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot N (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 97(b), in the eighteenth operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the first interval time between rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds) is interposed, and the fifth round The game R is started, and the fifth round of the round game R is executed in the operation scenario 4 described above (see FIG. 95(b)).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the 18th actuation pattern is similar to the 17th actuation pattern except that the length of the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round is different. Since it is the same as the pattern, the description of the parts common to the above description will be omitted.

The difference between the 18th operation pattern and the 17th operation pattern is whether or not there is a ball remaining without being ejected from the storage channel 1231 in the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round.

That is, in the seventeenth operation pattern, as described above, the interval between rounds is set to the fourth interval time between rounds Int4 (1.8 seconds), so the maximum number of ejections is nine, and the number of balls stored is 1231. If 10 are stored, there will be 1 remaining ball.

On the other hand, in the eighteenth operation pattern, the interval between rounds is the first interval time between rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds), so the maximum number of discharges is 10, and the number of balls stored 1231 is 10 (maximum Number of balls) Even if they are stored, they can be discharged globally, and no residual balls will occur.

In this case, in the 17th operation pattern, since there is a ball (remaining ball) discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, it is specified immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round. While it is possible to make the player think that the ball may pass through the area 4830 (expected normal jackpot), in the eighteenth operation pattern, immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, Since there are no ejected balls (remaining balls), the player can grasp that there is no possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round (normal jackpot with no expectations).

Therefore, the player's expectation can be changed depending on the presence or absence of the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231, while the profit obtained by the player is substantially the same.

Also, as described above, the 16th operation pattern (Fig. 96(b)) can be grasped by the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231, the player's attention to the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing chronological changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930 and the specific area 4830 in the nineteenth operation pattern. In addition, in this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 98 is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot k (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 98, in the 19th operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the 4th round, the round game R of the 5th round intervenes the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds. The fifth round of the round game R, which is started, is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95(b)).

First, according to this operation pattern, how many balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged in the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round changes depending on the operation of the player.

That is, immediately after it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) according to the above-described timing effect (operation effect, see FIGS. 90 and 91), the interference member 6930 changes to the overhanging state, Since discharge of the ball after that is restricted, the ball arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 remains in the storage channel 1231 . It should be noted that the operation of the operation button 300 is controlled so that only the timing at which it is first pressed in the interval between rounds is determined to be valid, and subsequent pressings are invalidated, the details of which will be described later.

Here, since the progress of the round game R of the fifth round changes depending on the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, attention to the timing effect (operation effect) and the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved. Each case will be described below.

First, the case where there are many spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 (5 or more) will be described. That is, in the state where five or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the fifth round round game R is started. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is early (see FIG. 91(a)).

Here, as described above, in this control example, at the start of the fifth round round game R, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round round game R is started with five or more balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific area 4830. Since it passes through, it is possible to give an advantageous benefit to the player (in this control example, the continuation of the high-probability state of the special symbol) at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds × 4 balls = 0.8 seconds), the storage channel One or more spheres remain at 1231 . Therefore, in the fifth round round game R, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage channel 1231 is 9 or less (the number of balls less than the prescribed number (10 in this control example)). The round game R of the second round does not end until 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operating time T1, has passed, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of paid-out prize balls in the jackpot game is lowered.

That is, in the first case, there is an advantageous event that the privilege of shifting to a high probability state of special symbols can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, while the payout of prize balls in the round game R of the fifth round is slightly less. (The number of prize balls is reduced because the specified number (10 balls in this control example) cannot be entered), and the duration of the round game R in the 5th round is the maximum time (30 seconds). events occur.

Second, a case where four balls remain in the storage channel 1231 will be described. That is, it is the case where the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 . This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is good (see FIG. 90(b)).

Here, as described above, in this control example, at the start of the fifth round round game R, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific region 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round round game R is started with four balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific area 4830. As a result, it is possible to early give a privilege advantageous to the player (in this control example, the continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol).

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds × 4 balls = 0.8 seconds), the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 Any balls that were in it are ejected. Therefore, in the round game R of the 5th round, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the round game R of the 5th round is performed with the specified number. The game can be terminated by entering the ball into the first specific winning hole 1000a.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the time efficiency with respect to the number of paid-out prize balls in the jackpot game. It should be noted that the specified number of balls entering the first specific winning hole 1000a is limited to 25.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round round game R due to the control mode of the interference member 6930. .

That is, in the second case, an advantageous event occurs in which a privilege of shifting to a high-probability state of special symbols can be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, and the prescribed number (10) in the round game R of the fifth round. The ball can be entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the duration of the fifth round round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds). does not occur.

Thirdly, the case where the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 is small (three or less) will be described. That is, it is the case where the fifth round round game R is started in a state where three or less balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 . This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is late (see FIG. 91(b)).

Here, as described above, in this control example, at the start of the fifth round round game R, among the balls stored in the storage channel 1231, the fourth ball counted from the downstream side is the specific area. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be in the open position at the timing of passing through 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass through the specific region 4830).

In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, during 1 second after the start of the round game R of the 5th round No balls are discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 .

Therefore, immediately after the 5th round round game R is started, while all the balls (0 to 3) discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass, the distribution operation is performed in a state where the balls cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the fifth round of the round game R is started.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds × 4 balls = 0.8 seconds), the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 Although all the balls that had been stuck are discharged, the interference member 6930 maintains the overhanging state from 1.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round round game R to 25.0 seconds. The number of balls (10 in this control example) cannot enter the first specific winning hole 1000a. In addition, when 20.0 seconds have passed since the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the distribution operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51) is driven so that the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830 .

Therefore, it is configured so that the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 does not pass through the specific region 4830 after the round game R of the fifth round is completed.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round round game R is 4 (0.2 seconds × 4 balls = 0.8 seconds), the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 Any balls that were in it are ejected. Therefore, in the round game R of the 5th round, the number of balls that can be additionally entered into the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so the round game R of the 5th round is performed with the specified number. It can be ended by entering the ball into the first specific winning hole 1000a (it can be ended without waiting for the elapse of 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operation time T1).

Therefore, it is possible to increase the time efficiency with respect to the number of paid-out prize balls in the jackpot game. It should be noted that the specified number of balls entering the first specific winning hole 1000a is limited to 25.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round round game R due to the control mode of the interference member 6930. .

That is, in the third case, a disadvantageous phenomenon occurs that the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol cannot be obtained after the end of the jackpot game, while the specified number (10) in the round game R of the fifth round. A ball can be made to enter the first specific winning hole 1000a, and an advantageous event occurs in which the duration of the fifth round round game R can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

Summarizing the first to third cases described above, when five or more spheres remain in the storage channel 1231, an event in which the spheres pass through the specific region 4830 can occur early, while five When the time efficiency with respect to the number of paid-out prize balls in the round game decreases (first case) and four balls remain in the storage channel 1231, an event in which the balls pass through the specific area 4830 occurs early. and the time efficiency for the number of paid out prize balls in the fifth round game is increased (second case), and when the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 is 3 or less, the balls pass through the specific area 4830 While no event occurs, the time efficiency with respect to the number of prize balls paid out in the fifth round game increases (third case). Which case is applied changes depending on the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300 .

That is, since the profit obtained by the player can be changed depending on the timing of operating the operation button 300, it is possible to improve the attention to the timing effect (operation effect) and to increase the participation in the timing effect (operation effect). can raise motivation.

FIG. 99(a) is a diagram showing changes over time of the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930 and the specific area 4830 in the twentieth operation pattern. In addition, in this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 99(a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 99(a), in the twentieth operation pattern, the sixth round round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 5 (see FIG. 95(b)).

According to this operation pattern, in the 6th round round game R, the upper limit is the number of balls entering the first specific winning hole 1000a (the number of balls exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example)). It can be made easy to occur with one. Details are described below.

The interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the 6th round is set as the first interval time between rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds). That is, the sixth round round game R is started in a state in which the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is zero.

Immediately after the start of the round game R of the 6th round, the interference member 6930 is put in an overhanging state, but immediately returns to a retracted state (see FIG. 95(a)). Therefore, from the start of the round game R of the 6th round, the ball that first entered the first specific prize winning port 1000a before the elapse of 1.0 seconds is allowed to flow down without being restricted by the interference member 6930. It takes 0.0 second to reach the lowest end of the storage channel 1231 (the front side of the regulation member 1600, the position where it contacts the regulation member 1600).

This ball that entered first is ejected when the first specific prize winning opening 1000a is closed (ejection opening 1150 (see FIG. 14) is opened) 3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the 6th round. . Here, since the period during which the first specific prize winning port 1000a is closed is 0.2 seconds, the maximum number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is limited to one.

3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the 6th round, the interference member 6930 changes to the overhanging state at the same time as the outlet 1150 starts opening. Therefore, from this point onwards, the sphere arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930 .

The internal shape of the storage channel 1231 is formed such that when the interference member 6930 protrudes, a maximum of two balls can be stored on the downstream side of the interference member 6930, and a maximum of seven balls can be stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 (Fig. 86(b)).

After 3.0 seconds have passed since the start of the round game R of the sixth round, the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930, so it stays on the upstream side of the interference member 6930. It will be.

On the other hand, as described above, when one ball arranged at the lowest end is discharged from the storage channel 1231, as a result, the ball arranged downstream of the interference member 6930 inside the storage channel 1231 is 1 or less. Therefore, the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is eight. The total number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 9, which is less than the specified number (10 in this control example). can not be entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the round game R of the 6th round cannot be ended.

During this time, the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 86(b)), so the player can continue hitting right according to the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 92(b)). , a plurality of balls can be aligned on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 (so-called "grapes" can be generated).

When the interference member 6930 changes from the protruded state to the retracted state, the sphere whose flow is restricted inside the storage channel 1231 flows down along the slope of the opening/closing plate 1300 so as to follow the flow down later. (flowing down like an avalanche). As the balls flow down and a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) enter the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, the opening/closing plate 1300 starts to operate toward the closed state, but corresponds to the number of discharged balls. As a result, a gap corresponding to one ball is generated in the storage channel 1231, so the momentum of the ball flowing into the storage channel 1231 is maintained even after the opening/closing plate 1300 starts operating.

Therefore, before the opening and closing plate 1300 closes the first specific prize winning port 1000a, there is a possibility that the ball with momentum enters the first specific prize winning port 1000a. Winning can be generated.

In addition, when 3.0 seconds have passed since the start of the round game R of the sixth round, if the ball is not placed at the bottom end of the storage channel 1231, the downstream of the interference member 6930 even after 3.0 seconds have passed. does not change the number of balls placed in Therefore, in this case, the number of spheres remaining on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 is 0-2. In addition, since the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the above-described gap does not occur inside the storage channel 1231, and the effect of causing excessive winning cannot be achieved. be.

FIG. 99(b) is a diagram showing changes over time of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930 and the specific area 4830 in the twenty-first operation pattern. In addition, in this control example, the timing change shown in FIG. 99(b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot L or N (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 99(b), in the 21st operation pattern, the 6th round round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 6 (see FIG. 95(b)).

According to this operation pattern, in the 6th round round game R, excess balls (balls exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example) are entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a). can be made difficult. Details are described below.

The interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the 6th round is set as the first interval time between rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds). That is, the sixth round round game R is started in a state in which the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is zero.

Immediately after the start of the round game R of the 6th round, the interference member 6930 is maintained in an overhanging state for 2.6 seconds (see FIG. 95(a)). Therefore, from the start of the round game R of the 6th round, the ball that first enters the first specific winning hole 1000a before 1.0 seconds has passed is restricted by the interference member 6930 from flowing down.

When the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, the spheres that have been restricted from flowing down resume their flowing down, but it takes 0.2 seconds (2.0 seconds which is the time required to flow down the storage channel 1231 / 10 spheres that can be stored). ), the ball only flows down the length of one ball. Therefore, the ball that has restarted to flow is kept at the lowest end of the storage channel 1231 (the front side of the regulation member 1600, the front side of the regulating member 1600, position where it abuts against the regulation member 1600). Therefore, in this operation pattern, the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the timing when 3.0 seconds have passed since the start of the round game R of the sixth round.

3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the 6th round, at the same time as the outlet 1150 starts opening, the interfering member 6930 again changes to the overhanging state, but immediately returns to the retracted state. Therefore, from this point on, the balls arranged upstream of the interference member 6930 are not restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930 , and the balls are sequentially stored in the storage channel 1231 .

When a specified number of balls (10 in this control example) enter the first specific winning opening 1000a (at a timing earlier than the twentieth operation pattern), the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. change to At this time, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is ten, and since the storage channel 1231 is full, any more balls are prevented from entering. Therefore, according to this operation pattern, similarly to the first operation pattern (see FIG. 23(a)), the number of balls entering the first specific winning hole 1000a is the specified number (10 in this control example). ) and cannot cause excess winnings.

Therefore, even if a ball is placed on the upstream side of the opening/closing plate 1300 at the end of the jackpot game R of the 6th round, the ball does not benefit the player. Therefore, in the 6th round of the round game R in the jackpot game whose jackpot type is the jackpot L or N, the third symbol display device 81 displays a display (see FIG. 92(a)) that does not strongly encourage the continuation of the shooting of the ball. executed.

As shown in FIGS. 99(a) and 99(b), the timing at which the first specific winning port 1000a changes from the closed state to the open state based on the start of the round game R of the sixth round, and the interference member 6930 is controlled to be common to the timing of changing from the retracted state to the overhanging state, and when excessive winning is likely to occur in the round game R of the 6th round (see FIG. 99(a)), it is unlikely to occur. case (see FIG. 99(b)).

This makes it difficult for the player to discriminate whether the sixth round game R in the current jackpot game is controlled according to the 20th operation pattern or the 21st operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to configure a game mode in which balls suitable for the operation pattern are shot while predicting the operation pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from carelessly completing the jackpot game.

As described above, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are driven and controlled in the twentieth operation pattern, after the first specific winning opening 1000a is briefly opened (opened for 0.2 seconds), No two spheres remain downstream of the interference member 6930 . On the other hand, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are driven and controlled in the 21st pattern, the interference member 6930 is opened after the first specific winning opening 1000a is briefly opened (opened for 0.2 seconds). Two spheres may remain downstream of .

Therefore, by checking how many balls remain downstream of the interference member 6930, the 6th round game R is controlled by the 20th operation pattern or the 21st operation pattern. Since the easiness of determining whether or not is improved, the downstream side of the interference member 6930 is set for a predetermined period (for example, after 23.0 seconds have passed since the 6th round round game R is started, the interference member 6930 is in a retracted state 1 0 seconds before) may be configured to be difficult to visually recognize.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a block diagram showing the structure of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 101, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variable counter 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, output flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, remaining ball counter 203p , a closing flag 203q, a counting start flag 203qa, a closing counter 203r, a V flag 203s, a V winning effect counter 203t, a notification counter 203u, a winning number counter 203w, a discharge number counter 203x, and a memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each of these areas has a first per random number counter. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th reservation area), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas. Each counter value obtained based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 2), the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Areas) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to move winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (waiting number of times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. It is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 111). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 108).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 108, S405 in FIG. 111 reference). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display suspended in the main controller 110 by the suspended ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 suspended ball number counter 203d is changed. You can get the value of the number of balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (see FIG. 102(b)) of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to noise. Even if the number of held balls in the actual variable display held by the main controller 110 deviates due to such influences, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command. .

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command, and notifies the number of reserved balls to the display control device 114 (see FIG. 93) each time the number of reserved balls changes. Send a command for the number of pending pitches for display. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (waiting number of times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times.

The initial value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. It is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 111).

On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 108). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to

The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. See S704 in FIG. 114).

On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding variable display in normal symbols M) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 114).

On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 114: No ).

The probability variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state of the special symbols. That is, when the value of the variable probability counter 203g is a natural number, it is set to the variable probability state of the special symbol, and when the value of the variable probability counter 203g is 0, it is set to the low probability state of the special symbol. In addition, in this control example, since the variable probability state of the special symbol is accompanied by the short time state of the normal symbol, the numerical value of the variable probability counter 203g corresponds to the remaining short period of time (number of fluctuations of the special symbol).

This variable probability counter 203g is set to 80 at the end of the jackpot game when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) in the jackpot game (see S1235 in FIG. 121). That is, in this control example, the number of variations of the special symbols in the probability variation state after the big hit game is limited to 80 times.

Also, the variable probability counter 203g is set to 0 when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the start of the big win is set (see S219 in FIG. 108). In the initialized state (that is, the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 depressed), the probability variation counter 203g is reset to 0, and a normal power cut occurs. In this case, the configuration is such that the state immediately before the power cutoff occurs is backed up.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining time period (variation number of special symbols) in the time saving state (time saving state) of normal symbols. This time saving medium counter 203h is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot game when the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) during the jackpot game (see S1237 in FIG. 121). That is, in this control example, when the variable probability state is not set after the jackpot game, the time saving state is given 100 times.

In addition, although this control example demonstrated the case where a time saving state was provided regardless of big-hit classification, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, all or one of the jackpot types (“jackpot K”, “jackpot L” and “jackpot k”) that allows the ball to flow to the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) by executing the game in an appropriate game mode In part, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game, it may be controlled so as not to provide the time saving state.

In this case, the game was not executed in an appropriate game mode (e.g., the player did not follow the notification of the display device, stopped shooting the ball, or did not operate the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1). ) is excessively large (there is no transition to the variable state of the special symbol that was supposed to shift, and the time saving state is not given), so it is possible to improve the motivation for executing the game in an appropriate game mode. can.

The motion scenario storage area 203i stores the opening/closing plate and interference member motion scenario table 202f (see FIG. 95(b )) This is an area for reading and storing an operation scenario from ). The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 is performed based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

The operation counter 203j is a counter for determining the timing to control the movement of the interference member 6930 in the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128). Various upper limit values are set in the operation counter 203j in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125).

The extension flag 203k is a flag for determining that the interference member 6930 is in the extended state, and if it is on, it indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the extended state (see FIG. 53(b)). , is off, it indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 53(a)).

This output flag 203k is set when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 is detected during the valid period in the retention control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125) (S1403 in FIG. 19: Yes) or when it is time to start the operation. 125 (S1408: Yes in FIG. 125), it is set to ON, and by setting it to ON, the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128) is executed, and the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128) is performed. ) is completed (see S1445 in FIG. 128).

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag that is set to ON in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123) (see S1282 in FIG. 123), and is used to start counting the remaining ball timer 203n, which will be described later.

The remaining balls timer 203n is a timer that is counted to identify the normal range in the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 118). Even if the count value of the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit (value corresponding to one second), the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 (specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the total number of spheres detected by the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51)), the difference between the numbers is It is added to the remaining ball counter 203p.

The remaining ball counter 203p is a counter for detecting the difference between the number of incoming balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharged balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 across rounds. If it is determined that the notification of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0 in the ending process (S1110 of FIG. 121) (S1231 of FIG. 121: No), an error command is set.

The closing flag 203q is a flag for determining the timing at which the first specific winning port 1000a is closed, and is a flag that is set to ON in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123) (see FIG. 123). S1278) is used to start the closing counter 203r, which will be described later. Then, the closing flag 203q is set to OFF when the closing counter 203r reaches or exceeds a predetermined value in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

The count start flag 203qa is set to ON based on the closing flag 203q being set to ON in the fifth round round game R, and is used to start counting of the closing counter 203r. Then, the count start flag 203qa is set based on the closing counter 203r reaching the upper limit (value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in this control example) in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). It is set to off (see S1510 in FIG. 129).

The closing counter 203r starts counting when the closing flag 203q is turned on, and mainly determines whether the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 at a normal timing in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). It is a counter for This closing counter 203r is incremented by one each time the V winning process is executed.

In addition, in this control example, the predetermined value of the closing counter 203r is set as an interval period after the round game R according to various timings. This closing counter 203r is used for determining abnormality of the V winning timing in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

The V-flag 203s is set so that the ball enters the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51 See) is a flag that is set to ON when passing through is detected. This V flag 203s is set to OFF after 80 is set to the value of the variable probability counter in the ending process (see S1110 in FIG. 121) (see S1236 in FIG. 121).

The V winning valid counter 203t is a counter that is decremented by the same number as the closed counter 203r in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). This V winning valid counter 203t is for determining whether the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 has normally passed through the specific area 4830 when the distribution operation member 4851 is arranged at the open position. Accordingly, a numerical value (in this control example, a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds) is set when the closing flag 203q is turned on in the winning process (S1112 in FIG. 123).

The notification counter 203u is a counter that counts the time until the notification command (see S1257 in FIG. 122) is set based on a predetermined timing (see S1253 in FIG. 122) in the notification process (see S1111 in FIG. 122). .

The winning number counter 203w is a counter that counts the number of winning balls in the first specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) in the winning process (see S1112 in FIG. 123).

The ejected number counter 203 x is a counter that counts the number of balls ejected from the ejection port 1150 . The relationship between the winning number counter 203w and the discharged number counter 203x is determined each time the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit in the abnormality processing (see S1113 in FIG. 124).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Returning to FIG. 93, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, and a large opening solenoid ( A solenoid 1510), a solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and a solenoid 6910 for driving an interference member 6930 are connected. Send control signals.

In addition, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and a group of sensors (not shown), a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, and a game An operation button 300 operated by a person is connected, and the MPU 201 is based on various switches 208, signals output from the operation button 300, and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253. to execute various processes.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 115) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 102(a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113, and includes rough variation contents (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the variation pattern command). ) to determine more detailed variations. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

The opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario 222b is provided so that the operation status of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 whose operation is controlled by the main controller 110 can also be grasped on the sound lamp control device 113 side. This is an area in which information stored in an opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e and an opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the control device 110 is stored.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 102(b). FIG. 102(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 has a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223e, and a stop type selection. A flag 223f, a production counter 223g, a round number accumulation counter 223h, a variable probability state flag 223i, a time saving state counter 223j, a storage state flag 223k, a storage upper limit flag 223m, a storage counter 223n, an operation flag 223p, Effect temporary storage area 223r, first operation effect flag 223wa, second operation effect flag 223wb, first input flag 223wc, second input flag 223wd, during effect execution flag 223x, and pressing period information storage area 223y and at least another memory area 223z.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 132) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are variable effects (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of suspended balls (number of standby times) of variable performance suspended in the main controller 110 for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to the reserved ball number of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c corresponds to the second special symbol ( It corresponds to the number of pending balls of variable production based on the lottery of special symbol 2).

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 cannot get the value of Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. , the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is added to the number of pending balls in the variable display, or when the main controller 110 When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e Send the command to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S2210 in FIG. 132). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. , while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, the second special symbol The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball patterns corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. while the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

When the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d receives a command set when the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 is increased or decreased, the value is increased or decreased according to the contents of the received command. It is a counter used to synchronize the number of reserved balls of normal symbols managed by the main controller 110 side and the number of reserved balls of normal symbols managed by the sound lamp control device 113 side. be. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of normal symbol reserved balls. In addition, regarding the detailed contents of the case where the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the case where the above-mentioned special symbol reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 132), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S2702 in FIG. 136). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 131), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 132), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S2707 in FIG. 136). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by adding 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 131) is executed. . The effect counter 223g has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when a pattern of effect is determined by referring to a plurality of counter values in one loop process, different counter values are used. Used. As a result, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used in a plurality of places, so that bias in the set effect pattern can be suppressed. It should be noted that the effect pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing different processing on the value obtained from the same counter. Specifically, among the production patterns, one selection refers to the ones digit of the acquired value, another selection refers to the tens digit of the acquired value, and another selection refers to the one digit of the acquired value. It is also possible to multiply the value obtained by multiplying the digits by 3 by the value obtained by multiplying the tens digits by 5, and refer to the ones digit of the obtained value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress bias in the set effect patterns while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect patterns.

The round number cumulative counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds during the jackpot game, and when a round number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, it is updated to a value corresponding to the command ( S2504 in FIG. 133), and the reception of the jackpot ending command resets the value of the counter to 0 (S2510 in FIG. 133). In the sound lamp control device 113, based on the round number cumulative counter 223h, display commands relating to the display during the jackpot game are set (see S2537, S2546, and S2547 in FIG. 134).

The variable probability state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a variable probability state of special symbols. If this probability variable state flag 223i is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is in a special symbol low probability state. This variable probability state flag 223i is updated according to the content of notification of the state command output from main controller 110. FIG.

In this control example, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the state command is in a mode indicating that the probability variation game is in progress, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is If it is 1 or more, it is in a mode indicating that the time saving game is in progress, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (see S234 or S238 in FIG. 109) is a mode indicating that the game is normally in progress.

Depending on the state of the probability variation state flag 223i, it is determined whether or not the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the probability variable state of the special symbol, or whether to display the right-handed warning image when the right-handed game is executed in the normal state. to determine whether

The time saving state counter 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol time saving state. If this time saving state counter 223j is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal pattern time saving state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is in a normal state (low probability state) with normal patterns. This time-saving state counter 223j is updated according to the content of notification of the state command output from the main controller 110. FIG. Depending on the state of the time saving state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the current state is the time saving state of normal symbols, and the corresponding performance is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the time-saving state of normal symbols, or whether to display the right-handed warning image in the normal state.

The storage state flag 223k is a flag for determining the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 86(a)). settings are made based on the detection result of When this storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that a predetermined number or more of balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, and when it is off, less than the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is stored. indicates that

This storage state flag 223k is turned on when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (four in this control example). (see S2807 in FIG. 137), and is set to OFF when it is determined that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the predetermined number (S2810 in FIG. 137). Here, when the pooled state flag 223k is set to ON, the display during the round game is executed to display the middle number, and when the pooled state flag 223k is set to OFF, the shortage display (Fig. 88 (a)) is executed.

The storage upper limit flag 223m is a flag for determining that the number of balls stored in the storage passage 1231 has reached the upper limit number (10 in this control example), and the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the , and the detection result of the ball ejected from the ejection port 1150 . When the storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the upper limit number of balls is stored in the storage channel 1231, and when it is off, it indicates that the upper limit number of balls is not stored in the storage channel 1231. show.

This storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is the upper limit (see S2814 in FIG. 137). , is set to OFF when it is determined that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the upper limit (S2817 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON, the full tank display (see FIG. 92(b)) is executed, and when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to OFF, dissatisfaction is displayed (Fig. 92(a)) is executed.

The storage counter 223 n is a counter for counting the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 . That is, when the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of the ball, the value of the storage counter 223n is incremented by 1, and when the ball is discharged from the discharge port 1150, the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (or dedicated The value of the storage counter 223n is decremented by 1 upon detection by the ball discharge sensor).

The operation flag 223p is a flag for determining whether or not the operation button 300 has been operated. When this operation flag 223p is on, it indicates that the operation button 300 has been operated, and when it is off, it indicates that the operation button 300 has not been operated. This operation flag 223p is set to ON when an operation command is received in the command determination process (S2218 in FIG. 132: Yes), and is set to OFF in the button input monitoring/effect process (see S3007 in FIG. 139). .

The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the contents of the set effect until the effect is executed. The contents of the timing performance (operation performance) are temporarily stored during the period from the set timing (third round) to the timing (fourth round) of executing the timing performance (operation performance) during the big win. This effect temporary storage area 223r stores the set effect mode, and when the round (4 rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the effect process during the jackpot (see S2505 in FIG. 134) is executed Then, it is read out (S2537 in FIG. 134).

The first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are flags for determining whether or not to execute a timing effect (operation effect) that causes the player to operate the operation means (operation button 300). If it is ON, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing performance (operation performance) is satisfied, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing performance (operation performance) is not satisfied.

In this control example, as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), the second operation effect flag 223wb indicates that the fourth round round game R has started with respect to the first operation effect flag 223wa. On the other hand, it is set that the round game R of the 4th round surface of the jackpot game of the jackpot type k has been started. Effect information read from the effect temporary storage area changes depending on the setting conditions of the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb.

Also, the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to OFF after the effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (see S2539 in FIG. 134).

The first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are flags for limiting the number of operations of the operation button 300 during the corresponding effect (limiting to one in this control example). When the first operation is performed during the period, or the operation period is exceeded, it is set to ON, and subsequent input of the operation button 300 is invalidated. In addition, the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are set to OFF after the fifth round round game R is started and the production execution flag 223x is set to OFF (see S2543 in FIG. 134). ).

The effect running flag 223x is a flag for determining whether a timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not being executed. This effect in-execution flag 223x is referred to when it is determined whether the operation on the operation means (operation button 300) is based on the timing effect (operation effect).

During the production execution flag 223x, the round in which the timing production (operation production) is executed is started (S2532 in FIG. 134: Yes) in the production process during the jackpot (see S2505 in FIG. 134), and the display production round command is issued. After setting, it is set to ON (S2538 in FIG. 134). Then, when the set timing effect (operation effect) is completed, it is set to OFF (S2542 in FIG. 134).

The pressing period information storage area 223y is an area for storing the operation timing of the operation means (operation button 300) set so as to correspond to the display timing of the pointer (effect pointer) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). .

In this pressing period information storage area 223y, a successful pressing period is set corresponding to the set display pointer (effect pointer). The successful pressing period set here is referred to in the button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 139) to determine whether the timing at which the operation button 300 is pressed is within the successful pressing period.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, the top address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the initialization process executed after the boot process by the boot program is completed is set.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 106) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process during the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance are displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 .

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a ``special pattern jackpot'', the ``○'' pattern is displayed for a certain period after stopping the fluctuation production, and if it is ``off the special pattern'', the ``x'' pattern is displayed after the fluctuation production is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on varying image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image resident in the power-on varying image area 235b, and the power-on varying image is alternately displayed on the third pattern display device. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as indicated by 81 . As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 103, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main pattern (third pattern), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. Also, a right-hand navigation image (see FIG. 88(a)) and the like are stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first pattern display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third pattern display device 81 immediately starts the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern imitating the . These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a variable effect is started, if the stop type of the variable effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variable effect is a big hit (jackpot K, etc.) ), the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is a effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state and the first specific prize winning port 1000a that is normally closed will be opened, and the round effect is: This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is a effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state (jackpot state).

As described above, the demonstration effect is the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. , the third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, round effect, ending effect and demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or to display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In this control example, only the back face type is specified as the drawing content of the back face image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third pattern (symbol 1, pattern 2, . . . ) describes pattern type offset information as pattern type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 104) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 106), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 105). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 105).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the case of the display data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 105, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third pattern display device 81 . This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main processing executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 131). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, set to off.

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected. , the simple command determination process and the simple display setting process are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing and display setting processing are executed.

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in transfer setting processing executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing. Since there is resident target image data that does not exist, resident image transfer setting processing is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. normal image transfer setting processing for transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 106), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 106), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 106) describing the content of image rendering instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. During the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer Update processing is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 106), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing of one frame image are completed, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 is performed. Each time it is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU 231. FIG. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 or not. Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set, and the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data. , the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a.

On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the designated drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list.

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the process is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 107 to 129. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 319, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is opened as the ball passes through. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, respectively. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of suspension of variable display in special symbols) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if it is determined that the variation time has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot is K, the jackpot L, the jackpot M, the jackpot N, or the jackpot k.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot is K, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot is L, the red LED is turned on. In addition, when the jackpot is M, N or k, the yellow LED is lit, and when it is a loss, the green LED is lit. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), the operation scenario of the first specific winning port is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). . Incidentally, the operation scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, 1 to 4 rounds, a predetermined period (until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls have won) is set so that the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened, and in rounds 5 and 6, the jackpot type is set. The corresponding pattern (see FIG. 95(b)) indicates that the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be opened. When the process of S218 is completed, the value of the variable probability counter 203g is set to 0 (S219). Next, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the lottery result of this time is out (S216: No), execute the state command setting process for determining whether the time saving state has ended (S222), to the process of S221 Transition.

In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, this processing ends.

Next, the state command setting process (S222) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the state command setting process (S222). This state command setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107). Based on the value of the counter, the game state is determined and the state command is set (S234, S238).

In this state command setting process, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231), and if it is determined that the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203g, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203h during the time saving (S232). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203g is 0 (S233), and if it is determined to be greater than 0 (S233: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S233: Yes), a state command indicating a normal game state is set (S234), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

When it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, it is 0) (S231: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S235), and the time saving medium counter When it is determined that the value of 203h is not 1 or more (that is, it is 0) (S235: No), the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter 203h is 1 or more during time saving (S235: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203h during time saving (S236). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S237), and when it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S237: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S237: Yes), a state command indicating a normal game state is set (S238), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a "special symbol big hit" or "special symbol omission" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 .

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , and each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S302), and if it is 1 or more (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol jackpot is won is acquired from the first winning random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random numbers defined in the first winning random number table 202a. As described above, four random numbers of "1 to 4" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become the winning match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have a common determination value for a big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 Different random values may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of determination values for the big hit, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 , the number of judgment values that result in a big hit may be varied. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player can win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, the value is 0) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (low probability game state ), based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained. (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one "0" is set, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value for the special symbol jackpot. It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes). , sets the display mode at the time of the big win indicating the big win (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table 202b, and five types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k), it is determined what the jackpot type is.

In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k). . In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k) are set as the stop types so as to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

Variation patterns defined in this variation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, variation patterns for loss, such as "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", "chance loss", "loss Various types of normal reach, various types of "missing super reach", and various types of "missing chance reach" are defined. In addition, as variation patterns for common jackpots, various types of "common normal reach", various types of "common super reach", various types of "common chance reach", and various types of "common special reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, either reach out or complete out is set.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. to decide.

After the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and these commands are sent to sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 117). sent. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107) to determine whether or not there is a win to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). , when there is a starting prize, various random number counters are acquired, and processing for holding the value is executed.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407.

On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), special symbol 1 reserved The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is changed. , stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In addition, in the processing of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in each process of S407-S412, the same process as each process of S401-S406 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. FIG. Each of the processes of S407 to S412 is different only in that the process of holding the held ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are the same as those of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, when the processes of S407 to S412 are finished, the prefetch process is executed (S413), and this process is finished.

Next, referring to FIG. 112, the prefetching process (S413) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the starting winning process (see FIG. 111).

In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S501), and either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is If there is no new win (S501: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the time of start of fluctuation is the probability variable state of special symbols. If it is determined (S502), and if it is a probability variable state of special symbols (S502: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the probability variable state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is S505. to move to.

In the processing of S505, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the judgment results of the big hit, are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 113, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107), and is accompanied by the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of normal symbols (S608), and if it is determined that it is in the time saving state of normal symbols (S608: Yes), Based on the value of the winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S609). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 94(c)).

In the process of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, so the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607. And, based on the second winning random number table for low probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 10 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 94(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S609 or S610 is the normal symbol win (S611), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S611: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal pattern (S613), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal pattern (S613: Yes), the electric role associated with the second ball entrance 640 The release period of the object 640a is set to 1 second and the number of times of release is set to 2 (S614), and the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S613, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S613: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and The number of openings is set to 1 (S615), and the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S611, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S611: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S616). In the processing of S616, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S617, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal design (S617), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal design (S617: Yes), the variable display on the second design display device. is set to 1 second (S618), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S617: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 1 second" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 .

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second pattern display device is fluctuating (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the second pattern display device has elapsed ( S622). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the processing of S618 or S619 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623).

In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S616, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set to

When stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S616.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether the result of the normal symbol lottery (this lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Determine (S624).

If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 117) is executed next, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S614 or S615 are completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107) to determine whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variation display in normal symbols M) is obtained. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S704).

Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the free reservation area (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the first area (S705), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . This NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 93) in the same manner. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. to start NMI interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). In this initialization process, for example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S910.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data has been destroyed.

As will be described later in the processing of S1017 in FIG. 117, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S911, S912).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S911, S912) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After completing the process of S912, the process proceeds to S913.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S909), and the process proceeds to S913. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the process of S913, a command (state command) for notifying the game state at the time of power return is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S913). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol probability variation state, whether or not the normal symbol time saving state, the number of times of normal symbol time saving, and the like.

A state command is produced|generated according to the value of counter 203h in time saving, and the value of probability variation counter 203g, and is output with respect to the sound lamp control apparatus 113. FIG. By outputting this status command, the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can recognize the same game status. Therefore, in spite of the low probability state of normal symbols, right-handed navigation (for example, see small area Ds3 in FIG. 88 (a)) is displayed, or conversely, it is a high probability state of normal symbols. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of a right-handed warning image (not shown) when the player hits right. That is, it is possible to match the game state with the effect to be executed.

When the processing of S913 ends, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (S914). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S915), and the main processing described later is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1013 and S1014 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S1001).

Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107) is determined. Send a prize ball command to

In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) and the start winning process (see FIG. 111). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production, 1. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning port 1000a of the variable winning device 6000 is executed (S1004).

In the big win control process, opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 1000a is set according to the operation scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) for each round of the big win state. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S625 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 113), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S614 or S615 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this control example, among the LEDs of the first pattern display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) has ended, the first symbol display device 37 The variation display being executed is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 110). Display (lit display).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 or the process of S619 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit.

Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 113), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. End the current variation display, in the display mode set by the processing of S612 or the processing of S616 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 113), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( display).

After executing the process of S1007, the storage control process is executed (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, but a process for setting retraction and extension of the interference member 6930 is executed. Next, when the process of S1008 ends, the V winning process is executed (S1009). This V winning process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, when the process of S1009 ends, other processes are executed (S1010).

When the processing of S1010 ends, it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011). The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1012). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1012: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1012: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1013, S1014).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (319 and 239 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1014).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1011, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S1011: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 115 is executed, so the power-off process from S1015 onward is executed.

First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt process (S1015), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1016). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1017), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1018), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

The processing of S1011 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1010, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001.

That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117). This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening) 1000a and opening or closing the specific area 4830. FIG.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 118, S1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot will start. In the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1103). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1103: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of winning (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1104). In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1104: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

Here, with reference to FIG. 119, the jackpot operation setting process will be described (S1105). FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 119, S1105), first, the opening action corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set operation scenario (S1201).

The operation of the distribution device 4850 (distribution operation member 4851, solenoid 4852) is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 of the first variable winning device 6000 is set by the data read in the process of S1201 (S1203). After that, this process is terminated and the process returns to the jackpot control process. In the processing of S1202 and S1203, the operation of the distribution device 4850 (distribution operation member 4851, solenoid 4852) and the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 for each round are set.

In this way, each operation of the first variable winning device 6000 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description continues. When the process of S1105 is completed, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1106). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1104, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is time to operate the opening/closing plate 1300 or the sorting device 4850 (S1107). If it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1107: Yes), the opening/closing process is executed (S1108).

Here, the opening/closing process will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (S1108). FIG. 120 is a flow chart showing the contents of this opening/closing process (S1108). In the opening/closing process (FIG. 120, S1108), first, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 or the sorting device 4850 that matches the operation timing based on the operation scenario is executed (S1211), and then the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004). , the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description continues. In the process of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1109). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed after 6 rounds are completed, and the standby time (3.0 seconds or more from the design of the storage channel 1231 and the probability change determination unit 4800), which is the ball throwing time. is required, and in this control example, when 3 seconds have elapsed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1109: Yes), ending processing is executed (S1110). After that, this process ends.

Details of this ending process (S1110) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the content of this ending process (FIG. 121, S1110). In the ending process (FIG. 121, S1110), first, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1231). If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0, a problem such as ball clogging has occurred, or the player has illegally stopped the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 by a strong magnet or the like. Therefore, an error command is set (S1232), and then an ending command is set (S1233).

The error command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 117). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the error command, the audio lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the error notification based on the information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. FIG. Then, an error command corresponding to the selected error notification display mode is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the error command, the error notification is started in the third pattern display device 81 .

In this control example, the third symbol display device 81 is controlled to display the characters "Ejection error. Please call the hall clerk" to notify the player of the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, upon receiving an error command, the sound lamp control device 113 strongly emits red light from the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93) such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 (see FIG. 1), or the sound output device 226 (See FIG. 4) is controlled to output a loud voice (in this control example, the sound of a black telephone bell) so that the hall clerk notices the occurrence of an abnormality.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0, an ending command is set (S1233). The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 117). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. FIG. Then, an ending command for display corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

When the processing of S1233 ends, it is then determined whether the V flag 203s is set to ON (that is, whether the ball has passed through the specific area 4830) (S1234), and is set to ON (that is, the specific area 4830 (S1234: Yes), set the value of the variable probability counter 203g to 80, set the value of the time saving medium counter 203h to 80, and then set the V flag 203s to off (S1236), returns to the jackpot control process (S1004), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1234, when it is determined that the V flag 203s is not set to ON (that is, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830) (S1234: No), the value of the counter 203h during the time saving It is set to 100 (S1237), returns to the jackpot control process (S1004), and ends this process.

Thus, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the V flag 203s is ON, and if it is ON, a numerical value is set to the probability variable counter 203g. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the ball passes through the specific area 4830 and set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player continue to expect the transition to the variable probability game state until the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, if the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game, the probability variable game state is given after the jackpot game, so it is possible to determine whether the ball passes through the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game. You can play games with interest.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description continues. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Details of the notification process (S1111) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the content of this notification process (S1111).

In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot game currently being executed is the jackpot k (S1251), and when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot k (S1251: No) , ends this process and returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot k (S1251: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203u is greater than 0 (S1252). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1252: No), it is determined whether it is time to end the fourth round (S1253). The determination of the end timing of the fourth round is made when it is detected that 10 balls have won in the fourth round, or when it is determined that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is time to end the fourth round (S1253: Yes), the counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the notification counter 203u. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1253, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fourth round (S1253: No), this processing ends. Here, by setting a counter of 0.5 seconds in S1254, the notification counter 203u becomes 0 within 2 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball-scoring time after the end of 4 rounds, and the voice of "press" is heard. is output.

Therefore, the sorting device 4850 operates in the fifth round, but the player has to operate the operation button 300 during the interval time after the end of the fourth round, and the attention is drawn to the operation button 300 and the liquid crystal. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of remaining balls from determining whether or not the ball passes through the specific region 4830 . Therefore, for example, at the start of the fifth round, by performing the above-described control to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the specific region 4830. The player can play the game expecting that the variable probability game state will be given (given) until the end of the big win game (and even after the end of the big win game).

In this embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203u, an effect is performed to draw attention to the liquid crystal over the 5th round from 1.5 seconds before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously from the eyes.

On the other hand, in the process of S1252, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is greater than 0 (S1252: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203u is updated by -1 (S1255). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203u after updating is 0 (S1256). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256: Yes), a notification command is set (S1257). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the sound output of "press".

Returning to FIG. 118, the description continues. When the notification process (FIG. 122, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, with reference to FIG. 123, this winning process (S1112) will be described in detail. FIG. 123 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (S1112).

In the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round valid period (S1271). The round effective period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened to when it changes to the closed state until the interval period ends. If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (S1271: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1271: Yes), it is determined whether the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a has been passed (S1272: Yes), the winning number counter 203w is updated by adding 1 (S1273). After that, the process of S1274 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 is not passed (S1272: No), the process of S1274 is executed.

In the processing of S1274, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274: Yes), it is determined whether the closing flag 203q is ON (S1277), and if it is determined that the closing flag 203q is ON In (S1277: Yes), this process is terminated and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

On the other hand, in the process of S1277, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is off (S1277: No), the closing flag 203q is set to on (S1278), and then the set value of the V winning effect counter 203t ( In this control example, a numerical value range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3−0.2×the number of stored balls) seconds or more) is set (S1279), and then the opening/closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a 1300 closed (change in state of closed state) is set (S1280), then a numerical value (in this control example, a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds) is set in the V prize valid counter 203t (S1281), and then The remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1282). By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203m to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being swept after the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed. After that, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

As described above, the lower limit of the set value of the V winning valid counter 203t fluctuates based on the number of stored balls. As a result, when only three balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 (controlled so that the balls do not pass through the specific region 4830), the spheres do not flow down due to dirt inside the storage channel 1231. Even if the ball passes through the specified area 4830 with a delay, it is possible to invalidate the passing through the specified area 4830 as being out of the range of the set value of the V winning counter 203t.

As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 executes different display effects depending on the number of stored in the storage channel 1231, the degree of expectation indicated by the display effect (the amount of payout of prize balls, the end of the jackpot game, etc.) It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a deviation between the degree of possibility of shifting to a high probability state of special symbols later) and the actual game result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1274 that the value of the winning number counter 203w is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S1275). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1275: Yes), the processing from S1277 to S1282 is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1275: No), it is determined whether it is time to close the opening/closing plate 1300 halfway based on the operation scenario (S1276). Here, if it is determined that it is time to close in the middle (S1276: Yes), the processes from S1277 to S1282 are executed. It ends and returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

Returning to FIG. 118, the description continues. When the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112) is executed, an abnormality process is executed (S1113). After that, this process ends. Here, the details of this abnormality processing (S1113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality process (S1113), a process of monitoring whether or not the specific area 4830 is illegally passed through is executed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 124, S1113), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round effective period (S1301). If it is outside the round valid period (S1301: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round validity period (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the outlet 1150 is determined by whether the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51) detects the passage of the game ball. done.

When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ejection port 1150 (S1302: Yes), the value of the ejection number counter 203x is updated by adding 1 (S1303). After that, the process of S1304 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302: No), the process of S1304 is executed.

In the process of S1304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1304: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1304: Yes), it is during the ball sweeping time period, so the remaining ball timer 203n is updated by adding 1 (S1305). The remaining ball timer 203n determines whether or not the upper limit value (various interval times in this control example) has passed (S1306). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (S1306: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the upper limit value (S1306: Yes), the number of ejected balls (the number of balls detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51) (S1307).

If it is determined that they match (S1307: Yes), the process of S1309 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1307: No), the value obtained by subtracting the value of the discharged number counter 203x from the value of the winning number counter 203w is added to the remaining ball counter 203p (S1308), and the process of S1309 is executed. do.

In the processing of S1309, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the ending effect (S1309). If it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1309: No), the process of S1312 is executed.

On the other hand, if it is time to start the ending effect (S1309: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310). When the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310: Yes), the process of S1312 is executed. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining ball counter is not 0 (S1310: No), an error command is set (S1311) and the process of S1312 is executed because there is an abnormality in ball ejection.

When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, even if the game ball is illegally left in the storage channel 1231 or the probability change determination unit 4800 and the jackpot type to be obtained later is the jackpot M, N, the game ball is passed through the specific area 4830. can be suppressed.

In this way, by performing control so as to notify the ball discharge error at the start timing of the ending effect, even when there is a difference between the number of entering balls and the number of discharged balls in the round game R of each round, the error can be notified. You can play games without As a result, it is possible to partially restrict the discharge of the balls from the storage channel 1231 in the interval between rounds, and to realize the playability of starting the next round with the balls stored in the storage channel 1231. .

In addition, even if there is a difference between the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls in the round game R of each round, the game can be executed without error notification, so the period of the interval between rounds can be reduced to 2 seconds (reserved It can be set to a period shorter than the period required for global discharge of the spheres stored in the channel 1231 .

It should be noted that the method of setting the ball ejection error command is not limited to this. For example, from the jackpot type, set a value that can normally occur as the difference between the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls, and if the difference in the number is within the range of that value, no error command However, it may be controlled to set an error command if it is out of the range of the value. In this case, it is possible to determine that a ball discharge error has occurred without waiting for the start timing of the ending effect, so that it is possible to detect the occurrence of an abnormality at an early stage. As a result, in the event that the error in ball ejection is caused by a fraudulent act, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity at an early stage.

In the process of S1312, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1312), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1313). After that, the winning number counter 203w and the discharge number counter 203x are reset to their initial values (S1314), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing this storage control process (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117) and is a process for setting the state of the interference member 6930. FIG.

As described above, the interference member 6930 may change its state according to the player's operation of the operation button 300 (S1403 to S1407) or may change at a preset timing ( S1408 to S1411), both of which are included in the storage control process (S1008).

In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is on (S1401). It means that it is in a retracted state. Next, it is determined whether the valid period of operation of the operation button 300 has expired (S1402).

If it is determined that the validity period has expired (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the player is pressing (operating) the operation button 300 (S1403). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal has been detected.

In the process of S1403, if it is determined that the depression (operation) of the operation button 300 has not been detected (that is, the depression detection signal has not been detected) (S1403: No), the interference member 6930 is kept in the retracted state. In order to keep it, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the depression (operation) of the operation button 300 has been detected (that is, the depression detection signal has been detected) (S1403: Yes), the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 is executed (S1404). Here, the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404). In the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404), a process of setting an upper limit value that varies depending on the operation timing of the operation button 300 as the upper limit value of the operation counter is executed.

That is, in the action counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404), the press (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected from the inter-round interval period after the inter-round interval period starts (that is, the press detection signal is detected). detected) is subtracted, and a value indicating the remaining period is set as the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1421), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

Next, a button operation command is set (S1405). Then, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the extended state, the extension flag 203k is set to ON (S1406), and the interference member 6930 is in the extended state (extended state based on the operation of the operation button 300, extended state). In order to notify the voice lamp controller 113 of the extension state 1), a storage state command corresponding to the extension state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1407), this process is terminated, and storage control is performed. Return to the process (S1008).

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the effective period (S1402: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the operation of the interference member 6930 based on the operation scenario (S1408). If it is determined that it is not the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: No), this process ends and returns to the storage control process (S1008).

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to start the operation of the interference member 6930 (S1408: Yes), upper limit value setting processing 2 of the operation counter is executed (S1409). Here, the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409). In the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409), a process of setting an upper limit value preset according to the operation scenario as the upper limit value of the operation counter is executed.

That is, in the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409), first, it is determined whether it is time to change the interference member 6930 to the overhanging state based on the operation scenario (S1431). If it is determined that it is not the time to change the interfering member 6930 to the extended state (S1431: No), this process ends and returns to the storage control process (S1008).

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to change the interference member 6930 to the extended state (S1431: Yes), an appropriate value from the operation scenario (interference member 6930 is maintained in the extended state based on the operation scenario). ) is set as the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1432), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

Next, to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the extended state, the extension flag 203k is set to ON (S1410), and the interference member 6930 is in the extended state (extended state based on the operation scenario, extended state). In order to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that 2) has occurred, a storage state command corresponding to the overhanging state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1411), and this processing ends.

The stored state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the stored state command corresponding to the extended state, it outputs to the display control device 114 a back face image change command for setting the back face type corresponding to the extended state to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command.

That is, for example, a mode is set in which characters "Passing ball is being stored" are displayed in the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 87(a)). This allows the player to easily recognize that the interference member 6930 is in the retained state.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is ON (S1401: Yes), a reservoir valve operation process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930 is executed (S1412). Here, this storage valve operating process (S1412) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the contents of this storage valve operating process (S1412). The storage valve operation process (S1412) is a process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930. FIG.

In the storage valve operation process (S1412), first, the solenoid 6910 is turned on (S1441), and 1 is added to the operation counter 203j (S1442). Although not shown, if the solenoid 6910 is already on, the process of S1441 is skipped and the process of S1442 is performed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit (S1443).

In the processing of S1443, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value (S1443: Yes), the solenoid 6910 is turned off (S1444). Then, the output flag 203k is set to OFF (S1445), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1446), and this processing is terminated. Also, in the processing of S1443, if it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not the upper limit value (S1443: No), this processing is terminated.

When the process of S1412 ends, it is determined whether the exit flag 203k is off (S1413), and if it is determined that the exit flag 203k is not off (that is, it is on) (S1413: No), this process is terminated. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1413, if it is determined that the output flag 203k is off (S1413: Yes), it means that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, so the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of this fact, a storage state command corresponding to the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1414), and this processing ends.

The stored state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When receiving the storage state command corresponding to the retracted state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs to the display control device 114 a display back image change command for setting the back surface type corresponding to the retracted state. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command.

By executing this storage control process, the state of the interference member 6930 can be set according to the operation state of the operation button 300 . As a result, the player can switch between a state in which the interference member 6930 restricts the flow of the ball and a state in which the restriction is released and the ball is permitted to flow.

In addition, this retention control process allows the interference member 6930 to be driven even when the operation button 300 is not operated. Therefore, the member that operates according to the operation state of the operation button 300 and the member that operates regardless of the operation of the operation button 300 can be configured with the same member.

Next, the V winning process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing this V winning process (S1009). This V winning process (S1009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and is a process for performing control to monitor the downflow of the ball after the first specific winning hole 1000a is closed. .

In the V winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the count start flag 203qa is ON (S1501). If it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is not ON (that is, OFF) (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the closing flag 203q is ON (S1502). If it is determined that the closing flag 203q is ON (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fifth round is currently being executed (S1503). If it is determined that it is the fifth round (S1503: Yes), then the count start flag 203qa is set to ON (S1504), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1502 that the closing flag 203q is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1502: No), and in the process of S1503 it is determined that the current round is not the 5th round. If so (S1503: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1501, if it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is ON (S1501: Yes), it means that the timing of operation of the distribution operation member 4851 for opening and closing the specific area 4830 is near. , in order to determine whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830 normally, the closing counter 203r is updated by adding 1 (S1505), and then the V winning valid counter 203t is similarly subtracted by 1. Update.

Then, it is determined whether the updated value of the closing counter 203r is a predetermined value (that is, whether the period in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state has passed) (S1507), and if it is the predetermined value (S1507 : Yes), the closing flag 203q is turned off (S1508), and then the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, if it is not the predetermined value (S1507: No), the process proceeds directly to S1509.

In the process of S1509, it is determined whether the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (4.0 seconds). When the value of the closed counter 203r is the upper limit value (S1509: Yes), it means that the value of the V prize valid counter 203t has become 0, so the count start flag 203qa is set to OFF (S1510), The closing counter is reset to 0 (S1511), and the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the value of the closing counter 203r is not the upper limit value (S1509: No), the process proceeds directly to S1512.

In this way, after the closing counter 203r reaches the upper limit value (that is, after 4.0 seconds have elapsed since the opening/closing plate 1300 was closed), the count start flag 203qa is turned off. The process of S1512 is no longer executed. In other words, the processing of S1512 is executed only until 4.0 seconds have passed since the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed.

In the process of S1512, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (that is, whether or not the specific area detection sensor 4860 has detected the passage of the ball). If it is determined that the ball has not passed through the specific area 4830 (S1512: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the V prize valid counter 203t is within the set value range (S1513).

In the processing of S1513, if it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is within the set value range (S1513: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 normally. , the V flag 203s is set to ON (S1514), and this processing is terminated.

Immediately after the opening/closing plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, the value corresponding to 4.0 seconds is set in the V prize valid counter 203t, and the value is subtracted therefrom. The set value of the V winning effect counter 203t is set as the timing at which the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 passes through the specific area 4830, as described above. The numerical range corresponds to the following and (3−0.2×the number of stored balls) seconds or more.

Therefore, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the opening/closing plate 1300 closes (the value of the V prize valid counter 203 is greater than 3.0 seconds), it is out of the set value range. In this case, it is suspected that the ball stays near the lower end of the communication path 4810 (due to clogging or illegal holding of the ball) and that the ball starts to flow down immediately after the opening/closing plate 1300 closes. , is controlled to signal an error.

Also, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after a long period of time has passed since the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V prize valid counter 203 is less than (3-0.2×the number of stored balls) seconds), Out of range of set value. In this case, problems arise in the flow of the ball when it is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (such as stagnation due to ball biting or illegal retention of the ball), and the discharge timing of the ball from the storage channel 1231 (the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed) It is suspected that the balls started to be ejected after a delay from the timing of the state), so control is performed to notify an error just in case.

It should be noted that cheats that cause the ball to stay include cheats that use a strong magnet to hold the ball, and cheats that hit a ball with a string glued to it into the game area, and the player manipulates the string to manipulate the ball. . In this pachinko machine 10, against illegality by magnets, a magnetic sensor (not shown) is arranged near the storage channel 1231, or the storage channel 1231 and the probability change determination unit 4800 are set to such an extent that the magnetic force does not reach. This can be dealt with by placing a space behind the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) or by increasing the thickness of the glass unit 16 .

In addition, as for fraudulent use of a ball to which a string is adhered, when the string is passed through the storage passage 1231 to the communication passage 4810 and the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 and a portion of the side wall of housing portion 1230 that holds detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 7), the string is fixed, and opening/closing plate 1300 is opened. The thread is fixed by being sandwiched with the outlet 1150 . Therefore, even if the player manipulates the string, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the ball in the communication path 4810. For example, the player can release the string held by the player at any timing, Even if the ball is illegally targeted to pass through the specific area 4830, since the thread is fixed in places as described above, it is easy to prevent the ball from illegally passing through the specific area 4830. can be done.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is not within the set value range (S1513: No), an error command is set because some kind of dishonesty or malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 is suspected. (S1515), and the process ends. In this case, the V flag 203s is not turned on.

In this example of control, the set value of the V winning effect counter 203t is set based on the number of pools in the pool channel 1231 to determine the occurrence of dishonesty or malfunction. Not. For example, the occurrence of illegality or malfunction may be determined by detecting the discharge interval of balls from the storage channel 1231, or the occurrence of illegality or malfunction may be determined by detecting the period during which a predetermined number of balls are discharged. Alternatively, when the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the required number (less than 4), it is detected that the balls pass through the specific area 4830. can be judged.

In the V winning process (S1009) in this control example, the case where the V flag 203s is set ON only when it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is within the set value has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, even when it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is not within the set value, the V flag 203s is set to ON, and the game is disabled until the error caused by the error command is resolved. can be controlled. This error command is canceled by turning off the power, but it is not limited to this, and the RAM 203 may be cleared.

In this case, if the timing of the ball passing through the specific area 4830 is shifted due to a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 rather than the player's dishonesty, the player can enter the special symbol high probability state without any problem after it is discovered. A game can be executed.

On the other hand, if the cause is fraud by the player, after the fraud is discovered, the game of the player who committed the fraud is first stopped, the hall clerk clears the RAM 203, and the special symbol low probability state is restored. Forcibly control so that As a result, it is possible to prevent extra waiting time from occurring until other customers start playing games at the pachinko machine 10 in which fraud has been committed.

In this control example, while the error command is set in S1515, for example, control is performed so that the ball cannot be shot, or if the ball is shot, an error is reported to alert the store clerk. or controlled so that the ball is not paid out even if the fired ball enters the winning hole (for example, the function of the payout control device 111 is stopped); It is controlled so that the game cannot be played by controlling to turn off the power based on the ball entering the mouth.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 140, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 130, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing of S2120 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 131, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S2114 in FIG. 131), it executes power-off processing in S2117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2120. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2120 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2117 is executed (see S2116 in FIG. 131). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2117 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), an interrupt Permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010). Next, the variable probability state flag 223i is updated according to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2011), the interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main processing. By updating the variable probability state flag 223i based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main controller 110 and the game state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect according to the game state.

The reason why the clearing process of S2009 is skipped is that when the process of S2008 is reached from S2004 via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 131, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2110 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , the command determination process of S2111, the variable display setting process of S2112, and the storage state monitoring process of S2113 are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process of S2111 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2112 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay. In addition, by executing the process of S2113 at short intervals, it is possible to set the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m without delay based on the storage state.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2101 to S2113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104).

In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 223b is performed.

Thereafter, button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this button input monitoring/effect processing, an input as to whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player is pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and when the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed, the effect corresponding to the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform In this process, when the operation of the operation button 300 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the operation button 300 is set to the display control device 114 .

When the button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the processing of S2110 is completed, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S2111). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, the process proceeds to S2112. In the process of S2112, a variable display setting process is executed (S2112). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S2113. In the process of S2113, a storage state monitoring process is executed (S2113). In the storage state monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this storage state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the storage state monitoring process is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off processing is executed (S2117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S2118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2115: No), the process returns to S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2111). This command determination process (S2111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. This process is for

In the command determination process (FIG. 132, S2113), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is determined. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S2201). In addition, the variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and from the main controller 110, the selected variation pattern (variation time) is the first special symbol and the second special It is output corresponding to each of the patterns.

In the process of S2201, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command is extracted (S2203), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so that the variation pattern type of the special symbol can be identified for each type of special symbol (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol). When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) described later. (When setting the display variation pattern command of the special design) is used.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204). If it is determined that the stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) is received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the type of the received command is set to ON (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to ON.

Next, the stop type (completely out, out of reach, small hit, jackpot K, L, M, N, k) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the process ends. The stop type extracted in the processing of S2206 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. Then, it is referred to when the later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) is executed, and is used to set a stop type command for display that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

In the process of S2204, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2207). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), the display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and this processing ends.

Next, it is determined whether or not a pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S2209). If it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command (i.e., the number of holding balls for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is extracted. The counter value is updated (S2210), and this process ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value of is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). Every time there is, by the processing of S2210, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 are set to special symbol 1 reserved of the main control device 110 It is possible to match the values of the ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Or even if the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e deviates, if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

Also, in the process of S2209, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2212). In the process of S2212, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2212: Yes), the winning information command reception process is executed (S2213).

In this winning information command reception process (S2213), setting of various flags and setting of various counters to be referred to for setting various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 are performed. As a result, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, before the variation of the pending special symbol is started (that is, the special symbol executed before the target special symbol variation) During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect showing the lottery result of the special symbol for which the winning information command is transmitted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed to the player using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. Suggestion notification can be performed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that the winning information command has not been received (S2212: No), it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2214). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2214: Yes), the notification command for display is set (S2215), and this processing ends.

In the process of S2214, if it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2214: No), a storage device-related command (storage state command corresponding to the retracted state (S1414, see FIG. 125) or (S1407, see FIG. 125) is received (S2216) If it is determined in S2216 that a storage device-related command has been received (S2216: Yes), the corresponding rear image for display is changed. A command is set (S2217), and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the process of S2216 that no storage device-related command has been received (S2216: No), then it is determined whether an operation command has been received (S2218). In the process of S2218, if it is determined that an operation command has been received (the operation button 300 has been operated (depressed)) (S2218: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to ON (S2219), and this process ends. do. This operation command is a command output when the operation button 300 is operated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether or not the win-related command has been received (S2220).

In the process of S2220, if it is determined that the win-related command has been received (S2220: Yes), the win-related process is executed (S2221), and this process ends. Details of the win-related processing (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S2220, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S2220: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S2222), and this processing ends.

In the process of S2222, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114. For example, a ball entry command set based on the entry of a ball into each ball entry hole provided on the game board 13 is received, a process of accumulating the number of balls entered for each type of entrance into which the ball entered is executed.

Next, the hit-related processing (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the win-related processing (S2221). This hit-related process (S2221) is a process executed during the command determination process (see S2111 in FIG. 132) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This process is executed when a hit-related command is received from the device 110 .

When the winning related process (S2221) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot opening command is received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then the display opening command is set (S2502), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that the opening command has not been received (S2501: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2503). In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2503: Yes), the round number cumulative counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the jackpot middle effect process is executed ( S2505), the process ends.

The effect processing (S2505) during the jackpot is a process for selecting the aspect of the round effect (the effect of the round game R and the effect of the interval between rounds), and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 134 .

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not the number-of-rounds command (S2503: No), then it is determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from main controller 110 when each round in the jackpot ends. In the process of S2506, if it is determined that an interval command has been received (S2506: Yes), the number of completed rounds is calculated based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the corresponding display interval command is set ( S2507), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command has not been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether the jackpot ending command has been received (S2508). In the process of S2508, when the jackpot ending command is received (S2508: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S2509), the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is cleared (S2510), and this process ends. Moreover, in the process of S2508, also when it discriminate|determines that the jackpot ending command is not received (S2508:No), this process is complete|finished.

Here, with reference to FIG. 134, the effect processing (S2505) during the big hit will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the effect processing (S2505) during the big hit. In this jackpot middle effect processing (S2505), in addition to the jackpot game effect for celebrating the big win, the inside of the storage channel 1231 is visually recognized by making the player operate the operation button 300 as the effect executed during the big win. A first operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) that allows a player to operate the operation button 300 to change the state of the interference member 6930 (operation effect (timing effect)). A production mode and presence/absence of a continuous shooting performance for prompting the continuation of ball shooting even after the number of balls are entered are set, and each performance is executed.

When the big hit production process (S2505) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the production execution flag 223x is ON (S2531). When it is determined that the effect execution flag 223x is ON (S2531: Yes), the process proceeds to S2540. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect execution flag 223x is not on (is off) (S2531: No), then whether the round number command received this time is the round number command indicating the third round of the jackpot is determined (S2532).

In the process of S2532, when it is determined that the command is the number of rounds command indicating the third round (S2532: Yes), the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON (S2533), and the process proceeds to S2534.

In the process of S2534, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot k (S2534), and if it is determined to be the jackpot k (S2534: Yes), the second operation effect flag 223wb is turned on. (S2535), and the process proceeds to S2536. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot k (S2534: No), the process proceeds directly to S2536.

That is, if the jackpot is k, both the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to ON. , only the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON.

Here, the display effect round command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (S2536). FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing the contents of this display effect round command setting process (S2536). In the display effect round command setting process (S2536), first, it is determined whether or not the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551). As information that can be read out from the effect temporary storage area 223r, the first display mode is set (S2552), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the big hit process (S2505).

In the first display mode, as a display effect round command, in the third round round game R, it is displayed that there is an operation effect in the next round and that there is an operation effect in the interval period after the end of the next round (Fig. 88(a)), and in the interval period after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the operation effect is set to be displayed (see FIGS. 90 and 91).

The display during the interval period after the end of the round game R of the third round and the display during the round game R of the fourth round are common regardless of the display mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second operation effect flag 223wb is not on (that is, it is off) (S2551: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type currently being executed is the jackpot L or M (S2553 ), when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot L or M (S2553: Yes), the second display mode is set as information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2554), and this process ends. Then, it returns to the production process (S2505) during the big hit.

In the second display mode, as the display effect round command, there is an operation effect in the next round in the round game R of the third round (see FIG. 88(a)), and the number of stored balls in the round game of the fourth round. Information is set to be displayed (see FIG. 88(b)), and a moving image (or still image) without operation effect is set to be displayed during the interval period after the end of the round game R of the 4th round. be done.

Here, the information about the number of stored balls is prepared so as to be displayable, and is based on the operation of the operation button 300 at the timing when the operation effect is successful (for example, the timing when the display pointer 719 overlaps the bar display portion 717). display is controlled by

The display during the interval period after the end of the round game R of the third round and the display during the round game R of the fourth round are common regardless of the display mode.

On the other hand, in the process of S2553, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not jackpot L or M (that is, jackpot K, N, k) (S2553: No), as information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r , The third display mode is set (S2555), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the big hit medium effect process (S2505).

In the third display mode, as the display effect round command, in the third round of the round game R, there is an operation effect in the next round. (See FIG. 88), and during the interval period after the end of the round game R of the 4th round, a moving image (or a still image) without operation effects is set to be displayed.

The display during the interval period after the end of the round game R of the third round and the display during the round game R of the fourth round are common regardless of the display mode.

As described above, the display of the round game R of the 3rd round and the round game R of the 4th round are collectively set as the effect round command for display.

Returning to FIG. 134, description will be made. After the processing of S2536, the effect information is read from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and the display effect round command for the display effect of the round game R of the third round and the round game R of the fourth round is set (S2537), The effect executing flag 223x is set to ON (S2538), the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to OFF (S2539), and this process is terminated.

Although details are not shown, the processing of S2539 is configured to be skipped if the first operation effect flag 223wa or the second operation effect flag 223wb has already been set to off. is doing. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2532, if it is determined that it is not the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: No), then it is determined whether the round number command received this time is the fourth round of the jackpot ( S2540).

In the processing of S2540, if it is determined that the command is the number of rounds indicating the fourth round (S2540: Yes), a display command indicating that the fourth round has been reached is set. Since the display mode for the fourth round has already been selected as described above, this process is terminated to avoid redundantly selecting another display mode, and the process returns to the win-related process (S2221).

On the other hand, in the process of S2540, if it is determined that the round number command received this time is not the 4th round of the jackpot (S2540: No), then the round number command received this time is the 5th round of the jackpot. (S2541).

In the processing of S2541, when it is determined that the command is the number of rounds indicating the fifth round (S2541: Yes), the effect execution flag 223x is set to OFF (S2542), and the first input flag 223wc and the second The input flag 223wd is set to OFF (S2543), and the process proceeds to S2547. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2541 that the command is not the round number command indicating the fifth round (S2541: No), the process proceeds to S2544.

In the processing of S2544, it is determined whether or not the number-of-rounds command received this time is the sixth round of the jackpot (S2544). In the processing of S2544, when it is determined that it is a round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (S2545).

When it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (S2545: Yes), the continuous firing round command for display is set (S2546), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related process (S2221). .

The continuous firing round command for display is set so as to display a display prompting the user to continue firing the ball without stopping (see small area Ds3 in FIG. 92(b)) as a presentation round command for display. . This display is executed only in the jackpot type (jackpot K, M or k, see FIG. 94(b)) in which excess winning can be expected in the 6th round of the round game R. Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of over-winning by continuing to shoot balls according to the display.

On the other hand, in the process of S2544, if it is determined that it is not the round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: No), or in the process of S2545, the jackpot type is not jackpot K, M or k (that is, jackpot L, N) (S2545: No), a display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2547), and this process ends.

Therefore, in this control example, when the round number command of the 1st, 2nd, 5th rounds and the 6th round when the jackpot type is the jackpot L, N is received, the display round number command is set by the processing of S2547. be. On the other hand, when another round number command is received, a display effect round command or a display continuous firing round command is set. In this way, by changing the display of the round game R according to the type of jackpot and the number of rounds, it is possible to progress the jackpot game without boring the player.

Various display round number commands set here (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command) are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the MPU 221 It is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by . When the display control device 114 receives various display round number commands, etc. (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command), the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. do.

Thus, in this embodiment, the current round number is determined by the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. A configuration other than this may be used. For example, by including information indicating the current round number in the round number command, the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h may be eliminated.

In addition, although it is configured to select the display mode for the fourth round when the command for the number of rounds for the third round is acquired, other configurations may be used. The same control as the control performed when the fourth round number command is obtained may be repeatedly performed when the fourth round number command is obtained. Further, for example, only the setting of the display mode is performed when the command for the number of rounds for the third round is obtained, and selection of the display mode is performed when the command for the number of rounds for the fourth round is obtained. can be

As described above, in this embodiment, when the jackpot is started, at the time of the round (3 rounds) before the round (4 rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is actually executed, the next A foretelling effect for notifying that a timing effect (operation effect) will be executed is executed in the round (see FIG. 88(a)). Then, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 88(b)).

In this way, since the notice effect is executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, it is possible to let the player know in advance that the effect for operating the operation button 300 will be executed. can. Also, since the notice effect is only executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed even though the notice effect is executed. can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a predetermined number of rounds during the jackpot, it is configured to execute the timing effect (operation effect), but other configurations may be used. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are stored, the timing effect (operation effect) may be executed in the next round. As a result, the player can more positively play a game in which balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 .

Next, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2112). This variable display setting process (S2112) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) is based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, a process of generating a variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (complete failure, reach failure, jackpot), a process of setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variable display setting process (S2112 in FIG. 136), first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), it means that no fluctuation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S2706. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is ON (S2701: Yes), based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the detailed aspect of the fluctuation display of the special symbol of this time is determined. Each process of S2702 to S2705 for the purpose is executed.

More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702), then the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S2703), the display fluctuation pattern command is set (S2704), and then the corresponding 1 is subtracted from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c), and winning information contained in the command storage area based on the subtracted value The data in the storage area is shifted (S2705), and the process proceeds to S2706.

In the processing of S2706, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2706: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2706, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is ON (S2706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set to OFF (S2707), then the command determination process (FIG. 132 ), the extracted stop type is acquired (S2708), and the acquired stop type is set (S2709). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S2710), and this processing ends.

Next, the storage state monitoring process (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing this storage state monitoring process (S2113). This storage state monitoring process (S2113) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 51). This is a process for determining that the

Here, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 51, a storage channel 1231 is provided as part of a storage device capable of storing balls on the game board 13, and a maximum of 10 balls can be stored. It consists of

A detection sensor 1240 is arranged at the upstream end of the storage channel 1231 , and the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is detected by the detection sensor 1240 . Also, the ball discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 .

In the storage state monitoring process (S2113), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a (that is, whether the detection sensor 1240 has detected the passage of the ball) (S2801), and the first specific winning hole is detected. If the ball has passed through 1000a (S2801: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the storage counter 223n (S2802), and the process proceeds to S2803. On the other hand, if the ball has not passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a (S2801: No), the process proceeds to S2803.

In the process of S2803, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the outlet 1150 (that is, whether the passage of the ball has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870) (S2803). has passed (S2803: Yes), the value of the storage counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S2804), and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S2803: No), the process proceeds to S2805.

In the process of S2805, it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805), and if it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is turned on. (S2806). If it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2806: No), the storage state flag 223k is set to ON (S2807), and the intermediate number command for display is set (S2808). ), and the process proceeds to S2812. On the other hand, in the process of S2806, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2806: Yes), the process proceeds to S2812.

On the other hand, in the process of S2805, if it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 4 or more (that is, it is 3 or less) (S2805: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on ( S2809). If it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2809: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF (S2810), the shortage command for display is set (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2812. . On the other hand, in the processing of S2809, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2809: No), the process proceeds to S2812.

In the process of S2812, it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812), and if it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is on. (S2813). If it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2813: No), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON (S2814), and a display full tank command is set (S2815). ), the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2813, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2813: Yes), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2812 that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 10 (that is, it is 9 or less) (S2812: No), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816). ). When it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is ON (S2816: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to OFF (S2817), a dissatisfaction command for display is set (S2818), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2816 that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2816: No), this process ends.

In this way, based on the detection results of the detection sensor 1240, the specific area detection sensor 4860, and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870, the settings of the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m are updated as needed.

As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2113) in this embodiment, the storage state of the balls in the storage channel 1231 is determined, and various flags (the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m) are set. Therefore, the audio ramp control device 113 can perform an effect based on the storage state of the storage channel 1231 .

In the above description, the number of incoming balls based on the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharged balls based on the detection results of the specific area detection sensor 4860 and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 are stored in the storage channel 1231. is calculated, but it is not limited to this.

For example, a sensor for detecting the presence or absence of a ball is disposed at an arbitrary location in the storage channel 1231, and based on the lapse of a predetermined period of time in a state where the ball is detected by the sensor, the ball is stored downstream. You can judge that there is. As an example, when a sensor is arranged at the position where the third ball from the downstream stays, the sensor detects that the three balls including the two balls arranged on the downstream side are stored in the storage channel 1231. can be determined to be stored in

Further, even after the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, if the sensor continues to detect the ball, it can be suspected that the ball is illegally parked. can be detected early. That is, the sensor that detects balls can be used both for detecting the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and for detecting fraud.

Next, the lamp output process (S2103) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing this lamp output process (S2103). This lamp output process (S2103) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and sets a lamp lighting command to be sent to the lamp display device 227. This process is for

Here, in this control example, in addition to the configuration described above, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93) is provided throughout the pachinko machine 10 and used for effects such as the decorative lamp 227a (described above). The interior of the covering front plate 1200 (see FIG. 5) provided so as to cover the storage channel 1231 and the covering front plate 1200 is A transparent lamp 227b (see FIG. 86) and another lamp 227z are provided for making the transparent state visible to the player.

When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is within a predetermined period of time (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, a predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) clocked by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 . In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the time is within 30 seconds (S2901: Yes), a transmissive lamp lighting command (strong) is set (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2905.

When the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set, all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled to light (strongly).

Here, in this control example, the covering front plate 1200 is provided so as to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the internal state of the storage channel 1231 and the operating state of the interference member 6930 in the normal game state. there is As described above, the covering front plate 1200 is configured to be changed from a blocking state to a transmitting state by irradiating a predetermined light (light of a transmission lamp) from the rear surface.

For a predetermined period after turning on the gaming machine (predetermined period after execution of start-up processing), the transparent lamp is lit regardless of the game state. As a result, immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, that is, at the timing when the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by the clerk, the inside of the storage channel 1231 covered by the covering front plate 1200 can be easily visually recognized. can.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2901, if it is determined that the present time is not within the predetermined period (30 seconds) after the startup processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (the predetermined period (30 seconds) has passed), ( S2901: No), next, it is determined whether or not the detection sensor 1240 has detected the passage of the ball (S2902). In the processing of S2902, if the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of the ball (S2902: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set so that the player can visually recognize the ball that has passed through the detection sensor 1240 ( S2903), the process proceeds to S2906.

It should be noted that the transmission lamp lighting command in this case is a sufficient time (for example, 2.0 seconds) for the ball to pass through the area covered by the covering front plate 1200 in the storage channel 1231. is set to be lit, and while the transmission state is maintained during the period when the ball flows down the storage channel 1231, the transmission state can be canceled after the ball stops. It is not limited to this. For example, on the condition that the sphere has passed through the outlet 1150, or that the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 has detected the passage of the sphere, the transmission lamp 227b is extinguished (shielded from the transmission state). state). As a result, the covering front plate 1200 can be maintained in a transparent state throughout the period in which the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 .

In the process of S2902, if the detection sensor 1240 has not detected the passage of the sphere (S2902: No), then it is determined whether a transmission lamp-related command has been set (S2904), and the transmission lamp-related command is set. If so (S2904: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command specified in advance is set (S2905), and the process proceeds to S2906. On the other hand, if the transmissive lamp-related command is not set (S2904: No), the process proceeds directly to S2906.

The transmission lamp-related commands are mainly set by the number-of-spheres confirmation process (S3004) described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to FIG. 138, the description continues. In the processing of S2906, a decorative lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (game state) (S2906), and the processing ends. The decoration lamp lighting command is variously set according to the variation pattern to be executed, the current game state, and the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the details of the button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107). In this button input monitoring/effect processing (2107), it is monitored whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect. This is a process for setting to perform corresponding production. In this processing, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, an operation button effect command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the operation button 300 has been operated, and various flags are set based on the operation content. Settings are made.

Specifically, first, during the fourth round of the round game R, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the operation button 300 in the period during which the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is the depression success period. Set the transmission lamp lighting command to execute the lamp lighting based on the discrimination result, and set the display command to display the associated ball number grasping effect (success effect, failure effect, failure effect). (See FIG. 140). Secondly, in the interval period after the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the operation timing of the operation button 300 during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is either during the great depression success period or during the successful depression period. or the depression failure period, and sets a display command for displaying an effect (great success effect, success effect, failure effect) based on the result.

When the button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect executing flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). Then, in the process of S3001, when it is determined that the effect execution flag 223x is ON (S3001: Yes), next, it is determined whether the jackpot type currently being executed is the jackpot k (S3002). . In the processing of S3002, when it is determined that the jackpot k (S3002: Yes), it is determined whether it is an interval period (S3003), and if it is an interval period (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot k (that is, the jackpot K, L, M, N) (S3002: No), or in the process of S3003, it is not during the interval (that is, the round game (S3003: No), the process of confirming the number of balls is executed (S3004), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 140, the number-of-balls confirmation process (S3004) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing the ball count confirmation process (S3004). This number-of-balls confirmation process (S3004) is a process executed during the button input monitoring/effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 139) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. be.

This number-of-balls confirmation process (S3004) monitors the input as to whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the performance effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the operation button 300 has been confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, as described above, various flags are set based on the details of the operation, a transmissive lamp lighting command for executing lamp lighting is set, A display command for displaying the number of balls grasping effect (success effect, failure effect, failure effect) associated therewith is set.

When the ball number confirmation process (S3004) is executed, first, it is determined whether the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101), and if it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101: Yes) , the transmissive lamp lighting command and the display ball number grasp related command have already been set, so this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3101 that the first input flag 223wc is not ON (that is, OFF) (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the operation (depression) of the operation button 300 has been detected. (S3102). When the operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is detected (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether it is within the ball number grasping period (S3103).

Here, the ball count grasp period means a period in which the display pointer 719 at least partially coincides with the bar display portion 717 in the timing effect (operation effect) described above (see FIG. 88(b)). The length of this period for grasping the number of balls can be adjusted according to the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the bar display portion 717 .

In this control example, the display pointer 719 is a circle with a diameter of 3 [cm], its operating speed is 20 [cm/s], and the width of the bar display portion 717 is 1 [cm]. In this case, the period for grasping the number of balls is the same as the time for the display pointer 719 to move 4 [cm], so it is 0.2 [s].

In the process of S3103, if it is determined that it is within the period of the number of balls (S3103: Yes), a display ball number grasping success command is set (S3104), and a transmissive lamp lighting command (strong/long) is set (S3105). ), the process proceeds to S3111.

Here, when the display ball number grasping success command is set, a display prompting grasping of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 (for example, a character display of "Watch out for attackers!") is displayed as the third pattern display. Executed in the device 81, "good" is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the button display mode 715 schematically showing the operation button 300 is changed to the pressed state mode (see FIG. 88(b)).

Further, the transmission lamp lighting command (strong/long) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on at least from the round game R of the 4th round to the round game R of the 5th round.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3103, when it is determined that it is not within the ball count period (that is, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed at the timing when the display pointer 719 and the bar display section 717 are out of alignment (see FIG. 89)). (S3103: No), a display ball count failure command is set (S3106), a transmissive lamp lighting command (medium/long) is set (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3111.

Here, when the command for failure to grasp the number of balls for display is set, the display prompting the user to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and "bad" is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the operation is performed. The button display mode 715 that schematically shows the button 300 is changed to the pressed state mode (see FIG. 89).

Further, the transmission lamp lighting command (middle/long) is set so that only the transmission lamp 227ba is lit over at least the round game R of the 4th round to the round game R of the 5th round.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3102 that the operation of the operation button 300 has not been detected (S3102: No), the process proceeds to S3108. In the process of S3108, it is determined whether the time limit (in this control example, 3 seconds from the start of the fourth round of the round game R) has passed (S3108). If it is determined that the limit time has passed (S3108: Yes), a display sphere count disable command is set (S3109), a transmissive lamp lighting command (weak/short) is set (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3111. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S3108, if it is determined that the time limit has not passed (it is less than 3 seconds from the start of the round game R of the 4th round), this processing is terminated, and the button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107 ).

Here, when the display ball number comprehension command is set, the display prompting the comprehension of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and the result display mode 720 (see FIG. 89) is not displayed. The button display mode 715 that schematically shows the button 300 also does not change (see FIG. 88(a)).

Further, the transmission lamp lighting command (weak/short) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off in the subsequent round game R.

As described above, in this control example, operating the operating button 300 rather than not operating the operating button 300 allows the player to obtain information from the display on the third symbol display device 81 and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b. controlled to maximize profits. Also, when operating the operation button 300, it is better to operate the third symbol display device 81 during the period for grasping the number of balls (0.2 seconds in this control example) than to operate at other timings. The display in , and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b are controlled so as to increase the profit that the player can obtain.

Therefore, the player's desire to operate the operation button 300 during the fourth round of the round game R can be enhanced, and the player can concentrate on the operation. Then, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is about to operate the operation button 300 can be focused on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the process of S3111, the first input flag 223wc is set to ON (S3111). The first input flag 223wc is set to ON by operating the operation button 300 (or the time limit has elapsed), and while the first input flag 223wc is set to ON, the number-of-balls confirmation process (S3004) is skipped. Therefore (S3101), only the first operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is validated in the ball number confirmation process (S3004).

Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to carefully determine the timing of operating the operation button 300, avoiding an operation mode in which the operation button 300 is repeatedly hit blindly. In addition, by executing the display prompting this (display for calling attention) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly hitting the operation button 300, so that the operation of the operation button 300 is suppressed. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the durable number of times at an early stage, and improve the durability of the operation button 300 .

When the process of S3111 ends, this process ends and returns to the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107).

Returning to FIG. 139, description will be made. In the process of S3005, it is determined whether the second input flag 223wd is ON (S3005). If it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is ON (S3005: Yes), since the display operation button related effect command has already been set, this processing is terminated as it is, and button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107). back to

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3005 that the second input flag 223wd is not ON (that is, OFF) (S3005: No), it is determined whether the operation flag 223p is ON (S3006). The fact that the operation flag 223p is set to ON (see S1405 in FIG. 125 and S2218 and S2219 in FIG. 132) means that the effect for changing the state of the interference member 6930 to the extended state (see FIGS. 90 and 91) means that the operation button 300 has been operated (depressed) in (see S1403 in FIG. 125). In other words, it means that the interference member 6930 is changed to the extended state.

When it is determined that the operation flag 223p is ON (S3006: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to OFF (S3007), and from the value of the storage counter 223n at the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the round After subtracting the value obtained by dividing the elapsed time of the interval by 0.2, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining balls indicated by the value obtained by further subtracting 2 is 4 (S3008). The value calculated in S3008 corresponds to the number of spheres left in the storage channel 1231 on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 .

Here, the value calculated in S3008 is 4 because, in the timing effect (operation effect), when the display pointer 719d is at a position where at least a part of the second belt portion 716b is vertically aligned, the operation button 300 is pressed. Control is performed so that the operation is performed (see FIG. 90(b)). Here, the period during which the display pointer 719d and the second belt portion 716b are at least partially aligned in the vertical direction depends on the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the second belt portion 716b. , the length can be adjusted.

In this control example, as described above, the display pointer 719 is a circle with a diameter of 3 [cm], and the width of the second belt portion 716b is newly set to 4.2 [cm]. Since it takes 0.2 seconds for one ball to be ejected from the storage channel 1231, it takes 0.1 seconds for the display pointer 719 to pass through the second strip 716b. , the operating speed of the display pointer 719 becomes 72 [cm/s]. With this setting, the display pointer 719 is controlled so that its left end reaches the right end of the second band portion 716b at a timing of 0.7 seconds from the start of the interval period (0.8 seconds). At the timing, its right end passes the left end of the second band portion 716b). In this control example, by controlling in this manner, the period in which the display pointer 719 at least partly coincides with the second belt portion 716b vertically can be limited to 0.1 seconds.

In the process of S3008, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is 4 (S3008: Yes), a display operation button great success effect command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3014.

Here, when the display operation button great success effect command is set, the third symbol display device 81 executes a display indicating that the player can obtain the maximum profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect). (See FIG. 90(b)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3008 that the number of remaining balls is not 4 (S3008: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010). Here, the reason why the number of remaining balls becomes 5 or more in S3010 is that the operation button 300 is operated when the display pointer 719d is at a position where all of the display pointers 719d are aligned with the first belt portion 716a in the timing effect (operation effect). is executed (see FIG. 91(a)). That is, this corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated before 0.7 seconds have passed since the start of the interval period (the operation is done too early).

In the process of S3010, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010: Yes), a display operation button success effect command is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to S3014.

Here, when the display operation button success effect command is set, the player can obtain a moderate profit (that is, neither the highest nor the lowest profit) as a result of the timing effect (operation effect). The display shown is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 91(a)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S3010, if it is determined that the number of remaining balls is not 5 or more (that is, the number of remaining balls is 3 or less) (S3010: No), or if the operation flag 223p is not set to ON, When the limit time (1.5 seconds in this control example) has passed (S3012: Yes), a display operation button failure effect command is set (S3013), and the process proceeds to S3014.

Here, the reason why the number of remaining balls becomes 3 or less in S3010 is that, in the timing effect (operation effect), the operation button 300 is operated when the display pointer 719d is at a position where all of the display pointers 719d and the third belt portion 716c are vertically aligned. is executed (see FIG. 91(b)). That is, it corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated after 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period (the operation is too late), or the case where the operation button 300 is not operated.

Here, when the display operation button failure effect command is set, the third pattern display device 81 executes a display indicating that the player can obtain the lowest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect). (See FIG. 91(b)).

Thus, in this control example, the player can obtain a greater profit by operating the operation button 300 than by not operating the operation button 300, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 changes accordingly. controlled as Also, when operating the operation button 300, by performing the operation at the timing when the number of remaining balls becomes 4 (from the time 0.7 seconds have passed since the start of the interval period to the time 0.8 seconds have passed). It is controlled so that the maximum profit can be obtained, the medium profit can be obtained before the timing, and the minimum profit can be obtained after the timing.

Therefore, the player can increase the willingness to operate the operation button 300 in the interval period immediately after the round game R of the fourth round, and can select the operation mode of the operation button 300 .

That is, if the player wishes to obtain at least a moderate profit, he can obtain a moderate profit without risk by pressing the operation button 300 immediately after the start of the interval period. in profit). On the other hand, if you want to get the maximum profit, if you delay the operation even a little, you will not get a medium profit and you will get the minimum profit, so you should consider the disadvantage when performing the operation. (Profits are unstable and fluctuate).

In this way, by varying the operating modes of the operation buttons 300, the player can choose between stable medium-level profits and unstable maximum profits. be able to.

Therefore, the operator can concentrate on operating the operation button 300 . Then, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is about to operate the operation button 300 can be focused on the third symbol display device 81 .

In the process of S3014, the second input flag 223wd is set to ON (S3014). The second input flag 223wd is set to ON by operating the operation button 300 (or the time limit has passed). Since it is skipped (S3005), only the first operation (pressing down) of the operation button 300 is validated in the button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107).

Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to carefully determine the timing of operating the operation button 300, avoiding an operation mode in which the operation button 300 is repeatedly hit blindly. In addition, by executing the display prompting this (display for calling attention) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly hitting the operation button 300, so that the operation of the operation button 300 is suppressed. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the durable number of times at an early stage, and improve the durability of the operation button 300 .

According to this control example detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

The visibility of the interior of the storage channel 1231 is changed by the lighting mode of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be. This makes it possible to change the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the ease of grasping the operation mode of the interference device 6900 .

In order to maintain high visibility inside the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to remove the line of sight from the storage channel 1231, pay attention to the liquid crystal display device (third pattern display device 81), and participate in the timing production (operation production). configured so that As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game ends while the player's line of sight is focused on the first variable prize winning device 6000 .

Furthermore, when the player operates the operation button 300 in a timing effect (operation effect) and the storage channel 1231 becomes transparent, attention is paid to the first variable winning device 6000 in which the storage channel 1231 is arranged. It is configured to display a prompt to do so. As a result, the player's line of sight focused on the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) can be urged to move to the storage channel 1231 when necessary.

On the liquid crystal display device (third pattern display device 81), circle marks are displayed so that the range of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped. As a result, the player can easily predict the state inside the storage channel 1231 by visually recognizing the liquid crystal display device, and can easily determine how many more balls should be shot before winning the prescribed number of prizes. be able to. Therefore, the shooting mode of the ball can be easily selected.

As a timing effect (operation effect) performed by the liquid crystal display device (third pattern display device 81), different qualities for the player (in this control example, the visibility of the storage channel 1231 and the payout of the prize ball When the timing effect (operation effect) that gives the profit (directly connected to configured to be As a result, the player can be allowed to perform the operation without any sense of incongruity even when the transition from the earlier timing performance (operation performance) to the later timing performance (operation performance) occurs immediately.

Depending on the jackpot type, in a predetermined round game R (sixth round round game R), the case where the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (the 20th operation pattern, operation scenario 5) and the case where it is not discharged (the 21st is configured to generate the operation pattern, operation scenario 6). Thereby, it is possible to define whether or not excess winning occurs in a predetermined round game R depending on the jackpot type.

By varying the predetermined inter-round interval period (for example, the interval period between the fourth round and the fifth round) depending on the jackpot type, the inside of the storage channel 1231 in the round game R immediately after the inter-round interval period It was configured so that the state (the number of stored balls) would change. Thereby, even if the aspect of the state change of the first specific winning port 1000a, the interference member 6930 and the specific area 4830 in the round game R is the same, the progress aspect of the round game can be changed.

Predetermined round game R (4th round round game R in this control example), the number of balls different from the specified number (10 in this control example) (9 in this control example) is the first By terminating the game with the ball entering the specific winning hole 1000a, the player can maximize the profit obtained in the next round game R (the fifth round round game R in this control example). did. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from carelessly digesting the jackpot game.

In the configuration in which the ball flows down toward the specific area 4830 as the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, while the interference member 6930 maintains the overhanging state, the specified number of balls enters the first specific winning opening 1000a It is configured so that the ball cannot be entered. As a result, depending on the operation mode of the interference member 6930, it is possible to define the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R, and the arrival of the ball upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a. The timing and the timing of the end of the round game R can be separated. That is, based on the operation mode of the interference member 6930, it is possible to define the timing when the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R.

When the first specific prize winning port 1000a is open, the balls are arranged in a state of being easily retained on the upstream side of the first specific prize winning port 1000a. It is configured to flow down toward the first specific winning port 1000a at varying timings. As a result, a plurality of stagnant balls can be collectively entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the possibility of excessive winning can be increased.

In addition, it is configured so that the number of excess winnings can be specified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the excessive number of winning prizes from becoming excessive and hindering the game performance.

Furthermore, the presence or absence of the occurrence of excess winning is configured to be able to be defined by the operation mode of the interference member 6930 arranged downstream of the first specific winning port 1000a, and the operation mode of the interference member 6930 is defined in advance based on the jackpot type. be. Thus, even if the balls are similarly retained on the upstream side of the first specific prize winning port 1000a, it is possible to switch between the case where excess prize winning occurs and the case where excessive prize winning does not occur based on the jackpot type.

Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, the benefits that the player can obtain in the round game R (for example, the visibility inside the storage channel 1231, the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231, and the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231, The presence or absence of the ball entering the specific area 4830 and the maximum number of entering balls in the round game R) are configured to change. As a result, the player's attention to the timing effect (operation effect) can be improved.

Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, the two types of profits obtained by the player are configured to seesaw, and the display device (third symbol It is configured to be displayed on the display device 81). As a result, the player who visually recognizes the display of the display device can obtain a profit in accordance with the operation timing by selecting the operation timing and operating the operation button 300 based on the profit to be preferentially obtained. Therefore, the willingness to participate in the timing performance (operation performance) can be increased.

Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 143. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 141, details of the first winning type selection table 202b in the second control example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 141, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with "jackpot P". This "jackpot P" is a jackpot with 6 rounds. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values become ``jackpot P'', so when the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in a jackpot, ``jackpot P'' is determined. The proportion is 50% (50/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "jackpot P", and after the jackpot ends, special symbols and ordinary symbols shift to a high probability state. In this control example, control is performed so that at least one big win is determined after the special symbol shifts to the high probability state and before it shifts to the low probability state. Therefore, the type of jackpot is advantageous in terms of the number of balls (expected number of balls) that the player can obtain from the start of one big win until the game state returns to the normal state.

In addition, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with "jackpot Q". This "jackpot Q" is a jackpot with 6 rounds. Out of 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values become ``jackpot Q'', so when the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in a jackpot, ``jackpot Q'' is determined. The proportion is 50% (50/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "jackpot Q", and after the jackpot ends, the time-saving state of normal symbols is provided 100 times.

On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in a range (whole range) of "0 to 99" in association with "jackpot m". This "jackpot m" is a jackpot with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 100 counter values become ``jackpot m'', so when the lottery of the special pattern 2 results in a jackpot, ``jackpot m'' is determined. The percentage is 100%.

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "jackpot m", and after the jackpot ends, special symbols and normal symbols shift to a high probability state. In this control example, control is performed so that at least one big win is determined after the special symbol shifts to the high probability state and before it shifts to the low probability state. Therefore, the type of jackpot is advantageous in terms of the number of balls (expected number of balls) that the player can obtain from the start of one big win until the game state returns to the normal state.

In other words, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the special symbol 2 is defined to be more advantageous (easily transition to a high-probability state).

As described above, in this control example, the game shifts to a high probability state in which the player wins more in the lottery with the special symbol 2 than in the case where the lottery with the special symbol 1 results in a big win. It is configured to make it easier. Therefore, once the renso mode (high probability state of special symbols and short time state of normal symbols) is set, the lottery of special symbols 2 is made by entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 by striking to the right. is likely to be executed and the jackpot game is likely to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with one purpose of shifting to the continuous mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, in the round game R of the 6th round, it will be described with reference to FIG. 142 that the operation pattern is controlled to differ according to the jackpot type. In this control example, the first variable winning device 9000 (see FIG. 66) described above in the ninth embodiment will be described.

FIG. 142(a) is a diagram showing changes over time of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 in the twenty-second operation pattern, and FIG. FIG. 142(c) is a diagram showing time-measurement changes of the member 8340, and FIG. 142(c) is a diagram showing time-measurement changes of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 in the twenty-fourth operation pattern.

In this control example, in the round game R of the 6th round of the jackpot P, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are driven in the 22nd operation pattern, and in the round game R of the 6th round of the jackpot Q, the 23rd The opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are driven in the operation pattern, and the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are driven in the 24th operation pattern in the round game R of the 6th round of the jackpot m.

As shown in FIG. 142(a), in the twenty-second operation pattern, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are maintained in an open state (that is, the regulation member 1600 is maintained in a stored state), and the round game R is started. After the standby time TK (eight seconds in this control example) has elapsed from the above, the state of the interference member 6930 changes from the retracted state to the extended state.

In addition, the interference member 6930 returns to the retracted state due to the end of the round game R (skipped when the round game R ends before the standby time TK). Here, in the round game R, the passage of a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls is detected in the first specific winning opening 1000a, or the maximum time of the round game R (in this control example, 30 seconds) will end.

In the round game R of the 6th round of the jackpot P in which the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are drive-controlled in the 22nd operation pattern, the specified number (10 in this control example) is reached before the standby time TK elapses. When the ball enters the first specific winning hole 1000a, the round game R ends without waiting for the waiting time TK.

On the other hand, if the specified number of balls do not enter the first specific winning hole 1000a before the waiting time TK elapses, the interference member 6930 is in a protruding state, and 10 balls can be stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a, and the time required for the round game R becomes the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1.

The standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) is such that, after the end of the round game R of the 5th round, the shooting of the ball is not stopped even in the inter-round interval, and even after the start of the round game R of the 6th round, the shooting of the ball is continued. By continuing the shooting, a period is set in which a specified number of balls (10 balls in this control example) can sufficiently reach the first specific winning hole 1000a. It should be noted that in this control example, the balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

On the other hand, for example, during the interval between rounds from the end of the round game R of the 5th round, when the shooting of the ball is stopped and the shooting of the ball is started at the start of the 6th round, the shot ball From the balance with the time (about 4.0 seconds) to reach the first specific winning opening 1000a, the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) is placed in the first specific winning opening before the waiting time TK elapses. 1000a cannot pass.

Therefore, when the ball is stopped in the inter-round interval immediately before the 6th round round game R, the 6th round round game R is compared to when the ball is continued in the inter-round interval. can be configured to increase the time required for As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the shooting of the ball is stopped during the interval between rounds.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), in the twenty-third operation pattern, the opening/closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulation member 1600 is maintained in the stored state), and before the standby time TK elapses, , only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is driven and controlled to open and close multiple times (one side is opened and closed as shown in FIG. 74). In other words, the control of releasing the drive (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is executed multiple times.

It should be noted that after the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the round game R, the state change of the interference member 6930 from the retracted state to the extended state is the same as in the 22nd operation pattern. .

According to this operation pattern, not all the balls on the opening and closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning hole 1000a, but some balls flow down toward the auxiliary ball entering hole 9111, so the 22nd Before the standby time TK (8 seconds in this control example) elapses, it is possible to make it more difficult for the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) to pass through the first specific winning hole 1000a than in the operation pattern. .

Therefore, with a high probability, the round game R of the 6th round can be made long (30 seconds). On the other hand, unlike the 22nd operation pattern, the payout of prize balls can be received when a ball enters the auxiliary ball entrance 9111, so the number of payouts of prize balls is greater than in the 23rd operation pattern. can do.

As shown in FIG. 142(c), in the twenty-fourth operation pattern, the opening/closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the stored state), and before and after the standby time TK has passed, , only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is driven and controlled to open and close multiple times (one side is opened and closed as shown in FIG. 74). In other words, the control of releasing the drive (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is executed multiple times.

After the waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) has passed since the start of the round game R, the state change of the interference member 6930 from the retracted state to the extended state is the 22nd operation pattern and the 23rd operation pattern. Similar to actuation pattern.

In this operation pattern, not all the balls on the opening/closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning hole 1000a, but some balls flow down toward the auxiliary ball entering hole 9111 (see FIG. 66). As in the twenty-third operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the probability that the round game R will end when the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) pass through the first specific winning hole 1000a.

Therefore, with a high probability, the round game R of the 6th round can be made long (30 seconds). On the other hand, unlike the 23rd operation pattern, the ball can be entered into the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66) even after the waiting time TK has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to generate payout of prize balls caused by entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 . Therefore, more prize balls can be paid out than in the twenty-third operation pattern.

In this operation pattern, even after the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, control is performed so that one-sided opening and closing occurs. That is, even after the storage channel 1231 is filled with balls (filled up) and the balls stay on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 66), one-sided opening and closing occurs, so the arrangement of the balls The ball can be easily guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 when one side is opened and closed, compared to the case where is unspecified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 143(a) and 143(b), the display in the round game R of the 6th round will be described. FIGS. 143(a) and 143(b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the round game R of the sixth round is being executed.

In addition, in FIG. 143 (a), an example of the display of the 6th round round game R when the jackpot type is "jackpot P" or "jackpot Q", or the 6th round game when "jackpot m" A schematic diagram showing an example of the display before the waiting time TK elapses in R is illustrated, and in FIG. A schematic diagram showing an example of a post-lapse display is illustrated.

That is, when the jackpot type is "jackpot P" or "jackpot Q", the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. m", after the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143(a) is maintained, the display is switched to that shown in FIG. The display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143(b) is maintained until the round game R ends.

As shown in FIGS. 143(a) and 143(b), in the third symbol display device 81, the round number display section 714 for displaying the current number of rounds indicates that the sixth round of the round game R is in progress. A sub-round display section 714b is displayed below the round number display section 714 in the form of a sub-round display section 714b for displaying that it is a period in which additional prize balls can be expected in the round game R.

In FIG. 143(a), the round number display portion 714 is illuminated (displayed brightly), while the sub-round display portion 714b is extinguished (displayed darkly). The sub-round display portion 714b is illuminated (brightly displayed) while the portion 714 is extinguished (darkly displayed).

That is, in this control example, the round game R is executed with the display shown in FIG. In addition to informing the player of this fact, after the waiting time TK has elapsed, it is not possible to expect the payout of the prize balls accompanying the entry into the first specific prize winning opening 1000a, but due to the entry into the auxiliary ball entry opening 9111 It is possible to make the player recognize that the period during which the payout of prize balls can be expected continues.

Here, by changing the display to the sub-round display portion 714b, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the change in the substantial profit that the player can obtain by entering the ball. That is, the payout of prize balls due to one ball entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 is three as described above, which is 1/5 of the number of balls entering the first specific prize winning opening 1000a. is. The player can easily recognize the change in the number of winning balls with respect to the number of entering balls.

In addition, the balls flow into the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 only when the balls are placed between the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 during the short time period in which the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened. The ball does not always flow into the auxiliary ball inlet 9111 every time the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened.

Therefore, the frequency of balls entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 during the period when the sub-round display portion 714b is emitting light (bright display) is It is low compared to the frequency of balls entering the first specific winning hole 1000a.

In this way, according to this control example, while notifying that the period of the round game R has not ended, the profit that the player can obtain (change in prize balls paid out with one ball entering, At the same time, it is possible to notify that there is a change in the frequency of ball entry).

In one example of the display in the sixth round of the round game R shown in FIG. 143(b), the characters "+chance" are displayed as the above-described excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721. FIG. In this control example, the character "+chance" indicates that there is a possibility that the ball may enter the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 by shooting the ball, and the entry of the ball into the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 will result in a winning ball. corresponding to being able to receive the payout of

Thus, in this control example, control is performed to pay out additional prize balls due to balls entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 in the round game R. Therefore, in the round game R, the number of prize balls (150 in this control example) paid out to the player when the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls enters the first specific winning hole 1000a A number of prize balls (excess prize balls) can be paid out.

In particular, in the twenty-fourth operation pattern, even after the waiting time TK has elapsed, there is a high possibility that the ball will enter the auxiliary ball entrance 9111, and compared to the other twenty-second and twenty-third operation patterns, the The number of prize balls paid out to the player can be increased. On the other hand, in the operation pattern in this control example, the driving mode of the interference member 6930 is the same.

That is, in the 22nd to 24th operation patterns in this control example, while the driving mode of the interference member 6930 is the same, it is possible to provide a difference in the number of prize balls paid out to the player.

The maximum number of times a ball enters the auxiliary ball opening 9111 corresponds to the number of times the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 opens and closes in the round game R. The number of prize balls can be adjusted.

According to this control example detailed above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

The period required for the next round game R is more likely to be longer when ball shooting is stopped during the inter-round interval period than when ball shooting is continued during the inter-round interval period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the shooting of the ball is stopped during the inter-round interval period.

Depending on the drive mode of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (that is, depending on whether or not the above-described "one-sided opening/closing" occurs), the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the round game R can be positively changed. . In other words, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member determine whether the ball that reaches the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 passes through the first specific prize winning opening 1000a or the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 downstream. It can be switched by the driving mode of the 8340.

As a result, it is possible to separate the timing at which the ball is likely to be guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 and the timing at which the ball is less likely to be guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 . Therefore, for example, during the period of the round game R, the timing at which the ball is likely to be guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be concentrated in a part of the period. In this case, compared to the case where the balls that have reached the circulating movable object are sorted in order of arrival, and a predetermined number of the number of reaching balls are guided to the winning opening (the winning opening corresponding to the auxiliary ball opening 9111). As a result, attention in the vicinity of the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be improved.

That is, by shooting balls at timing when balls are likely to be guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 and stopping shooting balls at other timings, it is possible to reduce the number of shot balls with respect to the number of payouts.

On the other hand, the timing at which the ball should be shot aiming at winning the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 is configured to be varied based on the type of jackpot. As a result, the player can be requested to change the shooting mode of the ball for each big win game, so that the player can be easily prevented from casually playing the big win game. In addition, by making it difficult to grasp the type of jackpot, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of strategy strategies, and it is possible to prevent specific players (experienced players) from making excessive profits (for example, the number of balls paid out rather than the number of balls fired). increase) can be prevented from occurring.

The auxiliary ball entrance 9111 is arranged at a position where the ball is not guided (difficult to be guided) when the opening/closing plate 8300 is not driven (de-excited). As a result, compared to the case where the ball is guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 at the timing when the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are not driven, the player's concentration on the game can be improved.

In the round game R, the player can easily grasp the change in the expected value of the number of paid out prize balls with respect to the number of balls reaching the first variable winning device 9000 from the display of the display device (third symbol display device 81). configured as As a result, while the same round game R is continuing, the player can arbitrarily easily select whether to continue shooting the ball or stop shooting the ball from the display on the display device.

Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148. FIG. First, the ROM 202 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third control example. The ROM 202 includes a first win random number table 202a, a second win random number table 202c, a first win type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, and an opening/closing plate And in addition to the interference member operation scenario table 202f, at least a small hit type selection table 202g is provided.

This small hit type selection table 202g is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is achieved based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is something that can be done.

The contents of the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 145(a) to 145(c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a.

The first winning random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 145(a), determines whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C3 obtained by entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is a jackpot. The special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C3 obtained by entering the game ball into the second winning opening 640 determines whether or not it is a big win. It is a table in which a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for is set.

Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is, as shown in FIG. It is a table in which (determination value) is set. In the lottery for the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C3 is "0". Also, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C3 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small winning. Otherwise, if the value is determined to be "4 to 319", it is determined to be out of range.

On the other hand, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, as shown in FIG. 145(c), is a random value (judgment value) determined as winning in the second special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640. is a set table. In the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the obtained first winning random number counter C3 is "0". Also, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C3 is "1 to 318", and if it is "1 to 318", it is determined to be a small winning. Otherwise, if it is determined to be "319", it is determined to be out.

Thus, the first hit random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-319. In the first winning random number counter C3, when the first special symbol is selected based on the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64, the number of random numbers that become the jackpot of the first special symbol is one, and the total number of random numbers is Out of 320, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 1, so the probability that the first special symbol will be a big win is "1/320". In addition, since the total number of random numbers that become a small win is 3, the probability that the first special symbol will become a small win is "3/320".

On the other hand, at the time of the lottery for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640, the number of random numbers that will be the big hit for the second special symbol is one. Since the total number of random numbers is 1, the probability of winning the second special symbol is "1/320". In addition, since the total number of random numbers that become a small win is 318, the probability that the second special symbol will become a small win is "318/320".

It should be noted that, as in each of the above-described embodiments and control examples, when it is determined that the normal symbol wins, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, "○" is displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbol is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

The electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time is shortened, but is opened only for 0.2 seconds when the time is not shortened. Therefore, even if the value of the second winning random number counter C5 is a winning when the time is not shortened, it is difficult to win the game ball into the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which a ball is made to enter the second winning hole 640 even though the time saving is not in effect (the jackpot with the time saving is not appearing).

FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 146) is, similarly to the above, a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C4 is It is defined in correspondence with the jackpot type and the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C4 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C4 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first ball opening 64) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 49". is defined in association with the jackpot R (see 202b21 in FIG. 146).

When the jackpot R is reached, 16 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a time-saving state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is completed 100 times. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2400 prize balls.

The value of the first winning type counter C4 is defined in the range of "50 to 99" in association with the jackpot S (see 202b22 in FIG. 146).

When the jackpot S is reached, 16 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes the normal state. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2400 prize balls, but cannot obtain the advantage of the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends.

In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special pattern 1 (lottery based on the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64), the game state after the jackpot game is finished can be set to the time-saving state with a probability of 50%. During the time saving, you will aim to acquire a further big hit by a small winning game to be described later.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640), the value of the first winning type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 9". n is associated and defined (see 202b23 in FIG. 146). This jackpot n provides the player with the same benefits as the jackpot R described above.

That is, 16 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a time-saving state (100 times) until the variation of the special symbol is digested 100 times. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2400 prize balls.

The value of the first hit type counter C4 is defined in the range of "10 to 99" in association with the jackpot p (see 202b24 in FIG. 146). This jackpot p provides the player with the same payout of prize balls as the jackpot n described above, but is provided with a difference in the number of fluctuations in the time-saving game.

That is, 16 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a time-saving state (four times) until the variation of the special symbol is digested four times. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2400 prize balls.

As described above, the jackpot that occurs in the lottery for the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640) shifts to the time saving state with a probability of 100%. Therefore, compared with the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 results in a big win, the possibility of winning the next big win in a short time after the big win game ends is increased.

As described above, during the time saving of the special symbols, the winning probability of the normal symbols is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of winning the normal symbols. It is set to be longer (5 seconds or 0.5 seconds). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 640, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. When the lottery of the special pattern 2 results in a big hit, the working hours are shortened after the big win is finished, so that the big win by the lottery of the special pattern 2 can be obtained more easily.

Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the time-saving state of the special symbols, the special symbols are likely to be a big win, and when the big wins, the time-saving state of the special symbols is likely to be a big win G. It becomes easy to acquire a lot of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while strongly expecting to shift to the time-saving state of the special symbols, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the number of reserved special symbols are related to each other, and the ball passes through the specific area 4830 (in this control example, the passage of the ball leads to the next big hit). It is determined whether or not to pass through the defined area (see FIG. 51), the details of which will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the contents of the small winning type selection table 202g will be described. Figures 147(a) to 147(c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g.

The small winning type selection table 202g includes a special symbol 1 small winning selection table 202g1 for selecting a small winning type based on the first entrance 64 and a small winning selection table 202g1 for selecting a small winning based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small winning selection table 202g2 for selecting a winning type (see FIG. 147(a)).

As shown in FIG. 147(b), at the time of the small hit based on the first entrance 64, if the value of the small hit type counter C6 is "0 to 1", the small hit A is selected, and "2 to 99 ”, the small hit B is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147(c), when the value of the first winning type counter C6 is "0 to 9" at the time of the small winning based on the second winning opening 640, the small winning A is selected, and "10 ~99”, the small hit B is selected.

In this control example, the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 is set according to the small hit type (see FIG. 148). Although the details will be described later, the small hit A is a small hit that is given with a high probability of a big hit by passing the game ball through the specific area 4830, and the small hit B is a small hit that is not given with a high probability. .

In addition, in this control example, the big win given after the small win A and the small win B is configured to be the big win G (16R short time with big win).

In addition, in this embodiment, according to the type of the small hit, the type of the jackpot to be granted after that is determined, but as other specifications, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the type of the jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the right of the jackpot is acquired), and in the subsequent jackpot game, the game ball passes through the specific area 4830 to execute the jackpot that has just been acquired. may By doing so, the player can select a small win to pass through the specific area 4830, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Figure 148 is a diagram showing the timing change of the opening and closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the distribution device 4850 in the small winning A and the timing change of the opening and closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the distribution device 4850 in the small winning B (see FIG. 51) is. Incidentally, the operation of the sorting device 4850 is the same for the small hit A and the small hit B.

Note that FIG. 148 omits the illustration of the difference between the operation timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the timing of driving the solenoid 1510, and is illustrated assuming that the operation starts at the same time.

First, the outline of the operation in the small hit A will be described. In the small win A, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the opening and closing plate 1300 is kept open for 1.0 seconds from the start of the small win. excitation) is released. After 0.2 seconds from the release of the excitation, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) again, and after the open/close plate 1300 is kept open for 0.6 seconds, the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released.

Next, the outline of the operation in the small hit B will be described. In the small win B, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the opening and closing plate 1300 is kept open for 1.8 seconds from the start of the small win, and after 1.8 seconds the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited). ) is canceled.

In this way, the small winning A and the small winning B differ in whether or not the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed during the small winning game while the time itself of the small winning game is the same (1.8 seconds). .

In this control example, when the small hit game is started immediately after the end of the small hit game, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol remains and the small hit game occurs continuously, between the small hit games The period during which the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is set to 0.4 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in the above-described mode, when the small winning game occurs continuously, even if two or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 51), it is discharged from the discharge port 1150 between the small winning games. The number of spheres drawn is limited to two. Therefore, the ball that entered the storage channel 1231 in the previous small winning game can remain in the storage channel 1231 during the next small winning game.

An operation mode of the sorting device 4850 will be described. The distribution device 4850 maintains the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed position until 2.0 seconds have passed since the solenoid 1510 was started to be driven (excited) at the start of the small winning game, and when 2.0 seconds have passed The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position and maintained for 0.5 seconds, and after 0.5 seconds have passed, the distribution operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again. In addition, the distribution device 4850 moves the distribution operation member 4851 to the open position after 3.2 seconds from the start of driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 at the start of the small winning game and maintains it for 0.5 seconds, After 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the solenoid 4852 is driven (excited) so as to return the distribution operation member 4851 to the closed position again.

That is, the distribution operation member 4851 moves to the open position twice for one small winning game. The first movement corresponds to 1 second after the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed in the small hit A (corresponding to the time elapsed until the ball passing through the discharge port 1150 reaches the distribution operation member 4851). .

From this, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is driven by the small hit A, if the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 in advance, the ball passes through the specific area 4830 when the distribution operation member 4851 moves for the first time. can be made On the other hand, the probability of the small hit A occurring is 10% in the case of the special symbol 2, so it is difficult to frequently cause the ball to pass through the specific area 4830 at this timing.

The second movement of the distribution operation member 4851 is 1.4 seconds after the end of the small winning game (equivalent to immediately after the second ball that has passed through the discharge port 1150 has passed the distribution operation member 4851). Equivalent to. That is, the second movement is a mode in which the balls are not allowed to enter the specific area 4830 if the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the end of the small winning game is two or less.

That is, according to this control example, when only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the time-saving game, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 unless the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes 0. can be configured as

As a result, when only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the time saving game, the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 can be limited to when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes zero. In this case, it is possible to obtain a large number of paid-out prize balls in the time-saving game by the prize balls paid out by the game in which the balls are continuously put into the second ball entrance 640 so that the number of reserved balls does not become zero.

On the other hand, it is difficult to pass the ball through the specific area 4830 while the ball continues to enter the second ball entrance 640. , the player needs to create a timing to set the number of held balls of the second special symbol to 0 in the time-saving game. Thus, in the time-saving game, when the number of remaining time-saving times becomes small, it is possible to increase the profit that the player can obtain by frequently setting the number of reserved balls to 0. - 特許庁

According to the setting of the second movement, if the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is three, the balls pass through the specific region 4830, but this is not the only option. That is, the number of balls to be discharged may be set to be larger than the number (two) discharged at the shortest interval (0.4 seconds) of the small winning game. The second movement may be set at the timing of passing (1.8 seconds from the end of the small winning game). In addition, the shortest interval of the small winning game may be set at 0.2 seconds (the number of ejections is 1), and in this case, the second movement may be larger than the number of ejections (1). It may be set, for example, the second movement may be set at the timing when the second ball passes through the specific area 4830 (1.2 seconds from the end of the small winning game).

In addition, since the average number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 in one small winning game is about 1 or 2, the storage channel 1231 By accumulating spheres in , the possibility of spheres passing through the specific region 4830 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to select the timing of setting the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 to 0, depending on the number of balls in the storage channel 1231 which increases or decreases each time a small winning game is played. As a result, attention to the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

In this control example, the longer the period of the time-saving game, the more prize balls to be paid out due to the balls entering the second ball entrance 640 . Here, by setting the number of prize balls in the second ball entrance 640, the player can select whether to shorten or lengthen the period of the time-saving game.

For example, if the number of prize balls in the second ball entrance 640 is 1, there is no profit (the number of prize balls paid out) that the player can obtain by deducting the number of shots (0). Therefore, it is more profitable for the player to shorten the time-saving game period.

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls in the second ball entrance 640 is 2 or more (for example, 5), there is a profit (the number of prize balls paid out) that the player can obtain by deducting the number of shots (1 ball). that's all). Therefore, it may be more profitable for the player to suppress the entry of the ball into the specific area 4830 and lengthen the period of the time-saving game.

In this control example, the opening time of the opening and closing plate 1300 for one small winning game is set in 1.8 seconds from the first opening start to closing, so to the first specific winning opening 1000a in one small winning game Although the number of balls entered is 3 or 4, it is not limited to this. For example, by configuring the open pattern of the small hit game with an open pattern in which the opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times, more balls (for example, 10 balls ) can be configured to be able to enter the first specific winning hole 1000a. In this case, for example, by arranging the drop retardation plate 3250 described in the third embodiment, even if the opening time of the opening/closing plate 1300 is short, the sphere will fall at the lower end of the opening/closing plate 1300 when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed. It is possible to prolong the time until the ball falls downward, and the ball can be guided to the first specific winning hole 1000a.

In this control example, since the ball is controlled to be able to be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the shortest interval (0 .4 second interval), the number of small winning games for the number of balls that can be shot is 11 balls/3 times. That is, a maximum of 11 balls can be shot during three small winning games.

Here, in order to generate a small winning game, it is necessary to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so when the number of balls held in the second ball entrance 640 is 0, such as when starting to hit to the right , it is necessary to enter three balls into the second ball entrance 640 as the number of balls for generating three small winning games. Therefore, the remaining 8 balls deviate from the second ball entrance 640 and go to the first specific prize winning opening 1000a. In the small winning game of 3 times, for example, when all the small winnings are the above-mentioned small winnings B, 6 balls are discharged by passing through the small winning game of 3 times. Therefore, two balls remain in the storage channel 1231 after three small winning games. Therefore, the expected number of balls additionally remaining in the storage channel 1231 when the balls are continuously shot is two for three small winning games.

It should be noted that the ball that has passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a in the small winning game is not discharged if it has not reached the lower end of the storage channel 1231 . It takes 2 seconds to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231 from the first specific winning port 1000a, and considering that the opening in the small winning game ends in 1.8 seconds, the small winning game Before the ball that has passed through the 1 specific winning opening 1000a reaches the lower end of the storage channel 1231, it may occur that the opening of the next small winning game is started.

Therefore, when the balls start to accumulate in the storage channel 1231 (when they are not 0, the first time), the small winning game in a state where they are not 0 (for example, in a state where two balls remain in the storage channel 1231 It is possible to make it easier for the balls to remain in the storage channel 1231 as compared to when the balls are additionally increased in the executed small winning game, continuous round).

On the other hand, if the number of held balls at the second ball entrance 640 is not 0, even if three balls do not enter the second ball entrance 640, the remaining number of held balls and the new If the number of balls entering the second ball entrance 640 exceeds 3, three small winning games can be executed at the shortest interval (0.4 second interval). In this case, the number of balls heading to the first specific winning port 1000a is 8 or more during three small winning games, and more balls can be directed to the storage channel 1231, and three small winning games are performed. , more than two spheres can be additionally left in the reservoir channel 1231.

As described above, in this control example, the small winning game generated based on entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 is maintained so as to continue at the shortest interval, and as many balls as possible are put into the second ball. It is controlled so that it is more profitable for the player to enter the ball into the 1 specific winning hole 1000a and leave the ball in the storage channel 1231.例文帳に追加Therefore, when the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 does not participate in the occurrence of the small winning game (when the number of reserved balls is full (4 in this control example)), the ball enters the second ball inlet 640. Entering the ball is disadvantageous for the player from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls and the viewpoint of increasing the number of balls left additionally in the storage channel 1231 ( may be disadvantageous to the player).

Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in a right-handed game.

Here, in this control example, when aiming to pass the ball through the specific area 4830, when the number of held balls at the second ball entrance 640 becomes zero, more than two balls are stored. It needs to be stored in the channel 1231 . In other words, if the number of balls held in the second ball entrance 640 is more than twice the number of balls held in the second ball entrance 640, the number of balls held must be reduced. It is configured so that it is difficult to Thereby, in addition to attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, attention to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

In this control example, the adjustment of the game area (gauge configuration, nail adjustment, etc.) is an adjustment that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the normal ball entrance 67 during the right-handed game, so that more balls enter the second ball entrance 640. However, it is possible to reduce the loss given to the player even with the adjustment that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 and that many balls are likely to go to the first specific prize winning opening 1000a.

That is, for example, when the adjustment is such that a large number of balls enter the second ball inlet 640 during the right-handed game, the balls are less likely to accumulate in the storage channel 1231, and while the occurrence of the small winning game B continues Although it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific area 4830, if the small winning game A selected with a probability of 10% occurs, the ball can pass through the specific area 4830, so the ball enters the specific area 4830. By entering a large number of balls into the second ball entrance 640 during the period, it is possible to aim to pay out a large number of prize balls.

Also, for example, when the ball is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the right-handed game and many balls are likely to go to the first specific winning hole 1000a, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. Since it is difficult to enter, most of the game balls hit to the right can be entered into the storage channel 1231, and in addition, the number of reserved special symbols 2 based on the entry into the second ball entrance 640 is 0. Since it is easily maintained, it becomes easy to discharge two or more balls in the first small winning game. Therefore, since it is easy to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 at an early stage, it is possible to end the time-saving game early, and a period in which a loss occurs due to the ball being difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640 (that is, the time-saving game period) can be shortened.

In addition, in this control example, since the opening/closing plate 1300 and the first specific winning opening 1000a are configured to be used in the small winning game, it is desirable to separately prepare the winning opening used in the big winning game. For example, as described in the second embodiment, the second specific winning opening 2255a different from the first specific winning opening 1000a may be set as the winning opening used in the jackpot game.

In this case, the storage channels 1231 do not necessarily have to merge. The second specific prize winning port 2255a may not constitute the storage channel (the ball may be discharged to the ball discharge channel).

Note that this control example exemplifies one means of the technical idea related to the gaming machine that ``the player can select the timing for the ball to flow into the specific area 4830 (the player can aim)''. may be used.

For example, a small hit (small hit A in this control example) that drives (excites) the opening and closing plate 1300 in a drive mode that makes it easy for the ball to flow into the specific area 4830 (flows in), and a small hit that makes it difficult for the ball to flow into the specific area 4830 ( In the control mode in which the small win (small win B in this control example) that drives (excites) the opening and closing plate 1300 in the drive mode (does not flow in) is selected according to the small win type, the game determines which small win is executed. By controlling to notify the player, and controlling to include the case where the ball fired after grasping the contents of the notification can pass through the specific area 4830, the timing of making the ball flow into the specific area 4830 is played. It may also be possible to allow the user to select. According to this, it is possible to allow a "game mode in which the ball is not shot into the specific area 4830 by not firing at a predetermined timing".

Note that the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be notified by the display of the third pattern display device 81, or may be notified by voice.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the embodiments described above, the storage channel 1231 is configured as a channel extending on a plane, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage channel 1231 may be configured to extend in the front-rear direction by bending the right side of a plane perpendicular to the left-right direction by 90 degrees. That is, the flow path may extend in the left-right direction from the detection sensor 1240 to the bending position, extend in the front-rear direction from the bending position, and extend in the left-right direction again on the upstream side of the discharge port 1150 .

The channel extending in the front-rear direction has a channel shape in which the shape of the storage channel 1231 is diverted and the extending direction is switched from the left and right to the front and back (rotated 90 degrees about the vertical axis). It is formed by combining two substantially symmetrical light-transmitting members, each of which has a concave portion forming one side surface of the flow path on the opposite side, from the left and right.

A storage channel 1231 including a channel extending back and forth has a direction different from that of the above embodiment, but the number of balls that can be stored downstream of the first specific prize winning port 1000a is a specified number (10 in this embodiment). is designed to be That is, even in this embodiment, it is possible to configure a game property similar to the game property described in each of the above embodiments.

With respect to the storage channel 1231 including the channel extending back and forth, the solenoid 6910 is driven (excited) to enter the channel and restrict the flow of the ball in the channel. When the driving (excitation) of is released, an interference member is provided that can be switched between a retracted state and a retracted state that allows the ball to flow down in the flow channel.

Here, the arrangement of the interfering member with respect to the flow path is the same as in the sixth embodiment. That is, among the balls stored on the downstream side of the first specific prize winning port 1000a, the flow path extends forward and backward on the upstream side of the second ball counted from the lowest ball whose flow is regulated by the regulating member 1600. 7 balls enter the inside and are disposed so as to be able to regulate the flow of the third ball. of balls can be stored.

The flow path extending back and forth is formed so that the third and subsequent balls are stored behind the second ball counted from the lowest ball whose flow is restricted by the restricting member 1600 . Therefore, when the second sphere is arranged, the sphere is arranged on the front side of the interference member, so that the interference member is hidden by the sphere. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the state of the interference member with the sphere.

Compared to the case where the stored spheres are arranged side by side, the entire sphere cannot be visually recognized, and the flow path itself extends to the back side, so the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the visible object is increased. When the storage channel 1231 includes a channel extending back and forth due to a reason such as being far away, the state in which ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 by retracting the interference member and the interference member is protruding, and it is difficult to grasp the state in which nine balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 from the arrangement of the balls. Therefore, according to this embodiment, even if the first variable prize winning device 1000 is directly viewed, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the number of stored balls.

In the case of having such a feature, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may display the number of balls entering the first specific winning hole 1000a. In this case, the number of balls entered into the first specific winning hole 1000a can be grasped by looking at the third symbol display device 81 rather than by visually recognizing the storage channel 1231, which is difficult to distinguish the number of stored balls. Since it can be configured to be easy, the attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be relatively improved with respect to the attention to the first variable winning device 1000 . Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to remove the player's line of sight from the first variable winning device 1000 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is controlled by the operating length of the regulating member 1600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging the ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port regulating member for opening and closing the second discharge port are provided so that the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port. You can do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls stored between the second outlet and the first outlet from being discharged without strictly controlling the operating length of the second outlet restricting member. Therefore, it is possible to change the number of discharged balls depending on whether the balls are discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port. Also, in this case, for example, if the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be opened at the same time, it is possible to shorten the time required for global discharge of the ball, and shorten the interval.

In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the opening/closing plate 1300 rotates has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is composed of an opening and closing plate 1300 that moves up and down, and can guide a ball to the first specific winning hole 1000a when placed at the upper position, and can guide the ball from the first specific winning hole 1000a when placed at the lower position. may be diverted. In this case, when the ball is lifted, it is not necessary to position the ball between the opening/closing plate 1300 and the covering front plate 3200, so that the ball can be lifted more smoothly.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged from the single discharge port 1710, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, additional outlets may be placed in the middle of the reservoir channel 1231 . In this case, the maximum ejectable number can be changed depending on whether to eject from the ejection port 1710 or from the additional ejection port. In other words, it becomes difficult to discharge the clogged ball on the side of the discharge port 1710 from the additional discharge port. In addition, by simultaneously opening both discharge ports to discharge the ball, the discharge efficiency of the ball can be increased, and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the sorting device 4850 of the probability variation determination unit 4800 starts operating based on the operation timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, depending on the number of balls that pass through the probability variation determination channel 4820 within a predetermined time, the weight of the balls may cause the state to change. In this case, whether or not the right to transition to the high-probability state can be acquired can be switched depending on the number of ejected balls, regardless of the ejection speed (interval) of the balls.

In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the operation start timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the operation start timing of the regulating member 1600 are slightly deviated has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, they may start operating at the same time. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the ball entry resistance changes depending on whether or not there is a gap for the ball to enter in the storage channel 1231 (whether or not the storage channel 1231 is in a full state) has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, depending on whether or not the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is close to the full state, a predetermined ball entering the storage channel 1231 may be decelerated. In this case, even if the specified number (count number) of the round game R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage channel 1231, it is possible to suppress the winning of the specified number or more. Also, in this case, compared to the case where the balls are decelerated irrespective of the number of stored balls, it is possible to prevent the big win game from being slowed down while suppressing the winning of a predetermined number or more. It should be noted that not only deceleration but also acceleration may be used. In this case, it is possible to intentionally cause more than the prescribed number of prizes to be won.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231, and the stored ball is restricted from entering the first specific winning hole 1000a. do not have. For example, there may be provided a non-electric driven member that moves by a predetermined amount when the ball that reaches the specific winning hole 1000a passes through, and that makes it easy to restrict the entry of the ball in a certain posture. In this case, the time required for the interval between rounds can be shortened as compared with the case where the stored balls are discharged at once.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where a specified number of balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the number of balls is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be possible to store a specified number of balls plus one. In this case, the number of balls passing through the first specific winning hole 1000a in excess of the prescribed number can be limited to one per round game R. Also, in this case, a round in which the 11th ball can easily pass and a round in which the passage of the 11th ball is restricted may be switched for each round.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the opening/closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball cannot be held in front of the first specific winning hole 1000a (the ball will drop), so two balls will not win at the same time. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one ball may be held, and the ball may pass through the first specific prize winning opening 1000a until the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed. Moreover, the presence or absence of this possibility may be switched for each round.

In the above-described second embodiment, the storage channel 1231 has a plurality of inlets and a single outlet, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of outlets may be provided in the storage channel, and the channel may be branched toward the outlets along the way. In this case, a predetermined number of balls can remain in the storage channel 1231 regardless of which outlet the balls are discharged from.

In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored when entering from the first specific winning hole 1000a is configured to be the same as the prescribed winning number (count number) in the round game R of the jackpot game has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of balls that can be stored when entering from the first specific winning hole 1000a is less than the specified winning number (count number) in the round game R, and the number of balls that can be stored when entering from the second specific winning hole 2255a may be equal to or greater than the prescribed winning number (count number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to construct a game feature in which the round time is inevitably extended when the ball is entered from the first specific prize winning opening 1000a while the whole ball is discharged every time at the interval between rounds.

In the above-described third embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that has flowed down the opening/closing plate 1300 is again lifted upward by the opening/closing plate 1300, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be lifted by a fixed action movable accessory that can pick up the ball. In this case, the player can be entertained by the movement of the ball.

In the third embodiment, the case where the delay member (fall retardation plate 3250) is arranged below the opening/closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening/closing plate 1300 may be formed so as to slide in a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and a rib projecting from the board surface or the glass plate side to the game area may be arranged above the opening/closing plate 1300 . When the opening/closing plate 1300 that slides is in the open state, the balls do not come into contact with the ribs, and when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the balls come into contact with the ribs. As a result, even above the opening/closing plate 1300, the falling speed of the ball can be changed to delay the falling.

As a method for preventing the ball from coming into contact with the rib, it is possible to move the ball toward the front or back by tilting the ball in the front-rear direction, and arrange the rib on the opposite side.

In the above-described third embodiment, the fall retardation plate 3250 arranged on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 delays the flow of the ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be arranged on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 , and a channel connecting the inlet and the outlet may be configured by a curved channel passing through the back side of the opening/closing plate 1300 . In this case, the ball that once becomes invisible to the player by the opening/closing plate 1300 by passing through the entrance from the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and flowing down the back side of the opening/closing plate 1300 is ejected from the exit again. In addition, since the area for delaying the ball is not limited to the area on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300, the ball is delayed until the next round starts even if the interval is long. It is possible to secure a sufficient section for

It is desirable that the entrance be below the opening/closing plate 1300 and the exit be above the opening/closing plate 1300 . Further, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, it is preferable that the opening of the entrance is narrowed by a part of the opening/closing plate 1300 to such an extent that the passage of the ball can be prevented. In this case, the opening/closing plate 1300 can prevent the ball from entering the entrance when the opening/closing plate 1300 is open.

In the above-described third embodiment, the ball is decelerated by moving the facing surface 3251a of the extended plate portion 3251 away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 toward the downstream side. It is not limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 may be configured to become gentler toward the downstream side. In this case, the component of the gravitational acceleration in the downward flow direction of the ball becomes small, and the ball can be decelerated.

Also, the change in acceleration/deceleration may be reversed. If the ball accelerates as it goes downstream, it is possible to prevent continuous balls from forming on the fall retardation plate 3250 .

In the above-described third embodiment, the fall retardation plate 3250 is arranged below the opening/closing plate 1300 so that only the ball that has passed downward through the opening/closing plate 1300 is brought into contact with the opening/closing plate 1300. However, this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to For example, in a back-and-forth sliding opening/closing plate, in the open state, a ball enters a pocket in which the winning opening is arranged, and in the closed state, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate, and the rolling ball opens and closes. A rib may be arranged that can abut when it reaches the downstream side on the plate. A ball entering the pocket as it is does not come into contact with this rib. In this case, since the ball can be delayed on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the ball from moving up and down along with the operation of the opening/closing plate.

In the third embodiment, the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted at the drop position Pf3, and the ball falls vertically downward at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the drop retardation plate 3250 extends to a position where it passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, and a through hole is formed through which the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 to the right can pass, and the ball is discharged from the through hole. You can do so. In this case, the ball can be placed above the opening/closing plate 1300 even when the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state while the ball is placed in front of the detection sensor 1240 .

Note that this is different from the second drop delay plate 7260 described above in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the drop retardation plate 3250 extends to the position where it passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, the ball that falls at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 and lands on the drop retardation plate 3250 will continue to the right (detection sensor 1240), but the ball that fell to the second fall retardation plate 7260 due to a similar fall once flows down to the left (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) and then falls to the fall retardation plate 3250 again. reach. In other words, the period during which the ball is delayed and the path along which the ball flows are different under the opening/closing plate 1300 .

In the fifth embodiment described above, the passages in which the balls that enter from the second ball entrance 640 and the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a flow down join the storage passage 1231, and the number of entering balls is related to each other. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the spheres may flow into the storage channel 1231 by automatic supply. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 from the start of the game.

In the fifth embodiment described above, in the high-probability state, the greater the number of lotteries to obtain a big win, the less profit the player can obtain. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the greater the number of times the lottery is performed until the jackpot is won, the greater the profit that the player can obtain. In this case, the profit obtained from the jackpot obtained in a short time is small, and the profit obtained from the jackpot obtained in a long time can be increased, so that the time efficiency with respect to the profit obtained by the player can be uniformed.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 to change the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, an operation member may be provided that operates within the storage channel 1231 according to the number of stored balls and changes the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 . In this case, since the motion members move according to the number of stored pieces regardless of the drive timing of the driving device 1500, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to reasons such as the motion timing of the motion members being different from usual.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is changed by forming the protrusion state of the interference member 6930 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the portion forming the storage channel 1231 (particularly, the U-shaped portion) is configured to move in the extending direction (horizontal direction) of the channel to change the channel length of the storage channel 1231. can be In this case, even if the player moves in advance, it is difficult for the player to notice whether or not the player has moved due to the small amount of movement. Therefore, it is possible to form a game feature in which the movement of the member (change in the channel length of the storage channel 1231) is noticed only after the balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. can be improved.

The movement of the member may be performed by the driving force of the solenoid, or only the switching of whether or not the movement is permitted may be performed by the driving device, and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 protrudes with a predetermined number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the overhanging state may be formed before the ball starts entering the storage channel 1231 . In this case, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 can be seven. Also, a pattern in which the ball is stored and then forms the overhanging state and a pattern in which the ball forms the overhanging state before the ball starts entering the storage channel 1231 may be mixed in each round. In this case, a single member can be used to switch between rounds with a pooled number of 7 and rounds with a pooled number of 9.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the interfering member 6930 may be changed to the overhanging state while the ball is being discharged from the storage channel 1231 . In this case, by changing the combination of the timing at which the ball is discharged and the timing at which the interference member 6930 is extended, it is possible to form a plurality of ball discharge patterns.

In the above eighth and ninth embodiments, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is seen as auxiliary, but it is not limited to this. For example, only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 may perform an opening/closing operation, and the opening/closing plate 8300 may be configured as a fixed plate. In this case, a channel may be arranged in the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 to allow the ball to drop from vertically above, thereby preventing the balls from passing the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 to the left. In this case, a limited number of excess winnings can be allowed based on the consecutive pitch mode.

Further, for example, for each round game R, the opening/closing mode of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 may be switched between long-term opening and repetition of short opening. In this case, it is detected by the detection sensor 1240 at the end of the round game R and closed, or closed as an operation pattern before being detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the ball passing through the detection sensor 1240 while it is closed. is detected, the round game R ends, and it is possible to switch whether or not the next release occurs. In this case, compared to the case of long-term opening, the possibility of excessive winning is lower in the case of repeated short-opening, so the possibility of occurrence of excessive winning should be changed according to the difference in the operation pattern. can be done.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are driven by the same driving device has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a dedicated driving device may be provided for each of them and controlled so as to be independently drivable.

In the eighth embodiment described above, when the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are changed to the open state, the opening/closing plate 8300 rotates in a manner of rising forward, and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 rotates leftward. Although the case has been described in which the opening/closing plate 8300 is rotated in such a manner that it approaches from above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axes of both the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are set in parallel (for example, longitudinal axes), and the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 move in opposite directions (for example, one downward and the other upward). You can make it work. In this case, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 can perform an effect such that the ball is sandwiched between them as the state changes.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening/closing plate 8300 includes the ball entry preventing portion 1331 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 may be omitted. In this case, the opening/closing plate 8300 does not close the detection sensor 1240 regardless of the state. Further, for example, the front portion of the ball entry preventing portion 1331 may be recessed so as to be recessed toward the back side. In this case, the period from when the open/close plate 8300 starts changing its state toward the closed state until the passage of the ball of the detection sensor 1240 is disabled can be lengthened.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are described as members for allowing the ball to pass through the first specific winning hole 1000a, but they are not necessarily limited to this. None. For example, by omitting the ball entry prevention part 1331, the permission of the ball to pass through the first specific winning hole 1000a is only switched by the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the opening/closing plate 8300 prevents the ball from passing through the auxiliary ball entry hole. It may be interpreted that the ball is thrown toward 9111 or the first out hole 66 . That is, the opening/closing plate 8300 only has a role of guiding the ball to the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 in the open state, and whether or not the ball is guided to the first specific winning hole 1000a is switched depending on the state of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340. It can be interpreted as In this case, the attention of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 can be improved compared to the attention of the opening/closing plate 8300 .

In the ninth embodiment, a case where a plurality of movable members are provided on the upstream side of the first specific prize winning port 1000a and a drive mode is configured in which one side member is operated to cause the ball to flow down to the auxiliary ball entrance port 9111 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a single movable member (for example, the opening/closing plate 1300) may be used, and the interference member 6930 may be controlled to be in an overhanging state corresponding to the timing when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed. Ball discharge from the storage channel 1231 in the state may be suppressed, or by setting the period in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed (the time required for one ball to be discharged from the discharge port 1150 (0.2 seconds or less), discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 may be suppressed.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 is configured as a general prize winning opening has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a winning opening related to a special symbol lottery. In this case, the ball enters the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 under the control that the special symbol 2 is preferentially fluctuated over the special symbol 1, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be won, so that the jackpot game can be achieved. It is possible to suppress the start of the variation of the special symbol 1 immediately after the end.

In the ninth embodiment, the rolling plate 9112 is configured as a fixed plate, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling plate 9112 is retracted from the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (the state does not collide with the game ball), and the state changes between the state of projecting to the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (the state of colliding with the game ball). It may be configured as a movable plate that is driven and controlled so as to. In this case, various aspects of the operation pattern are exemplified. For example, it may be a fixed operation from turning on the power, or a predetermined operation starting from the start of the jackpot game.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the operation speed of the return operation of the power transmission member 5400 when the solenoid 1510 is de-energized is substantially constant (depends on the restoration mode of the return spring of the solenoid 1510) has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a damper may be provided that applies a load to power transmission member 5400 after auxiliary transmission member 8340 is closed during the return operation of power transmission member 5400 . In this case, the period during which the opening/closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state after the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed can be lengthened, thereby facilitating control of one-side opening.

In the ninth embodiment, the case of switching the ball entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 has been described on the premise that the opening/closing plate 8300 changes its state toward the open state, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that balls can enter the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 at a predetermined rate while the opening/closing plate 8300 maintains the closed state. For example, another movable object that performs a constant motion may be arranged, and the ball may enter the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 when the ball collides with the movable object.

In the tenth embodiment, the movement of the movable member 10181 causes balls to be ejected from the middle of the storage channel 1231, and the number of balls equal to or greater than the number that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can pass through the first specific winning port 1000a. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the volume of the storage channel 1231 may be configured to be variable. In this case, the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be made to correspond to the number of balls that have passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a, so that it is possible to prevent players from being confused.

In the above first control example, the case where the surroundings of the first variable prize winning device 6000 are brightly lit based on the operation of the operation button 300 and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the brightly lit location need not be in the vicinity of the first variable winning device 6000, and may be a wide area including the first variable winning device 6000 (center frame 86, etc.).

Various modes are exemplified as means for changing the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b. For example, the sound lamp controller 113 is provided with a predetermined clock pulse generation circuit, which transmits lighting mode data to the lamp controller 227 at the rising edge of the clock pulse, and corresponds to the transmitted data at the falling edge of the clock pulse. A lamp may be turned on. In this case, when turning off the lamp, data corresponding to the turning off may be transmitted to the lamp control device 227 . Also, a combination with a latch may be used.

Alternatively, a plurality of types of lighting pattern tables may be prepared in advance, and the lighting mode of the lamp control device 227 may be switched by switching the tables. Further, the lighting mode may be switched by combining this lighting pattern table and the clock described above. Also, the display mode may be changed by setting a command, or may be controlled using a serial port driver.

The intensity of light emission of the lamp control device 227 may be based on a so-called dynamic lighting method (a lighting method that produces a difference in brightness by changing the time interval between lighting and extinguishing), or may be based on voltage level.

In the first control example described above, the transmission lamp 227b is kept lit when the operation effect is successful, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the operation button 300 is pressed, the transmission lamp 227b may be turned on for a short period of time (instantaneously). In this case, attention to the storage channel 1231 can be improved. Further, based on the success of the operation effect, instead of turning on the lamp, for example, it may be notified how many remaining balls should be entered into the storage channel 1231 .

In the first control example, five or more balls are stored upstream of the interference member 6930, and the interference member 6930 is retracted by operating the operation button 300, thereby allowing the balls to flow into the specific region 4830. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of balls stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is set to 4 or less, and the interference member 6930 is put in a retracted state, so that a general winning hole is arranged at a position through which the stored balls can pass. You can In this case, the interference member 6930 can be configured as a so-called "holding device".

In the first control example, the case where the number of balls to be entered in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed is notified by display, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the round in which the operation effect is executed may be advanced by one round, and the number of balls to be entered in the storage channel 1231 may be notified in the round game after the round in which the operation effect is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls from accumulating too much in the reservoir channel 1231 before the notification.

Also, when the number of balls to be entered in the storage channel 1231 is notified in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed, it is necessary to notify the number of balls to be entered in the storage channel 1231. It is desirable to have the notification performed during a period of time that would be inadequate if the As a result, even if the balls are continuously shot from the start of the round game R, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which too many balls enter the storage channel 1231 at the execution timing of the notification.

In the above-described first control example, a case has been described in which the movement speed of the display pointer 719 is the same in the operation presentation, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the number of displayed pointers may be changed based on predetermined conditions. As the predetermined conditions, for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols required to hit the jackpot, points accumulated by the number of games played, and the like are exemplified. In this case, for example, when the number of fluctuations in the special symbols is large or when the privilege is high, by controlling the difficulty of the operation production to be low, the burden (the number of fluctuations, the number of fluctuations, The greater the number of games played, the greater the profit that the player can obtain from the operation presentation.

Here, examples of the difficulty level include the difficulty level of the operation presentation itself, the difficulty level of profit acquisition after the operation presentation, and the like. As a case where the degree of difficulty of profit acquisition after the operation effect is high, for example, the execution timing of the operation effect and the accompanying notification is the latter half of the round game R (the period during which the specified number of balls can enter the storage channel 1231 has elapsed) later) is exemplified. In this case, a situation may occur in which the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 exceeds the number reported as the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 at the timing of notification.

Also, the difficulty level of the operation presentation itself may be associated with the difficulty level of profit acquisition after the operation presentation. For example, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is slow, it is easy to successfully perform the operation itself, but since it takes a long time to reach the operation timing, There is a possibility that more balls than the reported number will enter the ball. On the other hand, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is fast, it is difficult to succeed in the operation itself, but the time elapses until the operation timing is short. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the number exceeding the number reported as.

Since the duration of the remaining round game R differs depending on the difference in execution timing of the notification, the adopted display effect may be controlled to be switchable in correspondence with the duration of the remaining round game R. For example, when the duration of the remaining round game R is short, the display effect is configured with a moving image that can be finished in a short period, and when the remaining round game R is sufficiently long, a moving image that continues for a long time is displayed. You can compose a performance. In this case, for example, it is possible to prevent the problem that the loading of the moving image is not completed in the remaining time of the round game R, and the round game R ends without being displayed.

In the first control example described above, the number of balls to be entered in the storage channel 1231 is nine, which is less than the specified number, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an extremely small number (for example, two) of balls may be allowed to enter the storage channel 1231 so that the player's profit can be increased. In this case, the player can be urged to stop shooting the ball at the start of the announced round. Also, at the same time, the third symbol display device 81 or the like may give a notification such as "stop firing".

In the first control example described above, the case where the interference member 6930 operates immediately when the operation button 300 is pressed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation timing of the operation button 300 and the operation timing of the interference member 6930 in the operation presentation may be shifted by a predetermined period. In this case, it is possible to prevent the operation button 300 from being operated with reference to the state of the vicinity of the interference member 6930 (ball flowing state), and it is possible to improve the attention to the operation effect.

In the first control example, the timing at which the error command is set in S1515 is the timing at which the balls are discharged from the storage passage 1231, and the solenoid 1510 is turned off. If the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 even after it is set, discharge from the storage channel 1231 is continued, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, another movable object that regulates passage of the ball through the discharge port 1150 is provided, and is driven (excited) to allow passage of the ball through the discharge port 1150 when the power is turned on, and while an error command is generated. may be controlled to change state so as to restrict the passage of the sphere. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 from being discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the timing when the error command is issued. When an error command is set due to deceleration due to stains, etc., the disadvantage caused to the player can be reduced. After that, by canceling the error command by turning off the power, etc., and turning on the power again, the game can be restarted from the state where the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 (the state immediately before the error command is set). .

It should be noted that the control of this movable object is not limited to control based on whether or not an error command is set. For example, it may be controlled so that the state changes depending on whether the power is turned on or off. In this case, for example, it is possible to prevent the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 from being discharged from the storage channel 1231 when the game cannot be continued due to a sudden power outage or the like.

Also, the control of this movable object may be changed depending on whether or not the RAM 203 is cleared before and after the power is turned off. For example, even if it is discovered that the error command was set based on fraudulent activity and the RAM 203 is cleared, there is no need to restart the game from the state immediately before the error command was set. The movement of the movable object may be controlled to discharge the balls from the storage channel 1231 before restarting the game.

In addition, the form of this movable object is not limited at all. For example, a driving device may be provided separately and the restricting member 1600 may be used as a means for preventing ball ejection. An interference member 6930 may be employed as the movable member.

In the above-described first control example, the control flow is configured based on what round has been started in the effect processing S2505 during the jackpot, but the control flow is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the start of the round game R in which the ball can pass through the specific area 4830, the start of the round game R in which the operation effect is started, etc. Control based on the start of a specific effect A flow may be configured. In this case, even if there is a change in the number of rounds in which the effect is to be executed due to a change in specifications, etc., it is possible to eliminate the need for a major change in the control flow, thereby reducing the burden of changing the specifications. can.

Also, in the jackpot medium effect processing S2505, the control flow is configured so that the flag turned on in the control flow when it is determined to be the 3rd round is turned off in the control flow when it is determined to be the 5th round. , is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be controlled to turn off the flag at the end of the control mode set in the third round, ie, at the end of the round game R of the fourth round. In this case, it is possible to reduce the burden of changing specifications when adopting a 4-round jackpot game.

In the second control example described above, the case where the ball flows down toward the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 by drive control in which only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 opens and closes has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting the opening/closing plate 1300 described in the first embodiment and controlling the solenoid 1510 in a driving (exciting) mode that maintains the opening/closing plate 1300 in a closed state for a predetermined period during the round game R, the auxiliary ball entrance The ball may flow down to 9111. In this case, the ball can flow down to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 without dividing the board that guides the ball to the first specific prize winning opening 1000a.

Further, in this case, by setting the period for which the open/close plate 1300 is kept closed to less than 0.2 seconds, before the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (while it is about to be discharged), the discharge port 1150 is opened again. can restrict the passage of the ball of Therefore, the balls can flow down to the auxiliary ball inlet 9111 without reducing the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 .

In the second control example described above, the display modes of the round number display section 714 and the sub-round display section 714b are controlled to be switched based on the passage of the waiting time TK. There is no limit. For example, it may be controlled to be switched based on the number of balls that have passed through the first specific winning hole 1000a. In this case, by controlling to switch the display based on nine balls stored in the first specific winning hole 1000a (the storage channel 1231 is full in the overhanging state of the interference member 6930), It is possible for the player to grasp the change timing of the display mode as the timing when the storage channel 1231 becomes full.

The number of balls inside the storage channel 1231 may be determined by the value of the remaining ball counter 203p, or the number of balls may be directly detected by disposing a separate contact sensor in the storage channel 1231. You can do it.

In the second control example, the case where the character "+chance" is displayed as the excessive winning possibility increase notification mode 721 at a predetermined timing of a predetermined jackpot type has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. None. For example, regardless of the type of jackpot, during the period in which the ball can enter the auxiliary ball entrance 9111, as the excess winning possibility increase notification mode 721, the characters "+ chance" may be displayed. During the period when the ball cannot be entered into the ball opening 9111, control may be performed so that the characters "+chance" of the excessive winning possibility increase notification mode 721 can be displayed as a sway display. For example, when the round number display section 714 is displayed brightly, the characters "+chance" may be displayed.

In addition, as the excessive winning possibility increase notification mode 721, the characters "+chance" may be continuously displayed for a certain period of time, or displayed so as to be switched between display and non-display in a short period of time. can be

In the second control example, whether or not the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened on one side is controlled based on the jackpot type and the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the occurrence frequency and occurrence timing of one-sided opening may be changed based on the type of jackpot and the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot. In this case, it is possible to suppress the shooting mode in which the ball is aimed to reach the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 at the timing when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed (the effect of the shooting mode is reduced).

In the third control example, the case where the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 continue to be discharged while the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting the interference member 6930 and controlling it to be in the overhanging state at a predetermined timing, it is possible to construct a case where the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 even while the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state. be able to. This makes it possible for the player to complicate the selection of the shooting mode of the ball, thereby preventing the player from carelessly playing the game.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Points to prevent winning more than the target number>
A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A game machine comprising: ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry hole; and detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball entry hole. a ball entry preventing means for making it difficult for a ball to pass through the ball entrance in a state in which the detecting means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the ball entrance during a predetermined period of time; Machine A1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the detecting means is arranged so that the detection opening of the big winning opening is oriented sideways, and the operation member for rolling the balls toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates when it passes through a mouth, and by dropping the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the movement, prevents more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection mouth of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a plurality of balls unexpectedly rolls on the action member, the excess balls are generated between the start of the action of the action member and the time when the balls drop from the action member. may pass through the detection port, there is a problem that more than a predetermined number of balls may pass through the detection port.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball after the predetermined number to pass through the detection means by the ball entry prevention means. Therefore, regardless of the momentum of the ball when it is placed upstream of the entrance, the ease with which the ball passes through the entrance is evaluated as It can be changed with subsequent spheres. As a result, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection opening.

The ball entry prevention means may be means for changing the ease with which the ball passes through the entrance according to the detection result of the detection means, or means that always maintains the ease with which the ball passes through the entrance. are exemplified.

In the game machine A1, the ball entry prevention means comprises a storage means for storing a ball that has passed through the ball entrance, a discharge port through which the ball passes when coming out of the storage means, and the discharge port. a discharge switching means for switching between a first state in which a ball can pass through and a second state in which a ball cannot pass through the discharge port; A game machine A2, characterized in that it is formed with a capacity that accommodates the predetermined number of balls at maximum.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, since the accommodation means is formed with a capacity for accommodating a maximum of a predetermined number of balls between the ball entrance and the ejection port, ejection switching is possible. When the means is maintained in the second state and balls are stored in the storage means, the balls stored in the storage means can prevent the balls after the predetermined number from passing through the ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the balls after the predetermined number from passing through the entrance.

In the game machine A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that the incoming ball switching means can be maintained in the second state while the ejection switching means is in the first state.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the storage means from the ball entrance while the ball is being discharged from the storage means. The operation timings of the ejection switching means and the incoming ball switching means may be the same or different.

A game machine A4, wherein the game machine A2 or A3 is provided with a driving means that is used as both the ejection switching means and the incoming ball switching means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by the shared driving means. As a result, space saving and cost saving can be achieved.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the ejection switching means switches from the first state to the first state after the entering ball switching means starts the state change from the second state to the first state. The game machine A5 is characterized in that the state changes are ordered in such a manner that state changes are started toward two states, and the state changes are completed substantially simultaneously.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the ball entering the storage means is discharged from the discharge port after the ball entry switching means is in the first state. While preventing (preventing irregular winning), it is possible to start the operation of the ball entry switching means from the second state before the discharge of the ball from the discharge port is completed, so that the ball is discharged from the discharge port. The number of balls that pass through the entering ball switching means and flow down the game area to the out port can be reduced compared to the case where the entering ball switching means is started after the completion of the above.

The order of state changes may be performed by sequentially transmitting the driving force to each switching means, or each switching means may be provided with its own driving means to control the same timing. can be

A gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, it comprises changing means for changing the maximum number of pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating means.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A2 to A5, the maximum number of accommodation means can be changed by the change means, so that temporarily (for example, in a specific round) It is possible to form a state in which more balls than the number are accommodated in the accommodation means. As a result, the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, it is possible to reconfigure a gaming machine with a predetermined number of numerical values changed by using housing means of the same shape (it is possible to deal with differences in specifications). As a result, the development cost can be suppressed compared to the case where the shape is created for each specification.

In the gaming machine A6, the ball entrance is communicated with the first ball entrance and downstream of the first ball entrance with the accommodation means so that the ball that has flowed down the game area can pass therethrough. a second ball entrance whose passability is switched by the ball entrance switching means, and a case where the ball enters from the first ball entrance to the accommodation means, and a case where the ball enters from the second ball entrance to the accommodation means. The maximum storage number of the storage means is changed depending on when the ball enters the means, and the change means selectively sets from which entrance the ball can pass through. Gaming machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, both the ball entering from the first ball entrance and the ball entering from the second ball entrance can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the space required compared to the case where separate storage means are provided for each.

In the gaming machine A6, the change means includes interference means capable of projecting into the interior of the accommodation means, and the interference means projects into the interior of the accommodation means and interferes with the stored balls; A game machine A8 characterized in that the maximum number of pieces accommodated by the accommodation means is changed depending on whether the game machine A8 is retracted to the outside of the game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the number of balls to be accommodated can be changed by changing the internal volume of the accommodation means without changing the entry path of the balls into the accommodation means. Therefore, the stored number can be switched without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine A8, the interference means protrudes from the back side of the game area into the inside of the accommodation means, and is configured so that the ball can be arranged on the front side when retracted. Game machine A9.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8, the interference means at the time of withdrawal can be hidden by the balls arranged in front. This makes it possible to obscure the operation of the interfering means while eliminating the need for an additional shielding member.

<Point AK to hide the number of stored balls>
A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A game machine comprising: ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry hole; and detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball entry hole. a ball entry preventing means for making it difficult for a ball to pass through the ball entrance in a state in which the detection means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the ball entrance during a predetermined period; is a gaming machine comprising storage means for storing balls that have passed through said ball entrance, and visibility obscuring means for making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the balls stored in said storage means. AK1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the detecting means is arranged so that the detection opening of the big winning opening is oriented sideways, and the operation member for rolling the balls toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates when it passes through a mouth, and by dropping the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the movement, prevents more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection mouth of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the visibility downstream of the detection port does not change, the performance effect of the ball passing through the detection port becomes insufficient, and there is a possibility that attention will be reduced. there was a point

On the other hand, according to the game machine AK1, since at least a part of the balls housed in the housing means is made difficult to be visually recognized by the visibility obscuring means, different effects are produced depending on the number of balls housed in the housing means. can reduce the likelihood that a player's expectations of the resulting action will match the resulting action. As a result, it is possible to improve attention to the above-described effect.

In the gaming machine AK1, there are a discharge port through which the ball passes when coming out of the storage means, a first state in which the ball can pass through the discharge port, and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port. and discharge switching means for switching between the balls, wherein the storage means is formed with a volume capable of storing a maximum of the predetermined number of balls between the ball entrance and the discharge port. Machine AK2
According to the game machine AK2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AK1, balls can be stored in the storage means, so that the period in which the performance by the balls can be maintained can be lengthened.

A game machine AK3 characterized in that the game machine AK1 or AK2 is configured so as to change the action of the visibility obscuring means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the establishment of the predetermined condition.

Note that the form of the predetermined condition is not limited at all. For example, as the predetermined condition, it may be detected that the player has operated an operation means that can be operated by the player at a predetermined timing. In this case, the degree of deviation between the operation timing instructed by the display means or the like and the actual operation timing is detected, and the degree of change in the action of the visibility obscuring means is changed according to the magnitude. Also good. For example, a change may be made so that the visibility of the ball housed in the housing means is better when the degree of deviation is small compared to when the degree of deviation is large. In this case, the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be improved. Also, the opposite is possible.

Further, for example, the predetermined condition may be that the ball has passed through a predetermined ball entrance. In this case, for example, the degree of change in the action of the visibility obscuring means may be changed according to the number of balls passing through a predetermined ball entrance within a predetermined period. For example, a change may be made so that the greater the number of balls that have passed through the ball entrance, the better the visibility of the balls housed in the housing means. In this case, the player can be motivated to shoot more balls. Also, the opposite is possible. In this case, since it is possible to force the player to diligently adjust the shooting intensity of the ball, it is possible to suppress careless play.

<Points to suppress wasted balls at intervals while suppressing over-winning>
A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A game machine comprising: ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry hole; and detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball entry hole. delaying means for delaying the flow of the ball at the upstream position of the ball entrance when the ball-entering switching means is in the second state, compared to when the ball-entering switching means is in the first state; A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the detecting means is arranged so that the detection opening of the big winning opening is oriented sideways, and the operation member for rolling the balls toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates when it passes through a mouth, and by dropping the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the movement, prevents more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection mouth of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the ball that falls from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the out port. There is a problem that the actual number of hits varies depending on whether the player's hitting technique is high or low.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the ball entry switching means is in the second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream position of the ball entry port cannot be guided to the entry port, the delay means acts. By delaying the flow of the ball, the ball can be easily arranged at the position on the upstream side of the ball entrance until the ball entrance switching means is switched to the first state. If the ball entry switching means is in the first state while the ball is in the upstream position of the ball entrance, the ball is guided to the ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to reduce the effect of the player's hitting technique on the actual number of balls put out, so that a game machine friendly to beginners can be constructed.

Note that the mode of the delay means is not limited. For example, it may be a fall control means that is composed of a laterally elongated member that supports the ball from below and controls the drop to the end, or a projecting means that is formed of a projection that decelerates the ball by contact.

The game machine B2 in the game machine B1 is characterized in that the delay means increases the degree of delay when the ball is placed on the downstream side compared to when the ball is placed on the upstream side.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball increases when the ball is arranged downstream of the delay means, so the attention of the ball flowing down along the delay means increases. can be improved.

It should be noted that the level of the degree of delay is not limited at all. For example, it may be the speed of the ball, or the degree of reverse flow of the ball when the incoming ball switching means is switched from the second state to the first state.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the delay means is formed in a shape such that the ball arranged downstream is spaced farther from the opening direction of the ball entrance than the ball arranged upstream. A gaming machine B3 characterized by:

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the delay means is arranged in a manner in which the distance between the opening direction of the ball entrance and the ball is increased when the delay means is arranged on the downstream side of the delay means. is formed, it is possible to suppress direct entry into the ball entrance when the ball flows down the delay means vigorously.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the entering ball switching means includes raising means for raising the game area when the state changes from the second state to the first state, and the delay means includes the first A game machine B4 characterized in that it is arranged below the lifting means in the state.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the delay means is arranged below the lifting means in the first state, so that the ball is moved from the incoming ball switching means. The ball can be delayed while being visually recognized by the player as if it had fallen. Thereby, attention to the sphere can be improved.

The game machine B5 is characterized in that the gaming machine B4 is provided with a rise restricting means arranged upstream of the ascending means in the ball flow-down path for restricting the upward movement of the ball and guiding it in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the upward movement of the ball is restricted by the upward regulating means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction. It is possible to prevent the ball from flying in an unexpected direction.

The game machine B6 is characterized in that the game machine B5 is provided with a relief ball entry opening that allows the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the rise control means to enter and gives the player a predetermined profit.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, a benefit other than the profit generated when the ball passes through the ball entrance due to the ball flying due to the load applied when the lifting means rises. , can give the player the profit that occurs when the ball passes through the relief entrance. As a result, even when the ball deviates from the flow-down path to the ball entrance, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being lowered, and the movement of the ball can improve the interest of the player.

In any one of game machines B1 to B6, the game machine B7 is characterized in that the delay means comprises a variable action part that gives different actions to the ball depending on the difference in the manner of reaching the delay means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the effect of delaying the ball can be varied depending on the mode of arrival at the delaying means. This makes it possible to select different actions for each sphere.

In addition, the aspect of the difference in the arrival aspect is not limited. For example, it may be a difference in the arrival position of the ball with respect to the ball entrance, or a difference in the flowing direction of the ball until it reaches the delay means.

In the game machine B7, the variable action part delays the flow of the ball that has reached the delay means at a position spaced apart from the ball entrance by a predetermined distance or less, while separating the ball from the ball entrance by a predetermined distance or more. A game machine B8 characterized in that it does not act on a ball that reaches the delay means at a position.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the variable action part delays the flow of the ball for a ball that is close to the ball entrance and the state of the ball switching means cannot be switched in time. On the other hand, it is possible to maintain an appropriate game speed by not allowing the variable action portion to act on a ball that is far from the entrance and is sufficiently in time to switch the state of the entering ball switching means.

<Point BK to make use of the ball reached at intervals>
A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A game machine comprising: ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry hole; and detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball entry hole. , while the entering ball switching means is in the second state or from the second state, compared with the ball that reaches the entering ball switching means while the entering ball switching means is in the first state The game machine BK1 is characterized by comprising profit giving means for easily giving a profit to a player with a ball that reaches the incoming ball switching means while the state is changed to the first state.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the detecting means is arranged so that the detection opening of the big winning opening is oriented sideways, and the operation member for rolling the balls toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates when it passes through a mouth, and by dropping the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the movement, prevents more than a predetermined number of balls from passing through the detection mouth of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the ball that falls from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the out port. There is a problem that the player has no choice but to play the game carefully because the ball actually hits more or less depending on whether the player's hitting technique is high or low, and the interest may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BK1, by adopting the profit giving means, it becomes easy to give a profit to the player by the ball that arrives while the incoming ball switching means changes state, so that the profit is given to the player. Since chance can be incorporated into the magnitude of profit, caution can be removed from the game, and interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the form of the profit given to the player by the profit giving means is not limited at all. For example, it may be the payout of prize balls, the lottery of predetermined symbols, the acquisition of the right to shift to a high probability state after the end of the big win game, or the confirmation of the next big win.

For example, if the mode of profit given to the player by the profit giving means is a lottery for the special symbol 2, the special symbol 2 can be obtained by making the ball reach the entrance ball switching means at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game. The number of held balls can be increased up to a predetermined upper limit. As a result, when the game shifts to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, since the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 2 is 0, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the reserved special pattern 1 starts to fluctuate. can be done. As a result, in a game machine configured such that the lottery for the special pattern 2 is more advantageous for the player, the possibility of unintentionally obtaining a big win in the lottery for the special pattern 1 and causing a disadvantage to the player is reduced. can do.

A gaming machine BK2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine BK1, a ball is thrown to the profit providing means by a load applied from the incoming ball switching means.

According to the gaming machine BK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BK1, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that a ball is thrown to the profit imparting means when the entering ball switching means is stopped.

In the game machine BK1 or BK2, the profit that can be given to the player by the profit giving means is equal to or greater than the loss that can occur while the incoming ball switching means maintains the second state. .

According to the gaming machine BK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the attention of the player to the profit giving means can be improved, and the player can play a game so as to obtain the profit given by the profit giving means. can be directed to

In any one of gaming machines BK1 to BK3, gaming machine BK4 is characterized in that the profit giving means is controlled so that a plurality of types of periods for maintaining the second state can be selected.

According to the gaming machine BK4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, the period during which the profit giving means is maintained in the second state is selected from a plurality of types, so that the player can select the profit giving means. It is possible to make it difficult to launch the ball by timing the change to the second state. Therefore, in order to obtain the profit obtained by passing the ball through the profit imparting means, it is possible to construct a game feature in which the player has no choice but to continue shooting the ball.

<Points for adjusting the ball output of the jackpot game>
A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A game machine comprising: ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry hole; and detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball entry hole. , when the ball-entering switching means maintains the first state, the number of balls that can pass through the ball-entering hole is associated with the number of balls that passed through the ball-entering hole during the period in which the first state was formed before that state; A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising a number changing means capable of changing the number.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during a jackpot game of the actuating member arranged in the big prize opening can be changed to a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter, and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a game machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching between short-time opening and closing time in which the balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). See US Pat. No. 181,572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can enter the big winning slot is independent in each round, and depends on the manner of launching each ball. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the number changing means changes the number of balls passing through the entrance when the entering ball switching means is in the first state to the number of balls that the entering ball switching means has previously set to the first state. When one state is formed, it can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the entrance hole, so the number of benefits given to the player in a series of operation patterns in which the ball entry switching means repeatedly forms the first state Adjustments can be made.

Note that the method of profit adjustment is not limited. For example, when the ball-entering switching means has formed the first state before, a large number of balls have passed through the ball entrance, and when the ball-entering switching means forms the first state next time, the ball enters the ball. It may be possible to restrict the number of balls that can enter the mouth. For example, acquisition of the right to transition to a high-probability state) may be increased.

In the gaming machine C1, the number changing means includes storage means for storing the balls that have passed through the ball entrance, an exit through which the balls pass when coming out of the storage means, and a ball through the exit. discharge switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can pass through and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port; A gaming machine C2, further comprising an operation mode switching means for changing the number of balls discharged from the storage means according to a difference in the operation mode.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the number of balls housed in the housing means to be discharged from the discharge port can be changed by the operation mode switching means, so that the balls remain in the housing means. and the number of residual balls can be made variable. As a result, the number of balls required to fill the storage means with balls can be changed, and the maximum number of balls passing through the ball entrance can be physically changed.

It should be noted that the mode of difference in operation mode is not limited at all. For example, different operation periods may be used, and when a plurality of discharge ports are arranged, the discharge switching means arranged in which discharge port should be operated (operation target) may be different.

In the game machine C2, the game machine C3 is characterized in that the number changing means comprises an interval maintaining means for maintaining the ball ejection interval from the ejection port.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the intervals at which the balls are discharged from the discharge port are maintained by the interval maintaining means. The number of balls to be discharged from the discharge port can be defined according to the length of the period in which the switching means is in the first state. Therefore, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port can be strictly changed according to the length of the interval predetermined by the jackpot pattern.

Note that the mode of the interval maintaining means is not particularly limited. For example, the shape of the flow path formed so that the direction of the load received by the ball immediately before the discharge port from the subsequent ball is perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened may be used as the means. A rib that protrudes and applies a load to the ball to decelerate the ball may be used as the means.

In game machine C3, game machine C4 is characterized in that said interval maintaining means comprises a protruding part protruding from the inner surface of said containing means in the vicinity of said discharge port in the path of the balls flowing down.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, the projecting portion projects into the flow-down path, so that the falling ball is brought into contact with the projecting portion and decelerated, so that the ball closer to the discharge port can be played. In addition, it is possible to prevent a large change in the flow speed of the ball from the discharge port and to make the flow speed of the ball uniform.

In the gaming machine C4, the housing means includes a discharge path for causing the balls to flow continuously in a predetermined flow direction immediately in front of the discharge port, and the protrusions are arranged alternately from the opposing surfaces constituting the discharge path. A game machine C5 characterized by projecting at predetermined intervals.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the protrusions are alternately projected from the facing surface at predetermined intervals, so that the balls flowing down the discharge path collide with the protrusions to cause the balls to be ejected. It is possible to cause the ball to collide with the protruding portion at predetermined intervals while shifting the position in the vertical direction of the predetermined flowing direction, and the effect of decelerating the ball can be maintained for a long period of time.

In the gaming machine C5, the housing means includes a rolling discharge plate portion that is connected to the discharge path and rolls the ball immediately before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolls on the rolling discharge plate portion. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the ball flowing down speed is set to be higher than the ball flowing down the discharge path.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machine C5, the balls rolling on the rolling discharge plate portion flow down at a higher speed than the balls flowing down the discharge path, so the balls are stored in the storage means. Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) at which balls are discharged from the discharge port can be kept constant.

A gaming machine C7 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the ball entrance has a start opening for judging a big hit of a special symbol when a ball passes through.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the number of times of special symbol jackpot determination and the number of balls entering the entrance can be associated. As a result, the number of payouts in the big win game can be changed according to the number of determinations of the special symbols required until the big win is obtained.

In the game machine C7, a starting ball passage switching means for switching whether or not a ball passing through the starting hole enters the storage means is provided, and the starting ball passage switching means operates in conjunction with the entering ball switching means. A gaming machine C8 characterized by:

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C7, it is possible to reduce the number of driving devices to be provided.

By the way, the discharge port includes a first discharge port and a second discharge port arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching means independently changes the states of the first discharge port and the second discharge port. and the first and second outlets are connected to the receiving means by ejecting balls from the first outlet or ejecting balls from the second outlet (under the same conditions). Alternatively, the number of remaining spheres may be changed.

In this case, the number of balls remaining in the storage means can be changed depending on whether the balls are discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port. Even in this case, the number of balls discharged from the storage means can be maintained.

In addition, the arrangement of the first discharge port and the second discharge port is not limited at all. For example, one may be arranged at the lower end of the containing means and the other may be arranged at an intermediate position of the containing means, or both may be arranged at the lower end and a branched flow path for distributing balls may be arranged upstream thereof. You can do it.

Moreover, the operation modes of the first discharge port and the second discharge port are not limited. For example, one of them may be opened one by one, or both may be opened. When both are opened, the period required to discharge the same number of balls from the storage means can be shortened compared to the case of discharging balls from a single discharge port. Thereby, the interval in the big win game can be shortened, and the number of balls discharged from the out port during the big win game can be reduced.

By the way, the first discharge port may be arranged at the lower end portion of the housing means, and the second discharge port may be arranged upstream of the first discharge port.

In this case, when the ball is discharged from the second discharge port, regardless of the period in which the second discharge port is in the first state, the ball disposed between the first discharge port and the second discharge port is placed in the storage means. can hold. Therefore, even if the number of balls stored in the storage means varies, the number of balls remaining after discharging the balls can be easily kept constant. In addition, even if the number of hit balls is reduced due to ball clogging or the like, it is possible to easily form a state in which the balls remain inside the containing means.

Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be arranged on the downstream side branched from the lower end portion of the housing means.

In this case, from a state in which the same number of balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to switch from which ejection port the ball to be ejected last is ejected by the operation mode of the ejection switching means. From the behavior at the start, it can be difficult to grasp the discharge mode of the ball. That is, for example, when the profit given to the player changes depending on which outlet the ball is ejected last, the player's attention to the flow of the ball can be improved.

<During the round, produce as if the round has switched>
A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A game machine comprising: ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry hole; and detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball entry hole. and open state switching means capable of switching between a period in which the ball is likely to pass through the ball entrance and a period in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through, when the ball entering switching means maintains the first state. A gaming machine CK1 characterized by

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during a jackpot game of the actuating member arranged in the big prize opening can be changed to a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter, and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a game machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching between short-time opening and closing time in which the balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). See US Pat. No. 181,572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the manner in which the ball enters the big winning hole is the same in each round, there is a problem that it may be difficult to sufficiently improve the attention to the big winning hole. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CK1, while the ball-entering switching means maintains the first state, attention to the ball-entering state of the ball-entering opening can be improved by the open-state switching means. .

In addition, the mode of the open state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the period may be changed by changing the operation mode of a movable object arranged upstream of the detection means, or the period may be changed based on the number of balls entering the detection means. can be

The gaming machine CK2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CK1, there is provided an informing means for informing a change in profit given to the player while the incoming ball switching means maintains the first state.

According to the gaming machine CK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CK1, if the notification of the notification means is confirmed, the change in the profit that the player can obtain while the incoming ball switching means maintains the first state can be confirmed. person can grasp. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the game mode by reporting from the reporting means.

In addition, the mode of notification by the notification means is not limited at all. For example, while presenting the number of rounds of the jackpot game, a break may be made in the middle of the round game R (such as switching the screen or outputting a sound), or the display of the number of rounds may be turned off. , sub-round may be displayed as if a new round game R had started. In any case, if the start timing of the round game R and the timing of notification by the notification means are set as game breaks, the number of times exceeding the maximum number of controlled rounds (for example, 16 rounds), the break of the jackpot game By setting (for example, 20 breaks), the interest of the player can be improved.

The gaming machine CK2 is configured to facilitate providing a predetermined profit to the player based on the ball-entering switching means guiding the number of balls exceeding the number allowed to pass through the ball-entering hole. A gaming machine CK3 characterized by comprising conditional profit giving means.

According to the gaming machine CK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CK2, when balls exceeding the number that can pass through the ball entrance are shot, it is possible to prevent all of the balls from becoming useless balls. As a result, it is possible to link the enhancement of interest to the player by the effect and the substantial profit (payout of prize balls).

It should be noted that an instruction to continue shooting may be given so that the player does not stop shooting when he or she sees that the ball has stopped passing through the entrance. Various aspects are exemplified as aspects of notification in this case. For example, it may be a direct notification such as "Continue firing", a notification that euphemistically suggests the number of launches such as "If you put 5, there is a great chance", or a notification that "There is something you can see through the ball". It may be annunciation (in this case, a light beam that is invisible when there is no ball, and visibly displays some figure or picture when there is a ball, is irradiated to a predetermined position near the entrance switching means where the balls are accumulated. is preferred).

<Points for adjusting the ball output of the jackpot game for each round>
A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A game machine comprising: ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry hole; and detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball entry hole. switching driving means for switching and driving the entering ball switching means to the second state when a specified number of balls pass through the ball entering opening while the entering ball switching means is in the first state; a game machine DK1, characterized by being provided with adjustment means configured to be able to adjust excess balls entering the ball entrance with reference to a specified number.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during a jackpot game of the actuating member arranged in the big prize opening can be changed to a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter, and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a game machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching between short-time opening and closing time in which the balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). See US Pat. No. 181,572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can enter the big winning slot is independent in each round, and depends on the manner of launching each ball. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DK1, since the adjustment means can adjust the excessive ball entry into the ball entrance, the profit given to the player by the ball passing through the ball entrance can be changed in a short time. It can be leveled for a long period of time.

It should be noted that the mode of adjusting the excess ball entry is not limited at all. For example, the incoming ball switching means may adjust the number of balls that can pass through the ball entrance during the first state as a reference so that the same amount of excess balls can be expected each time. ), the second excess ball that occurs when the first state is entered at other (multiple or single) timings is reduced compared to the first excess ball that occurs when the first state is entered at the timing. , It may be adjusted so that the first excess ball and the second excess ball are balanced, and if the period in which the ball switching means is in the first state is short or long It is also possible to distinguish the number of occurrences of excess balls and adjust them so that they are balanced.

It should be noted that the incoming ball switching means may be arranged in a single arrangement or may be arranged in a plurality.

The game machine DK1 is provided with load applying means configured to apply a load directed toward the detecting means to a ball arranged at a predetermined position upstream of the detecting means in the process of switching drive by the switching driving means. A game machine DK2 characterized by.

According to the game machine DK2, in addition to the effects of the game machine DK1, the ball arranged on the upstream side of the detection means can be easily detected by the detection means due to the action of the load imparting means.

The number of balls to which the load is applied by the load applying means is not limited at all. For example, one or more may be used.

In the game machine DK1 or DK2, as a state at the start of the switching drive, a post-driving ball entry that can be switched between an allowable state in which passage of a ball into the ball entrance is permitted and a restricted state in which passage of a ball is restricted. A gaming machine DK3 characterized by comprising state switching means.

According to the gaming machine DK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, whether or not the ball can pass through the entrance regardless of the manner in which the ball flows into the entrance or the operation speed of the entrance switching means. can be defined by the ball entry state switching means after driving, it is possible to easily adjust the degree of excess entry of the ball into the ball entrance.

In any one of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, a load applied from a ball to the entering ball switching means is applied in a direction along a direction in which the entering ball switching means is driven during the switching drive. Machine DK4.

According to the game machine DK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines DK1 to DK3, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the load from the ball prevents the change of the state of the ball entry switching means to the second state. .

As for the mode of applying the load from the ball, for example, the incoming ball switching means is configured to be driven in a manner of dropping (dangling) downward by the switching drive, and the own weight of the ball is applied to the incoming ball switching means. A case is illustrated.

<Points for adjusting the ball output of the jackpot game for each round>
A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A game machine comprising: ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry hole; and detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball entry hole. switching driving means for switching and driving the entering ball switching means to the second state when a specified number of balls pass through the ball inlet during the first state; post-driving ball entry state switching means capable of forming an allowable state for allowing passage of a ball into the ball entrance and a restricting state for restricting passage of a ball after the switching drive is started by the switching drive means; A gaming machine D1 characterized by comprising:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during a jackpot game of the actuating member arranged in the big prize opening can be changed to a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter, and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a game machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching between short-time opening and closing time in which the balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). See US Pat. No. 181,572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can enter the big winning slot is independent in each round, and depends on the manner of launching each ball. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the post-driving ball entry state switching means switches whether or not the ball can enter after the ball entry port is closed by the switching driving means, so that an extra ball can enter. The timing can be reduced, and the number of prize balls can be made uniform throughout the whole jackpot game.

In the gaming machine D1, the ball entrance has a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance, and the post-driving ball entrance state switching means forms the restricted state at the first ball entrance. A game machine D2 characterized in that the allowable state is formed in the second ball entrance.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the number of balls exceeding the specified number is increased when the balls pass through the first ball entrance and when the balls pass through the second ball entrance. can be switched whether or not to enter the ball, it is possible to improve attention to which ball entry opening the ball entry switching means opens.

In the game machine D2, the first ball entrance has a drop hole on the front side of the opening, and when the ball entrance switching means starts switching to the second state, the first ball entrance is dropped from the front side of the opening of the first ball entrance. A game machine D3 characterized in that it is constructed in such a manner that a ball arranged on the upstream side is dropped into the drop hole.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2, even when the ball remains on the upstream side of the first ball entrance, the ball is dropped into the drop hole while the ball entry switching means maintains the second state. It can be dropped to and moved away from the ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to prevent balls exceeding the specified number from passing through the first ball entrance.

<Points where balls join from multiple winning ports to the storage channel>
A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A game machine comprising: ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry hole; and detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball entry hole. a storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of balls that have passed through said entrance; A game machine EK1, characterized in that the game machine EK1 is characterized by comprising a discharging means for discharging, and configured to be able to switch the incoming ball switching means to the first state before the discharging action by the discharging means is completed.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during a jackpot game of the actuating member arranged in the big prize opening can be changed to a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter, and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a game machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching between short-time opening and closing time in which the balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). See US Pat. No. 181,572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can enter the big winning slot is independent in each round, and depends on the manner of launching each ball. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine EK1, the discharge action by the discharge means can be terminated while leaving the balls that have been terminated in the storage means, so the number of balls that can enter the ball entrance in each round is related. can be made Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference in prize balls throughout the jackpot game.

In addition, since the ball can be stored in the storage means for a period in which the state of the ball entry switching means is switched multiple times, the number of balls that can pass through the ball entrance while the ball entry switching means is maintained in the first state is more balls can be accommodated in the accommodation means. As a result, it is possible to notify the target of the frequency of ball entry, so that it is possible to indicate to the player the gaming efficiency of the gaming machine in which he or she is currently playing.

Incidentally, the means for indicating the game efficiency is not limited at all. For example, the ratio of the number of awarded balls to the number of fired balls (prize balls/number of fired balls) may be used. It may be an index indicating whether or not the ball is being passed through.

It should be noted that the number of ball entrances, ball entrance switching means, and housing means is not limited to one, and may be plural. In this case, an entrance switching means and a storage means may be provided corresponding to each entrance, and the state of each entrance switching means may be changed in order. It may be configured such that the state changes partially at the same time.

A gaming machine EK2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EK1, whether or not the action of discharging ends with the ball housed in the housing means can be adjusted according to the shooting mode of the ball.

According to the gaming machine EK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EK1, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in a game in which game balls are shot toward the entrance.

In the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the ball entrance has at least a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance, and the balls passing through the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance are merged. A gaming machine EK3 characterized in that the accommodation means is formed by:

According to the game machine EK3, in addition to the effects of the game machine EK1 or EK2, the balls that have passed through the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance join together inside the containing means capable of containing a predetermined number of balls. Therefore, the number of balls that can pass through the second ball entrance can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the first ball entrance. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first ball-entering opening and the second ball-entering opening (the accompanying number of balls to be paid out) can be made uniform throughout the game.

A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A game machine comprising: ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry hole; and detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball entry hole. a storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of balls that have passed through said ball entrance, said ball entrance having at least a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance; Alternatively, the gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the storage means is formed in such a manner that the balls passing through the second ball entrance are merged.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during a jackpot game of the actuating member arranged in the big prize opening can be changed to a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter, and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a game machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching between short-time opening and closing time in which the balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). See US Pat. No. 181,572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can enter the big winning slot is independent in each round, and depends on the manner of launching each ball. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the balls that have passed through the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance are merged inside the storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of balls. The number of balls that can pass through the second ball entrance can be varied in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first ball-entering opening and the second ball-entering opening (the accompanying number of balls to be paid out) can be made uniform throughout the game.

In the gaming machine E1, when the storage means is empty, the number of balls that can be stored in the storage means by passing through the first ball entrance and the number of balls that can be stored in the storage means by passing through the second ball entrance The game machine E2 is characterized in that the number of balls that can be accommodated in the means is different.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first ball entrance and the number of balls that can enter the second ball entrance are different. It is possible to improve the player's attention to whether the ball entrance is opened.

In the game machine E2, the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first ball entrance is set to be smaller than the number that can be accommodated from the second ball entrance, and a predetermined upper limit number of balls is discharged when each entrance is closed. The upper limit number is set to be the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first ball entrance, and the first ball entrance is opened between openings when the second ball entrance is opened multiple times. A gaming machine E3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the ball passing through the second ball entrance before opening the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance after opening the first ball entrance A passing ball can differ in the substantial benefits given to the player.

That is, when passing through the second ball entrance before the first ball entrance is opened, even if more balls than the number that can be accommodated from the first ball entrance have passed through the second ball entrance, they have passed. Since the number of balls after subtracting the remaining amount will be accommodated from the first ball entrance, the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first ball entrance is the same as the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first ball entrance. The player only gets the same profit as if he passed the number of coins.

On the other hand, if the number of balls that pass through the second ball entrance after the first ball entrance is opened is more than the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first ball entrance, they will be deducted. Players can gain additional benefits because they are not ripped off.

The setting of the number of game balls that can be accommodated is performed in various ways. For example, this can be done by setting the length and thickness of the flow path in which the game balls are accommodated. In addition, the change in the substantial profit given to the player is not limited to the number of prize balls. can be done.

<Points where the interfering member protrudes>
A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A game machine comprising: ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry hole; and detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball entry hole. and interfering means arranged in a flow-down path of the ball passing through the ball inlet and capable of being switched between an extended state in which interference with the ball is possible and a retracted state in which the ball is not interfered with. Gaming machine F1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during a jackpot game of the actuating member arranged in the big prize opening can be changed to a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter, and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a game machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching between short-time opening and closing time in which the balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). See US Pat. No. 181,572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can enter the big winning slot is independent in each round, and depends on the manner of launching each ball. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the interference means is arranged in the flow-down path of the ball that has passed through the ball entrance, by maintaining the interference means in the overhanging state, the distance from the ball entrance to the interference means can clog the path of the ball and prevent more balls from passing through the entrance. As a result, it is possible to adjust the prize balls through the whole jackpot game depending on the operation mode of the interference means.

The game machine F2 is characterized in that, in the game machine F1, it comprises a stopping means for stopping the ball in front of the interference means in the retracted state of the interference means.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the interference means can be changed to the overhanging state while the ball is stationary in front of the interference means. , the motion can be hidden by the sphere. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the action.

In the gaming machine F2, the stationary means is switched between a stationary state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting means is stationary and a passing state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting means is passed. A gaming machine F3 characterized by being configured to be able to change the state change mode of the interference means.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, it is possible to configure a plurality of modes of state change of the interfering means in the passing state of the stopping means. The timing at which the ball passes through the retaining means can be changed in multiple types.

<Making it difficult to predict the type of privilege from the number of stored items>
A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A game machine comprising: ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of a mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry hole; and detection means for detecting a ball entering the ball entry hole. , an operation means arranged in a flow-down path of a ball that has passed through the ball entrance and capable of operating in a plurality of operation patterns, and a profit that a player can obtain is changed based on the operation pattern of the operation means. A game machine FK1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during a jackpot game of the actuating member arranged in the big prize opening can be changed to a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter, and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a game machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching between short-time opening and closing time in which the balls are not possible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). See US Pat. No. 181,572). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in each round is determined based on the situation on the upstream side of the big winning hole, so there is a risk that attention to the downstream side of the big winning hole will decrease. There was a problem that there is

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FK1, the operation means is arranged downstream of the ball entrance, and is configured so that the profit that the player can obtain can be changed according to the operation pattern of the operation means. attention to the downstream side of the

A game machine FK2 characterized in that the game machine FK1 is provided with operation means that can be operated by a player, and the operation pattern of the operation means can be changed by the player operating the operation means.

According to the game machine FK2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FK1, the operation pattern of the operation means can be changed by the player operating the operation means, so the player's motivation to operate the operation means is improved. can be made

In the gaming machine FK2, a first privilege and a second privilege are set as benefits given to the player based on the game ball passing through the ball entrance. The gaming machine FK3 is characterized in that the mode of acquisition of the privilege and the second privilege changes.

According to the gaming machine FK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FK2, the profit obtained by the player directly changes depending on the operating mode of the operating means, so that the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be improved. can.

In addition, the aspect of a 1st privilege and a 2nd privilege is not limited at all. For example, the first privilege may be set as the payout of prize balls, and the second privilege may be set as confirmation of the variable probability state after the jackpot game (as a V probability variable gaming machine), respectively, and the second privilege may be set as confirmation of the jackpot. It may be set (as a small winning game in a 1 type 2 type mixing machine).

Note that the relationship between the first privilege and the second privilege is not limited at all. For example, they may be in a size relationship, may have different properties, or may be in a contradictory relationship.

Here, as a matter of magnitude relationship, for example, the benefits given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege are both payouts of prize balls, and the number of payout balls in the first privilege is the highest. When the number of balls paid out in the 2nd privilege is larger, or when the profits given to the player in the 1st privilege and the 2nd privilege are both transitions to the jackpot game state, the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the 1st privilege is compared. Then, the case where the number of rounds in the second privilege is larger is exemplified.

Also, as another characteristic, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is the transition to the jackpot gaming state, whereas the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the prize. In contrast to cases in which balls are paid out and the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a manifestation of the game state, the acquisition of prize balls that maximizes the profit given to the player in the second privilege. and the like are exemplified.

In addition, as a conflicting relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is related to the player's profit such as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (and the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot) Information) is disclosed, whereas the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the game state after the end of the jackpot game (and information related to the player's profit, such as the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). A case of disappearance is exemplified.

<Point 1 that makes it difficult to predict whether the player will win the V prize based on the actions of the attacker>
A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit granting means that gives a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit granting means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit granting means. and a profit switching means that is switched in the operation mode in which the conditions for maintaining the incoming ball switching means in the first state are the same, the case where the ball can pass through the profit granting means, and the profit The game machine G1 is characterized in that it is possible to switch between a case in which a ball cannot pass through the giving means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a big winning hole is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by a distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. There are gaming machines that However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate of the big prize opening during the period in which the distribution unit is in a state where the ball can be distributed to the advantageous route is the operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into a mode and an operation mode for when the ball does not flow down the advantageous route. Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain attention to the ball heading for the big prize opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the operation mode in which the condition for maintaining the incoming ball switching means in the first state is the same, the ball can pass through the profit giving means and the ball can pass through the profit giving means. Since it can be switched between the impossibility and the impossibility, it does not block the entry of the ball into the entry hole. As a result, it is possible to maintain attention to the ball heading for the ball entrance.

In the gaming machine G1, there is provided a stopping means which is arranged upstream of the profit switching means and switches between a stopping state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball that has passed through the detecting means is passed. , the ball entering switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the retaining means is switched from the retaining state to the passing state, and the ball flowing downstream of the retaining means is switched to the profit switching; A gaming machine G2 characterized by reaching means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the ball that has passed through the ball entrance is stopped once by the stopping means arranged upstream of the profit switching means, so that the ball can be made profitable at an arbitrary timing. Reaching the switching means can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the profit switching means at an unexpected timing no matter how the ball passes through the ball entrance while the ball-entering switching means is in the first state. can.

The gaming machine G2 is characterized by comprising a period changing means for changing a period during which the ball flowing down through the stopping means can reach the profit switching means after switching the stopping means to the passing state. Gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the period changing means changes the period during which the ball can reach the profit switching means after passing through the stopping means. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game property, and improve the interest of the player until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

The period changing means may be means for changing the flow speed of the ball passing through the stopping means, or means for delaying the period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state to when the ball starts to flow down, Means for changing the number of balls parked in the parking means may be used.

In the gaming machine G3, the game machine G4 is characterized in that the period changing means is formed so as to be able to switch the number of balls stopped by the stopping means in accordance with the profit given to the player.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, the number of balls parked in the parking means can predict the profit given to the player. can improve power.

The means for switching the number of balls held by the holding means is not limited at all. For example, it is possible to change the number of balls to be held by the holding means by combining a period in which the holding means is in the passing state and a period in which the incoming ball switching means is in the first state immediately after that.

That is, for example, if the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state is extremely shortened and then the period in which the entering ball switching means is in the first state is extremely shortened immediately after that, the ball stopped in the stopping means Since the number of balls flowing downstream of the retaining means is extremely small, even if no new balls enter from the ball entrance, a large number of balls remain in the retaining means.

On the other hand, if the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state is sufficiently long and then the period in which the entering ball switching means is in the first state is extremely shortened immediately after that, the balls stopped in the stopping means, Since most of the balls flow downstream of the retaining means and no new balls enter from the ball entrance, almost no balls remain in the retaining means.

In this way, by changing the period in which the retaining means is in the passing state and shortening the period in which the incoming ball switching means is in the first state immediately after that, the ball is retained in the retaining means regardless of the shooting mode of the ball. The number of balls can be varied.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the game machine includes setting means for selecting and setting a plurality of closed maintenance periods in which the entering ball switching means is maintained in the second state, and a predetermined period from the end point of the closed maintenance period. The gaming machine G5, wherein the profit switching means is switched to the first state after the lapse of time.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the setting means forms a plurality of types of periods during which the ball entry switching means maintains the second state, so that the ball can be kept in the stationary means. Since the period from passing through until the profit switching means is switched to the first state is formed in a plurality of types, even if the number of balls stopped by the stopping means is the same, the balls pass through the profit giving means. It is possible to control so as to be able to form a case of passing and a case of not passing. Therefore, it is possible to continuously improve the ability to pay attention to the falling of the ball.

Note that, for example, the ball-entering switching means is maintained in the first state for a period sufficiently long enough to allow a specified number of balls to pass through the ball-entering hole, and immediately after that, the ball-entering switching means is maintained in the second state. When the setting means selects the closed maintenance period in such a manner that it is extremely shortened (shorter than the ball that has passed through the stopping means reaches the profit switching means), the ball entry switching means enters the first state immediately after that. By changing the state of the profit switching means from time to time, it is possible to arbitrarily set the period from when the stopping means is in the passing state to when the profit switching means is in the first state. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball that has passed through the stopping means will pass through the profit imparting means. Thereby, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball passing through the stopping means passes through the benefit imparting means regardless of the number of balls staying in the stopping means and the manner of staying (for example, timing).

In any one of the game machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the ball entry switching means is not the first action caused by the entry of a specified number of balls into the entrance, but the second action caused by the elapse of a specified time. A gaming machine G6 characterized by comprising an intentional selection means for intentionally selecting so as to cause the game to be played.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G1 to G5, the action of the intentional selection means limits the switching operation of the entry switching means to the operation at a preset time, It is possible to eliminate the randomness of switching due to the passage of the ball through the entrance. As a result, while the profit switching means is in the first state, it is possible to secure a large amount of time during which ball entry is not permitted.

As an example of the intentional selection means, a state in which the balls do not pass through the entrance is exemplified by the passage of less than a specified number of balls. This can be achieved by intentionally clogging (preventing the ball from passing) on its way through the entrance.

A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit granting means that gives a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit granting means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit granting means. and a profit switching means for switching with, a flow mode determination means for determining whether the flow mode of the ball to the profit giving means is normal, and a notification based on the determination result by the flow mode determination means. a game machine GK1 characterized by comprising: notification means for performing;

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a big winning hole is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by a distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. There are gaming machines that However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that not a few players attempt to gain illegal profits by cheating by applying a load (magnetic force or impact) to the ball before it reaches the sorting portion. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine GK1, when an abnormality is determined, it is notified by the notification means, so fraud can be suppressed. In other words, even if the ball is illegally blocked from flowing down, there is a high possibility that it will not be possible to obtain illegal profits due to the notification. (also referred to as “fraudsters”).

It should be noted that the mode of determination of abnormality is not limited at all. For example, after the profit switching means is switched to the first state, the timing at which the ball is completely discharged may be set, and the notification may be made by not detecting the discharge of the ball even at that timing. In this case, since the notification can be made before the ball passes through the profit switching means, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction from the player.

In the gaming machine GK1, the flow mode determining means makes a determination based on the number of balls placed between the ball entrance and the profit imparting means.

According to the gaming machine GK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GK1, it is possible to determine whether or not the flow of the balls is abnormal regardless of how the game balls accumulate from the ball entrance to the profit giving means. can.

A gaming machine GK3, wherein the gaming machine GK1 or GK2 is characterized by comprising arrangement suppression means for suppressing a change in the arrangement of balls on the upstream side of the profit imparting means after the reporting means has executed the reporting.

According to the game machine GK3, in addition to the effects of the game machine GK1 or GK2, the change in the arrangement of the balls can be suppressed by the arrangement suppression means. Minimize losses.

<Point 2 that makes it difficult to predict whether the attacker will win the V prize from the attacker's actions, there is a paka>
A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit granting means that gives a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit granting means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit granting means. and profit switching means for switching with , wherein the manner in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed depending on the operation mode of the incoming ball switching means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a big winning hole is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by a distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. There are gaming machines that However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate of the big prize opening during the period in which the distribution unit is in a state where the ball can be distributed to the advantageous route is the operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into a mode and an operation mode for when the ball does not flow down the advantageous route. Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain attention to the ball heading for the big prize opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, while maintaining a state in which the ball can pass through the ball entrance, the manner in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed according to the operation mode of the ball entry switching means. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control how the ball reaches the profit switching means.

In the game machine H1, the gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the number of balls related to the time at which the incoming ball switching means is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the length in which the incoming ball switching means is maintained in the second state allows the player to determine in what manner the ball is guided to the profit switching means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the incoming-ball switching means.

In the game machine H1 or H2, a start state is formed in which a ball is started to be thrown to the profit switching means while the incoming ball switching means is being switched from the first state to the second state. Game machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the ball is first thrown to the profit switching means in the starting state, the operation of the entering ball switching means is stopped immediately before the starting state, Since it is possible to return to the first state again, it is possible to form a game feature in which throwing to the profit switching means is not necessarily started even if the action is started from the first state. As a result, it is necessary to directly check whether the ball reaches the profit switching means, so that the attention to the profit switching means can be improved.

A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit granting means that gives a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit granting means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit granting means. , wherein the state changing means is configured to change the state of the entering ball switching means by detecting passage of a ball, and the state changing means A gaming machine HK1 characterized in that the number of balls that can be thrown to the profit switching means can be switched based on the frequency of balls passing through.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through a big winning hole is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by a distribution section, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the distribution result. There are gaming machines that However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate of the big prize opening during the period in which the distribution unit is in a state where the ball can be distributed to the advantageous route is the operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into a mode and an operation mode for when the ball does not flow down the advantageous route. Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain attention to the ball heading for the big prize opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine HK1, the number of balls that can be thrown to the profit switching means can be switched based on the frequency of balls passing through the state changing means. can be changed. As a result, it is possible to improve attention to the behavior of the ball that has passed through the entrance.

In the gaming machine HK1, when the frequency of balls entering the state changing means is higher than a predetermined frequency, an upper limit value is set for the number of balls to be thrown to the profit switching means in a predetermined period. Machine HK2.

According to the gaming machine HK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HK1, it is possible to break away from the game property that the more balls are passed through the state changing means, the better.

A gaming machine HK3 characterized in that in the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, a ball that has passed through the ball entrance when the ball entry switching means is opened and closed a plurality of times can be thrown together to the profit switching means. .

According to the gaming machine HK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, it is possible to associate the ball entering the entrance when the ball switching means is opened and closed in multiple ways with the manner of throwing to the ball switching means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the throwing manner compared to the case where the throwing manner to the entering-ball switching means is independent by opening and closing the entrance-ball switching means once.

It should be noted that the method of counting the number of opening/closing of the incoming ball switching means is not limited at all. For example, it may be counted by the number of operations of the incoming ball switching means, or by the number of occurrences of a combination of operations of the incoming ball switching means (for example, a preset operation pattern such as a small winning game).

An operation means operable by the player, a storage state in which the ball that has entered the incoming ball switching means is temporarily stored, and a passing state in which the ball is released from the storage and can flow down toward the profit granting means. and temporary storage means that can be switched between and, and the state of the temporary storage means can be switched by operating the operation means.

According to the gaming machine HP1, the player can switch the state of the temporary storage means at any timing, so that the willingness to participate in the operation of the operation means can be increased.

The gaming machine HP2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine HP1, a profit given to the player is selected from a first privilege or a second privilege according to the operation timing of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine HP2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HP1, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the operating means.

Note that the relationship between the first privilege and the second privilege is not limited at all. For example, they may be in a size relationship, may have different properties, or may be in a contradictory relationship.

Here, as a matter of magnitude relationship, for example, the benefits given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege are both payouts of prize balls, and the number of payout balls in the first privilege is the highest. When the number of balls paid out in the 2nd privilege is larger, or when the profits given to the player in the 1st privilege and the 2nd privilege are both transitions to the jackpot game state, the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the 1st privilege is compared. Then, the case where the number of rounds in the second privilege is larger is exemplified.

Also, as another characteristic, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is the transition to the jackpot gaming state, whereas the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the prize. In contrast to cases in which balls are paid out and the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a manifestation of the game state, the acquisition of prize balls that maximizes the profit given to the player in the second privilege. and the like are exemplified.

In addition, as a conflicting relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is related to the player's profit such as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (and the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot) Information) is disclosed, whereas the profit given to the player in the second privilege is the game state after the end of the jackpot game (and information related to the player's profit, such as the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). A case of disappearance is exemplified.

In the gaming machine HP2, passage of the ball through the ball entrance is restricted when the ball entry switching means is set to the first state based on the selection of the first privilege. Game machine HP3.

According to the game machine HP3, in addition to the effects of the game machine HP2, the ball is prevented from passing through the ball entrance based on the selection of the first privilege, regardless of the state of the ball entry switching means. Therefore, when the player does not want the ball to pass through the ball entrance, it is not necessary to temporarily stop the shooting of the ball (performing a so-called "stop shot") at the appropriate timing. can. In this case, the player can continuously shoot the ball regardless of the state of the incoming ball switching means, so that the desired game can be played smoothly.

A gaming machine HP4 characterized in that the gaming machine HP3 is controlled so that the game can be continued regardless of the detection time of the ball by the detecting means based on the selection of the first privilege.

According to the gaming machine HP4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HP3, it is possible to realize the game property of restricting ball entry by causing balls to clog the detection means.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, In any one of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, the gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, In any one of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, the game machine Z2 is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3, EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, In any one of G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, and HP1 to HP4, the game machine Z3 is characterized by combining a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. . Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during a jackpot game of the actuating member arranged in the big prize opening can be changed to a long-time opening that allows a specified number of balls to enter, and a specified number of balls to enter. There is a gaming machine that is controlled to change the number of balls that enter the big winning hole in each round by switching between short-time opening and closing times in which balls cannot be released (see, for example, Patent Document 1). : JP-A-2015-181572).
However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is a risk that a large difference may occur in prize balls throughout the jackpot game.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the difference in winning balls.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 consists of a game area where balls flow down, a ball entrance through which the balls flowing down the game area pass, and balls flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance. a ball switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the ball entrance and a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance cannot be guided to the ball entrance; Detecting means for detecting a ball entering the game machine, wherein the containing means stores up to a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball-entering opening, and the ball-entering switching means is switched to the second state. and discharging means for discharging the ball housed in the housing means from the housing means according to the above, and the entering ball switching means can be switched to the first state before the discharging action by the discharging means is completed. be.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is configured such that, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, whether or not the action of ejecting ends with the ball housed in the housing means can be adjusted according to the shooting mode of the ball. .
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the ball entrance comprises at least a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance, and the first ball entrance The storage means is formed in such a manner that balls passing through the port or the second ball entrance port join together.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to reduce the difference in prize balls.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to increase the desire to participate in a game in which game balls are shot toward the entrance.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the second ball entrance is associated with the number of balls that have passed through the first ball entrance. The number of spheres that can pass through can be changed.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 third pattern display device (a part of notification means)
110 Main controller (part of changing means, part of period changing means, part of setting means, part of intentional selection means, part of flow mode determination means)
300 operation button (operation means)
640 Second entrance (part of entrance, starter, part of state change means)
640a electric accessory (part of ball entry switching means)
1000a 1st specific winning entrance (a part of entrance, 1st entrance)
1140 Protruding portion (part of gap maintaining means, protruding portion)
1150 discharge port (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means)
1210 thin plate member (means for obscuring visibility)
1231 Storage channel (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means, part of post-driving ball entry state switching means, accommodation means, discharge channel, part of adjustment means)
1231a guide surface (part of interval maintaining means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of gap maintaining means, rolling discharge plate portion)
1235 Protruding portion (part of gap maintaining means, protruding portion)
1240 detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Open/close plate (part of incoming ball switching means)
1310 plate (lifting means)
1331 Ball entry prevention unit (part of ball entry prevention means)
1510, 2810 Solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching drive means)
1600, 2600 Regulating member (part of ball entry preventing means, part of number changing means, part of discharge switching means, stopping means, part of arrangement suppressing means)
2251 Second storage channel (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means, part of post-driving ball entry state switching means, storage means, discharge channel)
2255 second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a 2nd special prize-winning entrance (part of ball entrance, 2nd ball entrance)
2840 slide plate (part of incoming ball switching means)
3181 Additional Prize Entrance (Relief Ball Entrance)
3182 Curved extension plate (rising control means)
3250 drop delay plate (part of delay means)
3251b end face (part of drop hole)
4830 Specific area (part of profit giving means)
4850 distribution device (profit switching means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit giving means)
5900 ball output adjustment device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (interference means, part of period change means, part of adjustment means, part of post-driving ball entry state switching means, part of operation means, part of placement suppression means)
7260 Second drop delay plate (part of delay means, variable action part)
8300, 11300 opening/closing plate (part of incoming ball switching means)
8340 Auxiliary opening/closing member (part of ball entry switching means, part of open state switching means, part of adjustment means, part of load applying means, part of post-driving ball entry state switching means)
9111 Auxiliary Entrance (Part of Entrance, Part of Profit Giving Means, Part of Conditional Profit Giving Means)
10180 Intermediate ejector (part of operating means)
11183 2nd additional prize gate (part of ball entrance)
11190 Opening/closing means (part of post-driving ball entry state switching means)

Claims (1)

A game area where a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A game machine comprising ball entry switching means for switching between a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth cannot be guided to the ball entry hole, and detection means for detecting the ball entering the ball entry hole. in
space constructing means for constructing a predetermined space in which up to a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball entrance can exist simultaneously;
a discharge means capable of discharging the ball existing in the predetermined space from the predetermined space in a state in which the incoming ball switching means is switched to the second state;
The entering ball switching means can be switched to the first state when a ball is present in the predetermined space, and the ball entering the predetermined space in the first state is selected regardless of the number of entering balls. First, all the balls that have entered are configured to be discharged from the predetermined space by the discharge means,
The gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined value is given to the player based on the detection of the ball by the detecting means,
The incoming ball switching means includes a rolling portion on which the ball can roll, and a blocking portion that can block the flow of the ball toward the ball entering port side, and the rolling portion and the blocking portion are integrally formed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be operable at

Images